GSM EDGE Repeater Manual Rev G PDF

GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Product Description and

Users Manual
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AND USERS MANUAL
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Product Description and Users Manual
for off-air Repeaters
This document is valid for Firmware version 1.04

This document is valid for the repeater models:
CSR 922 (R), CSR 924 (R)
CSR 1822, CSR 1824
CSR 1922, CSR 1924
CSFT 922 (R), CSFT 924 (R), CSFT 91822, CSFT 91824
CSFT 1822, CSFT 1824, CSFT 18922, CSFT 18924
CSFT 1922, CSFT 1924
Copyright 2006 AVITEC AB

All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be copied, distributed, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system,
or translated into any human or computer language without the prior written permission of Avitec AB.
The manufacturer has made every effort to ensure that the instructions contained in this document are
adequate and free of errors and omissions. The manufacturer will, if necessary, explain issues which may
not be covered by this document. The manufacturer's liability for any errors in the document is limited to
the correction of errors and the aforementioned advisory services.
This document has been prepared to be used by professional and properly trained personnel, and the
customer assumes full responsibility when using them. The manufacturer welcomes customer comments as
part of the process of continual development and improvement of the documentation in the best way
possible from the user's viewpoint. Please submit your comments to the nearest Avitec AB sales
representative.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
1 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AND USER'S MANUAL
Table of Contents
1
Repeater Technology ................................................................................................................ 13

1.1
Basic Features.................................................................................................................... 13
1.2
Repeater Types .................................................................................................................. 13
1.3
Repeater Applications ....................................................................................................... 17
1.4
Software Overview............................................................................................................ 20
Product Description .................................................................................................................. 21

2.1
Repeater Models................................................................................................................ 21
2.2
Characteristics ................................................................................................................... 22
2.3
Casing................................................................................................................................ 27
2.4
Connections ....................................................................................................................... 28
2.5
Power Supply and Back-up Battery................................................................................... 28
2.6
Building Blocks................................................................................................................. 29
2.7
Internal Connections.......................................................................................................... 34
2.8
Signal Paths ....................................................................................................................... 36
Monitoring and Control ........................................................................................................... 42

3.1
Software Features .............................................................................................................. 42
3.2
RF Parameters ................................................................................................................... 46
3.3
Hardware Identification..................................................................................................... 50
3.4
Alarm System .................................................................................................................... 51
3.5
Repeater Heartbeat ............................................................................................................ 62
3.6
Traffic Measurement ......................................................................................................... 64
3.7
Remote Communication.................................................................................................... 68
3.8
Upgrading Repeater Firmware .......................................................................................... 80
Installation................................................................................................................................. 81
4.1
Prepare the Site.................................................................................................................. 82
4.2
Install the Repeater ............................................................................................................ 98
4.3
Start-up the Repeater ....................................................................................................... 107
4.4
Configure the Repeater.................................................................................................... 112
4.5
Installation Checklists ..................................................................................................... 127
Maintenance ............................................................................................................................ 132

5.1
General ............................................................................................................................ 132
5.2
Preventive Maintenance .................................................................................................. 132
5.3
Product Disposal.............................................................................................................. 132
Specifications ........................................................................................................................... 133

6.1
CSR 922 (R) .................................................................................................................... 133
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
2 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
6.2
CSR 924 (R) .................................................................................................................... 135
6.3
CSR1822 ......................................................................................................................... 137
6.4
CSR1824 ......................................................................................................................... 139
6.5
CSR1922 ......................................................................................................................... 141
6.6
CSR1924 ......................................................................................................................... 143
6.7
CSFT 922 (R) and CSFT 924 (R).................................................................................... 145
6.8
CSFT 1822 and CSFT 1824 ............................................................................................ 149
6.9
CSFT 1922 and CSFT 1924 ............................................................................................ 153
6.10 CSFT 91822 and CSFT 91824 ........................................................................................ 157

6.11 CSFT 18922 and CSFT 18924 ........................................................................................ 161
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
3 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Safety Instructions and Warnings

Guarantees
All antennas must be installed with lightning protection. Damage to power modules, as a result of lightning
are not covered by the warranty.
Switching on AC or DC power prior to the connection of antenna cables is regarded as faulty installation
procedure and therefore not covered by the Avitec warranty.
Caution
(Valid for repeater CSFT 1922 only)
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to
part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses,
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction
manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the
interference at his own expense.
Safety to Personnel
Before installing or replacing any of the equipment, the entire manual should be read and understood. The
user needs to supply the appropriate AC or DC power to the repeater. Incorrect power settings can damage
the repeater and may cause injury to the user.
Caution
Please be aware that the equipment may, during certain conditions become very warm
and can cause minor injuries if handled without any protection, such as gloves.
Throughout this manual, there are "Caution" warnings. "Caution" calls attention to a procedure or practice,
which, if ignored, may result in injury or damage to the system, system component or even the user. Do not
perform any procedure preceded by a "Caution" until the described conditions are fully understood and met.
Caution
This notice calls attention to a procedure or practice that, if ignored,
may result in personal injury or in damage to the system or system component.
Do not perform any procedure preceded by a Caution until described
conditions are fully understood and met.
Safety to Equipment
When installing, replacing or using this product, observe all safety precautions during handling and operation.
Failure to comply with the following general safety precautions and with specific precautions described
elsewhere in this manual violates the safety standards of the design, manufacture, and intended use of this
product. Avitec AB assumes no liability for the customer's failure to comply with these precautions. This
entire manual should be read and understood before operating or maintaining the repeater.
Electrostatic Sensitivity
Observe electrostatic precautionary procedures.
Caution
ESD = Electrostatic Discharge Sensitive Device
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
4 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Semiconductor transmitters and receivers provide highly reliable performance when operated in conformity
with their intended design. However, a semiconductor may be damaged by an electrostatic discharge
inadvertently imposed by careless handling.
Static electricity can be conducted to the semiconductor chip from the centre pin of the RF input connector,
and through the AC connector pins. When unpacking and otherwise handling the repeater, follow ESD
precautionary procedures including use of grounded wrist straps, grounded workbench surfaces, and
grounded floor mats.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
5 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
References
EN 301 502
Harmonized EN for Global System for Mobile communications (GSM); Base station and Repeater equipment
covering essential requirements under article 3.2 of the R&TTE directive (GSM 13.21 version 8.1.2. Release
1999)
ETS 300 342-3
Radio Equipment and Systems (RES); Electro-Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) for European Digital Cellular
Telecommunications systems. Base Station Radio and ancillary equipment and Repeaters meeting phase 2
GSM requirements.
R & TTE Directive:
ETS EN 301 502 (ETS EN 300 609-4/GSM 11.26)
Harmonized EN for Global System for Mobile communications (GSM); Base Station and Repeater
equipment covering essential requirements under article 3.2 of the R&TTE directive
ETS EN 301 489-8
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Standard For Radio Equipment And Services; Part 8: Specific
Conditions For GSM Base Stations
ETS 300 342-3
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) For European Digital Cellular Telecommunications System (GSM 900
MHz and DCS 1 800 MHz); Part 3: Base Station Radio and Ancillary Equipment And Repeaters Meeting
Phase 2 GSM Requirements
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
6 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Contact Information
Phone
+46 8 475 47 00
Fax
+46 8 475 47 99
Email
support@avitec.se
Web
http://www.avitec.se
Address
Avitec AB
Box 20116
S-161 02 Bromma
SWEDEN
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
7 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Definitions, Abbreviations and Acronyms

AEM
Avitec Element Manager

A software tool for operation and monitoring a network consisting of Avitec
products.
ALC
Automatic Limit Control
Antenna
The part of a radio transmission system designed to radiate or receive

electromagnetic waves
Antenna
beamwidth
More properly referred to as the half-power beamwidth, this is the angle of an

antenna pattern or beam over which the relative power is at or above 50% of the
peak power
Antenna
directivity
This is the relative gain of the main beam of an antenna pattern to a reference
antenna, usually an isotropic or standard dipole
ARFCN
Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number. A channel numbering scheme used

to identify specific RF channels in a GSM radio system
Band
In wireless communication, band refers to a frequency or contiguous range of

frequencies. Currently, wireless communication service providers use the 900
MHz, 1800 MHz and 1900 MHz bands for transmission
Base station
The central radio transmitter/receiver that maintains communications with a

mobile radio equipment within a given range
BCCH
Broadcast Control Channel. A downlink point to multipoint logical channel in

GSM used to send identification and organization information about common
control channels and cell services
BSR
Band Selective Repeater
BTS
Base Transceiver Station, one part of a base station.

A base station is composed of two parts, a Base Transceiver Station (BTS) and a
Base Station Controller (BSC). A base station is often referred to as BTS.
The BTS is also sometimes called an RBS or Remote Base Station.
Carrier recovery
A technique for extracting the RF carrier from a modulated signal so that it can be
reinserted and used to recover the modulating signal
Carrier-tointerference ratio,
C/I
The ratio of power in an RF carrier to the interference power in the channel
Carrier-to-noise
ratio, C/N
The ratio of power in an RF carrier to the noise power in the channel
Channel
In all Avitec documentation a channel is the same as a carrier.
Coverage area
The geographical reach of a mobile communications network or system
Coverage hole
An area within the radio coverage footprint of a wireless system in which the RF
signal level is below the design threshold. Coverage holes are usually caused by
physical obstructions such as buildings, foliage, hills, tunnels and indoor parking
garages
CSFT
(Channel Selective) Frequency Translating Repeater
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
8 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
CSR
Channel Selective Repeater. A repeater that operates on a specified channel

within the operating band of the repeater.
dB
Decibel, A technique for expressing voltage, power, gain, loss or frequency in

logarithmic form against a reference.
dBi
Decibels referenced to an isotropic antenna. A technique for expressing a power

gain measurement in logarithmic form using a theoretical isotropic antenna as a
reference
dBm
Decibels referenced to 1 mW. A technique for expressing a power measurement in

logarithmic form using 1 mW as a reference.
Dead spot
An area within the coverage area of a wireless network in which there is no

coverage or transmission falls off. Dead spots are often caused by electronic
interference or physical barriers such as hills, tunnels and indoor parking garages.
See also coverage area.
Distributed
antenna system
A type of antenna system that is distributed or remotely located away from the
transmitter. Such an antenna or series of antennas can be connected via coaxial
cable, leaky feeder or optical fiber link.
DL, Downlink
The transmission path from the base station down to the mobile station
EAM
External Alarm Messaging
EDGE
Enhanced Data for Global Evolution. A technology that gives GSM and TDMA
similar capacity to handle services for the third generation of mobile telecom.
EDGE was developed to enable the transmission of large amounts of data at a high
speed of 384 kilobit per second, or more.
EMC
Electromagnetic Compatibility
The ability of a device or system to function in its intended electromagnetic
environment
ERP
Effective Radiated Power
ETSI
European Telecommunications Standard Institute. The European standardization

body for telecommunications
FH
Frequency Hopping. A periodic changing of frequency or frequency set associated

with transmission. A sequence of modulated pulses having a pseudorandom
selection of carrier frequencies.
FSR
Frequency Shifting Repeater
GND
Ground
GSM
Global System for Mobile Communication. Originally developed as a panEuropean standard for digital mobile telephony, GSM has become the worlds
most widely used mobile system. It is used on the 900 MHz and 1800 MHz
frequencies in Europe, Asia and Australia, and the 800 and 1900 MHz frequency
in North America and Latin America.
Hand-over
The passing of a call signal from one base station to the next as the user moves out
of range or the network software re-routes the call
ISI
Inter Symbol Interference. An interference effect where energy from prior

symbols in a bit stream is present in later symbols. ISI is normally caused by
filtering of the data streams
LED
Light Emitting Diode
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
9 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Link budget
A calculation involving the gain and loss factors associated with the antennas,
transmitters, transmission lines and propagation environment used to determine
the maximum distance at which a transmitter and receiver can successfully
operate.
LMT
Local Maintenance Terminal
LNA
Low Noise Amplifier. A receive preamplifier having very low internal noise
characteristics.
LO-signal
Local oscillator signal
Logical channel
A communications channel derived from a physical channel. A physical channel,

i.e. RF channel, typically carries a data stream that contains several logical
channels. These usually include multiple control and traffic channels.
LOS
Line of Sight. A description of an unobstructed radio path or link between the

transmitting and receiving antennas of a communications system
MS
Mobile Station (e.g. mobile phone)
MTBF
Meantime Between Failures
NA
Not Applicable
NC
Not Connected
NF
Noise Figure
NMS
Network Management System
Noise figure
A figure of merit for receivers and preamplifiers representing the amount of

excess noise added to the signal by the amplifier or receiving system itself. The
lower the noise figure, the less excess noise is added to the signal
OFR
On Frequency Repeater
OMC
Operations and Maintenance Center. A location used to operate and maintain a

wireless network
PA
Power Amplifier. A device for taking a low or intermediate-level signal and

significantly boosting its power level. A power amplifier is usually the final stage
of amplification in a transmitter.
PSTN
Public Switched Telephone Network, standard domestic and commercial phone

service
Radio link
The equipment and transmission path (propagation channel) used to carry on

communications. It includes the transmitting system, the propagation channel and
receiving system
Repeater
A bi-directional Radio Frequency (RF) amplifier that can amplify and transmit a
received Mobile Station (MS) signal in the MS transmit band. Simultaneously it
amplifies and transmits a received Base Transceiver Station (BTS) RF signal in
the BTS transmit band.
RF
Radio Frequency, 9 kHz 300 GHz
Avitec AB
Designation
Abbreviation
Frequencies
Very Low Frequency
VLF
9 kHz - 30 kHz
Low Frequency
LF
30 kHz - 300 kHz
A1009300 Rev G
10 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
RMC
Medium Frequency
MF
300 kHz - 3 MHz
High Frequency
HF
3 MHz - 30 MHz
Very High Frequency
VHF
30 MHz - 300 MHz
Ultra High Frequency
UHF
300 MHz - 3 GHz
Super High Frequency
SHF
3 GHz - 30 GHz
Extremely High Frequency
EHF
30 GHz - 300 GHz
Avitec Repeater Maintenance Console

Software tool to monitor and control Avitec repeaters via local or remote access
RS232
Serial interface standard
RS485
Serial Interface standard
SCPA
Single Carrier Power Amplifier
SDCCH
Slow Dedicated Control Channel. A low-speed bi-directional point-to-point

control channel used to transmit service request, subscriber authentication,
ciphering initiation, equipment validation and traffic channel assignment messages
between the mobile and the network
Service area
The specified area over which the operator of a wireless communications network
or system provides services
Signal-tointerference ratio,
S/I
The ratio of power in a signal to the interference power in the channel. The term is
usually applied to lower frequency signals, such as voice waveforms, but can also
be used to describe the carrier wave. See also carrier-to-interference ratio.
Signal-to-noise
ratio, S/N, SNR
The ratio of power in a signal to the noise power in the channel. This term is
usually applied to lower frequency signals, such as voice waveforms. See also
carrier-to-noise ratio
SIM card
Subscriber Identity Module Card. A small printed circuit board that must be
inserted in any GSM-based mobile phone when signing on as a subscriber. It
contains subscriber details, security information and memory for a personal
directory of numbers. A Subscriber Identity Module is a card commonly used in a
GSM phone. The card holds a microchip that stores information and encrypts
voice and data transmissions, making it close to impossible to listen in on calls.
The SIM card also stores data that identifies the caller to the network service
provider
SMS
Short Messaging Service. A store and forward message service available on most
second generation digital systems that allows short messages (up to 160
characters) to be sent to the mobile and displayed on a small screen. The control
and signaling channels are normally used to deliver these messages
SMSC
Short Messaging Service Center
SW
Software
TCH
Traffic Channel. A logical channel that allows the transmission of speech or data.
In most second generation systems, the traffic channel can be either full or halfrate
Transceiver
A transmitter and receiver contained in one package. A 2-way radio or cell phone
is an example of a transceiver
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
11 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Transmitter
Equipment which feeds the radio signal to an antenna, for transmission. It consists
of active components such as the mixer, driver and PA and passive components
such as the TX filter. Taken together, these components impress a signal onto an
RF carrier of the correct frequency by instantaneously adjusting its phase,
frequency, or amplitude and provide enough gain to the signal to project it through
the ether to its intended target
UL, Uplink
The transmission path from the mobile station up to the base station
WDM
Wavelength Division Multiplexing. A technology that uses optical signals on

different wavelengths to increase the capacity of fiber optic networks in order to
handle a number of services simultaneously
VSWR
Voltage Standing Wave Ratio
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
12 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Repeater Technology
1.1
Basic Features
A basic feature of a mobile communication system is to transmit RF signals between base stations and mobile
radio equipment. If there is a blocking object such as a mountain or a building preventing the base station
signal to reach the mobile equipment, a repeater can be used to extend the base stations coverage area.
Server antenna
Donor antenna
Repeater
BTS
MS
Undisturbed transmission
BTS
MS
Obstacle creating a coverage hole
In the downlink path the repeater will pick up the signal from the existing transmitter via the donor antenna
(see illustration), amplify it and re-transmit it into the desired coverage area via the server antenna. In the
uplink path the repeater will receive signals from mobile transmitters in the covered area and re-transmit
them back to the base station.
Other repeater applications are indoor coverage, tunnel coverage, coverage extension in low traffic areas and
the possibility to install capacity in new locations without installing a new base station.
1.2
Repeater Types
1.2.1
Channel Selective Repeaters
Channel selective repeaters are mainly used for coverage of dead zones, shadows, in-building coverage or
other areas with inadequate signal strength. The output power of a channel selective repeater is sufficient to
cover an area shadowed by a building or other obstacle.
In a channel selective repeater each carrier is separately filtered, amplified and retransmitted. A channel
selective repeater from Avitec can have 1 to 4 channels.
Server antenna
Donor antenna
F1
F1
F1
Repeater
BTS
Avitec AB
MS
A1009300 Rev G
13 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
A channel selective repeater system consists of one repeater unit complemented with one antenna facing the
donor BTS and another antenna directed towards the coverage area. The repeater site needs to be located
where the BTS signal strength is large enough to be usable by the system. Ideally the repeaters donor
antenna should have line of sight (LOS) contact with the BTS antenna. If the signal strength is high enough,
LOS may in some cases not be necessary.
The signal generated by the BTS is picked up at the repeater site via the donor antenna. The repeater filters
and amplifies the signal before retransmitting it at the same frequency over the server antenna.
The isolation between the antennas at the repeater site has to be high in order to prevent degradation of signal
quality and risk of oscillation. Ways to achieve this can be large physical separation between the antennas,
usage of highly directional antennas with good front-to-interference ratio or external shielding between the
antennas. Another option is to use a Frequency Translating repeater (see description below).
Channel selective repeaters may have higher output power per carrier and typically have better spurious
rejection than band selective repeaters. The maximum output power per carrier can be several watts.
1.2.2
Band Selective Repeaters
Band selective repeaters have the same functionality as channel selective repeaters. The difference is that
band selective repeaters do not separate out specific carriers but amplify and retransmit all signals within a
defined frequency band.
The risk for intermodulation distortion leads in most cases to a lower output power per carrier in a band
selective repeater than in a channel selective repeater.
1.2.3
Frequency Translating Repeaters
A frequency translating repeater provides output power levels comparable to a base station. The concept
allows for high gain without the high antenna isolation required for channel selective repeaters.
The frequency translating repeater consists of two units; one donor unit and one remote unit.
Link antennas
Server antenna
F1
F4
RF Link Path
F1
Remote unit
Donor unit
Donor Cell
Base Station
F4
Repeater units
The donor unit is mounted at the base station site where the signal enters the repeater via a directional
coupler. In the donor unit, the signal is translated into another frequency, the link frequency, amplified and
transmitted via a link antenna. At the remote site, a link antenna picks up the signal and feeds it to the remote
unit. The signal is translated back into the original frequency and retransmitted over the server antenna.
Only 2 guard channels are needed between the radio frequency and the link frequency.
The isolation between antennas at the remote site seldom needs to be more than 75dB. This value that can be
achieved with a limited antenna displacement, often as low as 3 meters. The relatively modest isolation
requirement allows the use of omni-directional antennas for the service area.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
14 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Important applications for frequency translating repeaters are road coverage, rural coverage or for
transferring capacity from a base station to another area.
Donor Unit
There are two types of donor units single donor (SD) and double donor (DD).
A single donor (SD) unit has one input connector. The input signal from the BTS is split in two within the
repeater unit. In the opposite direction in the uplink the signals are combined within the repeater before
being sent to the BTS.
A double donor (DD) unit has dual inputs. This can be used in combination with a BTS that uses air
combining, and hence has a separate antenna for each TRU. A double donor unit can alternatively handle two
signals from two separate BTS.
Remote Unit
There are two types of remote units internal combining (IR) and external combining (ER).
In an internal combining (IR) remote unit output from the power amplifiers in the downlink is combined and
filtered before being passed on to the server antenna. In the uplink the signal is separated within the remote
unit.
An external combining remote (ER) unit has two server antenna ports and the signal is combined in the air.
Since the ER model needs no combiner the output signal and gain is 3dB higher than in the IR model.
1.2.4
Band Shifting Repeaters
Band shifting repeaters are based on the same concept as frequency translating repeaters described above.
In contrast to a frequency translating repeater, which uses another frequency within the same band for the
link, a band shifting repeater uses another band. For instance can a repeater operating on the 900MHz band
use the 1800MHz band for the link and vice versa. Other combinations are also possible.
Link antennas
Link and server antenna on the

remote site can often be combined
Server antenna
Band 1
Band 2
RF Link Path
Band 1
Remote unit
Donor unit
Donor Cell
Base Station
Band 2
Repeater units
By using another band for the link the isolation between antennas at the remote site becomes very low. It
might in some applications even be possible to use the same antenna for both the link and the service area.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
15 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
1.2.5
Fiber Fed Repeaters
The fiber fed repeater is primarily designed for coverage of tunnels and large buildings.
Leaky feeder
Tunnel
Directional
coupler
HUB/
OptoBox
BTS
BTS
Optic fiber
Fiber fed repeaters
A fiber fed repeater can be either channel selective or band selective. It receives the RF signals from the base
station via a HUB or an OptoBox which translates the RF signal to an optical signal and sends it to the
repeater via a fiber optic cable. The repeater unit can be installed up to 20 km away from the base station.
Inside the tunnel leaky feeders or antennas can be used for transmission to the mobile units.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
16 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
1.3
Repeater Applications
1.3.1
1.3.1.1
Shadow Coverage and Gap Filling
When there are coverage holes caused by buildings or mountains, a channel selective repeater can be used to
extend coverage into the dead zone. The building can sometimes be used as physical shield to create the
necessary antenna isolation.
Repeater
Repeater
BTS
MS
MS
The terrain is often seen as a limiting factor when striving for flawless radio coverage. The gap-filler
repeaters can be used as a complement to the network of base stations.
1.3.2
1.3.2.1
Low Traffic Coverage
The example shows coverage extension in an area with low traffic by using frequency translating repeaters.
A two sector BTS is extended with two frequency translating repeaters. Both donor units are mounted at the
base station site and connected to the base station via directional couplers.
Each repeater has a different link frequency and transmits the frequency of the opposite base station sector,
thus minimizing interference or multi-path propagation problems. A normal handover is performed between
the repeater coverage area and the neighboring base station coverage area.
F1
F4
RF Link Paths
F2
F8
Remote unit
Remote unit
F4
F8
F2
F1
Donor unit
Donor unit
BTS
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
17 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Since the installation of frequency translating repeaters requires moderate antenna isolation, remote site
requirements are very moderate.
1.3.2.2
Highway Coverage
One two-sector BTS feeds two frequency translating repeaters, each covering an area comparable to the base
station. This is a way to get maximum coverage out of the one BTS, with one connection point for
transmission.
BTS
Since antenna isolation requirements are low for frequency translating repeaters, omni-directional antennas
can be used at the remote sites to achieve good coverage.
1.3.2.3
Fake site Moving Capacity
In this application the BTS is upgraded with an additional sector used for feeding a frequency translating
repeater to cover an area up to 20km away from the BTS. This is an effective alternative when no
transmission point is available in the area to be covered. The frequency translating repeater moves capacity
from the base station site to the new location.
Fake Site
Remote
unit
Donor
unit
BTS
This type of installation takes full advantage of the high output power and high sensitivity of the frequency
translating repeater.
1.3.3
A band shifting repeater can be used in the same way as a frequency translating repeater if the user has access
to frequencies on two different bands.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
18 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
1.3.4
Fiber Fed Repeaters
1.3.4.1
Tunnel Coverage
Fiber optic fed repeaters makes it possible to cover long tunnels from one or two BTS sites nearby. The HUB
unit, which translates between RF and opto signals, is placed at the BTS site and can feed up to 24 repeaters.
The repeaters distribute the signal in the tunnel with antennas or radiating cables (leaky feeders).
Using leaky feeders is normally the most effective way to cover a tunnel, since the signal is evenly distributed
along the tunnel. Achieving good coverage in a train tunnel, for instance, using antennas can be difficult as
the trains tend to block signal propagation.
1.3.4.2
Open Area Coverage
A fiber optic fed repeater can be used in combination with a HUB or an OptoBox to move the repeater away
from the base station. This can in some cases be used to avoid antenna isolation problems.
Omnidirectional
Antenna
Directional Coupler
BTS
Optical Fiber
Fiber Fed
Repeater
HUB/OptoBox
In this example a HUB/OptoBox is placed at the BTS site. The RF signal is tapped from the antenna via a
directional coupler, translated into an optical signal and sent to the repeater over a fiber optic link. At the
repeater site a fiber fed repeater receives the signal, translates it back to RF and sends it to the antenna. This
antenna can be for instance omni-directional because the distance to the BTS is no longer a problem.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
19 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
1.4
Software Overview
Avitec mainly supplies three different types of software; Repeater firmware, Repeater Maintenance Console
(RMC) and Avitec Element Manager (AEM).
1.4.1
Repeater Firmware
The repeater firmware is the software inside the Control Module of the repeater. It is command line based,
with simple SET and GET commands. A rich variety of commands are available to control and monitor all
subsystems of the repeater from a normal VT100 terminal emulation program, such as ProComm or
HyperTerminal. This also means that any standard laptop is able to control a repeater without additional
software installed.
The repeater firmware has three main tasks:
Set and configure parameters in the repeater, such as channel numbers, gain, power levels, and different
report configurations
Monitor and measure alarm sources, alarm parameters and repeater utilization
Send reports and alarms to the repeater OMC
Communication with the repeater can be performed either locally on site or remotely via a modem to the built
in modem.
For local communication a terminal with RS232 interface is needed.
For remote communication a computer with a modem is needed as well as a serial communications program
such as HyperTerminal.
1.4.2
The Repeater Maintenance Console, RMC
RMC is an online software program with an intuitive graphical interface that simplifies control and
installation of the repeater. The RMC is a graphical shell for the repeaters Control Module. It reads
commands and attributes from the repeaters Control Module and displays them in an intuitive layout. This
eliminates the need to learn commands and attributes for controlling the repeater.
Login to the repeater can be made locally via the LMT port or remotely via a modem. As soon as the RMC is
connected it constantly polls the repeater for parameters such as power supply levels, in and out levels,
temperature, traffic, etc.
The program can be installed from diskette or a CD. It is a Windows based application that runs on Windows
NT4.0, Windows 2000 and Windows XP.
The Repeater Maintenance Console is available for all Avitec repeaters.
1.4.3
The Avitec Element Manager, AEM
AEM is a complete operations and maintenance centre for Avitec repeater networks.
The AEM takes control of the repeater once the installation at site is completed. The repeater gets integrated
into the network and will be controlled by the Element Manager. During integration all repeater parameters
and statuses are downloaded into a database. The database is regularly updated with all incoming alarms and
reports, and will hence contain a copy of the repeater configuration so that current repeater information will
be accessible without setting up communication with the repeaters.
Communication between the AEM and the repeaters are message based. This means that the operator does
not have to await message delivery, but will be informed when the message is delivered to the repeater.
The Avitec Element Manager is a Windows based application that runs on Windows NT4.0, Windows
2000, Windows 2003 Server and Windows XP.
For more information please refer to the separate AEM Users Manual.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
20 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Product Description
2.1
Repeater Models
These repeater models are described in this manual.

2 Channels
4 Channels
GSM-EDGE 900
CSR 922 (R)
CSR 924 (R)
GSM-EDGE 1800
CSR 1822
CSR 1824
GSM-EDGE 1900
CSR 1922
CSR 1924
2 Channels
4 Channels
GSM-EDGE 900
CSFT 922 (R)
CSFT 924 (R)
GSM-EDGE 1800
CSFT 1822
CSFT 1824
GSM-EDGE 1900
CSFT 1922
CSFT 1924
Frequency Translating Repeaters consist of two units: one donor unit and one remote unit. There are two
versions of the donor unit SD (single donor) and DD (double donor), and two versions of the remote unit
IR (internal combiner) and ER (external combiner).

2 Channels
4 Channels
GSM-EDGE 900/1800
CSFT 91822
CSFT 91824
GSM-EDGE 1800/900
CSFT 18922
CSFT 18924
Band Shifting Repeaters consist of two units: one donor unit and one remote unit. There are two versions of
the donor unit SD (single donor) and DD (double donor), and two versions of the remote unit IR (internal
combiner) and ER (external combiner).
All repeater models can, as an option, be designed for E-GSM.

Note! The band shifting repeaters CSFT 18922/ CSFT 18924 are designed for E-GSM (on the link) by
default.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
21 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
2.2
Characteristics
These are some of the most important characteristics of the Avitec GSM-EDGE off-air repeaters. For more
detailed information please refer to section 6 Specifications.
2.2.1
CSR 922 (R)

System
GSM/EDGE P-GSM900, E-GSM900 or GSM-R
Channels
2 channels
Operational bandwidth
35 MHz for E-GSM, 25 MHz for P-GSM and 4MHz for GSM-R
Output Power per carrier

UL/DL
+ 37 dBm GSM/GMSK
+ 34 dBm EDGE / 8-PSK average power
Repeater Gain
60 90 dB
CSR 924
Same as CSR 922 but 4 channels and 3dB lower output power.
CSR 1822
System
GSM/EDGE 1800 MHz (DCS 1800)
Channels
2 channels
75 MHz

UL/DL
+ 37 dBm GSM/GMSK
Repeater Gain
60 - 90 dB
CSR 1824
CSR 1922
System
GSM/EDGE 1900 MHz (PCS 1900)
Channels
2 channels
60 MHz

UL/DL
+ 37 dBm GSM/GMSK
Repeater Gain
60 - 90 dB
CSR 1924
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
22 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
2.2.2
CSFT 922 (R)

System
GSM/EDGE P-GSM900, E-GSM900 or GSM-R
Channels
2 channels
35 MHz for E-GSM, 25 MHz for P-GSM and 4 MHz for GSM-R
Output Power
SD/DD:
+ 37 dBm GSM/GMSK
Donor Unit per carrier, DL

Output Power
Donor Unit per carrier, UL
Output Power
Remote Unit per carrier, DL
Output Power
Remote Unit per carrier, UL
SD:
- 10 dBm GSM/GMSK
- 13 dBm EDGE / 8-PSK average
power
DD:
- 7 dBm GSM/GMSK
power
IR:
+ 40 dBm GSM/GMSK
+ 37 dBm EDGE / 8-PSK average
power
ER:
+ 43 dBm GSM/GMSK
power
IR/ER:
+ 37 dBm GSM/GMSK
Repeater Gain Donor Unit
SD: max 42 dB, DD: max 45dB
Repeater Gain Remote Unit,

DL/UL
IR: 75 - 105 dB
ER: 78 - 108 dB
CSFT 924
Same as CSFT 922 but 4 channels, 3dB lower output power in donor and remote unit and 6dB lower gain
in remote unit.
CSFT 1822
System
Channels
2 channels
75 MHz
Output Power
SD/DD:
+ 37 dBm GSM/GMSK

Output Power
Output Power
Avitec AB
SD:
- 10 dBm GSM/GMSK
power
DD:
- 7 dBm GSM/GMSK
power
IR:
+ 40 dBm GSM/GMSK
power
ER:
+ 43 dBm GSM/GMSK
power
A1009300 Rev G
23 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Output Power
IR/ER:
+ 37 dBm GSM/GMSK

DL/UL
IR: 75 - 105 dB
ER: 78 - 108 dB
CSFT 1824
Same as CSFT 1822 but 4 channels, 3dB lower output power in donor and remote unit and 6dB lower
gain in remote unit.
CSFT 1922
System
GSM/EDGE 1900 MHz (PCS 1900)
Channels
2 channels
60 MHz
Output Power
SD/DD:
+ 37 dBm GSM/GMSK

Output Power
Output Power
Output Power
SD:
- 10 dBm GSM/GMSK
power
DD:
- 7 dBm GSM/GMSK
power
IR:
+ 40 dBm GSM/GMSK
power
ER:
+ 43 dBm GSM/GMSK
power
IR/ER:
+ 37 dBm GSM/GMSK

DL/UL
IR: 75 - 105 dB
ER: 78 - 108 dB
CSFT 1924
2.2.3
CSFT 91822 (operates on 900 MHz, uses 1800 MHz for the link)
System
GSM/EDGE P-GSM900 or E-GSM900
Link Frequency Range
Channels
2 channels
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
24 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
35 MHz for E-GSM, 25 MHz for P-GSM
Output Power
SD/DD:
+ 37 dBm GSM/GMSK

Output Power
Output Power
Output Power
SD:
- 10 dBm GSM/GMSK
power
DD:
- 7 dBm GSM/GMSK
power
IR:
+ 40 dBm GSM/GMSK
power
ER:
+ 43 dBm GSM/GMSK
power
IR/ER:
+ 37 dBm GSM/GMSK

DL/UL
IR: 75 - 105 dB
ER: 78 - 108 dB
CSFT 91824
CSFT 18922 (operates on 1800 MHz, uses 900 MHz for the link)
System
Link Frequency Range
GSM/EDGE E-GSM900
Channels
2 channels
75 MHz
Output Power
SD/DD:
+ 37 dBm GSM/GMSK

Output Power
Output Power
Output Power
SD:
- 10 dBm GSM/GMSK
power
DD:
- 7 dBm GSM/GMSK
power
IR:
+ 40 dBm GSM/GMSK
power
ER:
+ 43 dBm GSM/GMSK
power
IR/ER:
+ 37 dBm GSM/GMSK
IR: 75 - 105 dB
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
25 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
DL/UL
ER: 78 - 108 dB
CSFT 18924
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
26 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
2.3
Casing
Avitec repeaters are relatively small and have low power consumption (see table below). They are housed in
a die cast aluminum box which makes them light and offers good heat conduction and waterproofing.
Cooling is accomplished by convection.
The housing conforms to IP65 and NEMA 4 standards.
Dimensions, Weight and Power Consumption
2-channel repeaters
4-channel repeaters
Dimensions
540 x 350 x 150 mm
Weight
22 kg
Power Consumption
160 - 270 W typical, depending on type
Dimensions
540 x 350 x 220 mm
Weight
33 kg
Power Consumption
200 340 W typical, depending on type
2-channel models consist of a box with a lid attached by hinges. 4-channel models consist of two identical
boxes, attached by hinges, where one box serves as a lid.
2-channel repeater
The repeaters are closed with two insex screws. As a
complement the repeaters can be locked with a key.
4-channel repeater
Screws
The external connections at the bottom of the

repeater can be protected with a cover which is
screwed in place.
Lock
Connectors
The repeaters are designed to be mounted on a wall, on a pole or in a 19 rack. They should always be
mounted in a vertical position with the connectors facing downwards.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
27 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
2.4
Connections
All connections are placed at the bottom of the repeater.
Power
Donor
antenna
Ground
Server
antenna
External
alarms
2-channel CSR repeater
2-channel CSFT repeater,

frequency translating or band
shifting repeater
Power
Power
Directional Ground
coupler
Link
antenna
Ground
Link
antenna
Server
antenna 2
External
alarms
Server
External
antenna 1 alarms
Donor unit, single donor
2-channel CSFT repeater,

frequency translating or band
shifting repeater
Remote unit, external combiner
Antenna connections are DIN 7/16 connectors, female

Connector to the directional coupler (donor unit in frequency translating or band shifting repeaters) is Ntype, female
Plinth connection for power is described in 4.2.7 Supply Power to the Repeater
Plinth connection for external alarms is described in 4.2.7 Supply Power to the Repeater
2.5
Power Supply and Back-up Battery
The repeater can be fed by 110/230 V AC, 50/60 Hz or -48 V DC (to be specified on order). The input is
equipped with a surge, EMI, EMC suppression filter.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
28 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Power Supply
There is a back-up battery. In the event of a power disruption this battery will supply the modem and the
Control Module with power during enough time for the repeater to send out an alarm. The battery can be
separately switched off.
For more information see 2.6.5 PSUP, Power Supply.
2.6
Building Blocks
EAIM
Ref gen
PSUP
Control Module
FDM
LIMPA
Power
FDM
FDM
LIMPA
Antenna
Connectors
External
Alarms
Layout of a 2-channel repeater

All repeaters are realized with the same basic modules. The illustration shows a 2-channel repeater. The FDM
in the middle of the box is used in double donor units and in externally combined remote units for frequency
and translating or band shifting repeaters.
4-channel repeaters are built up of two similar units linked by hinges to form one repeater box. In each part of
a 4-channel repeater there is a splitter/combiner to distribute the signals between the LIMPAs. See also 2.7
Internal Connections.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
29 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
2.6.1
LIMPA, Leveling Intermediate frequency Module with

Power Amplifier
The module named LIMPA, Leveling Intermediate frequency Module with Power Amplifier, consist of 4
main components:
Power Amplifier (PA)
Channelizer
Synthesizer
Microcontroller for communications with the Control Module
The PA is designed using linear temperature-compensated gain
blocks and discrete RF-power transistors which are capable of
delivering the required output power.
The channelizer part consists of a down-converter with IF SAW filters, an up-converter and a post amplifier.
The channelizer also contains a power level and gain control unit.
The synthesizer feeds the up and down conversion mixers in the channelizer. The reference frequency for the
synthesizer is generated externally in the Reference Generator. The synthesizer generates two LO 1-signals
used in the down- and up-conversion process. In conventional repeaters, the LO-signals have the same
frequency, but for frequency translating repeaters, the LO-signals will be set on different frequencies. The
synthesizer can be set with an increment of 200 kHz in accordance with GSM/EDGE channel spacing.
2.6.2
FDM, Filtering and Distribution Module
The module named FDM, Filtering and Distribution Module, consists of several parts:
LNA, Low Noise Amplifier
Splitter that divides the signal in two parts
Combiner with high power capability that combines two
signals into one
Duplex filter for separation of the up-link and down-link RF
signals with the given duplex distance. The filters consist of
band-pass filters that provide excellent rejection of out-ofband signals.
VSWR 2 detectors to monitor reflected power level on antenna port (downlink)
Microcontroller for communications with the Control Module
2.6.3
Distribution Board
The distribution board serves as a distributor for power and

internal communication within the repeater.
2.6.4
Control Module
The Control Module monitors and controls the repeater. Data is collected from other modules within the
repeater such as LIMPA, FDM and Power Supply utilizing a serial bus. The collected data is processed and if
an error is detected the Control Module may send an alarm via Data Call or SMS using a built in wireless
Local oscillator
Voltage standing wave ratio
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
30 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
GSM modem to an Operations and Maintenance Center (OMC). The Control Module stores the latest 40
alarms in an alarm log.
In addition to collecting data from all modules utilizing the internal serial bus, the controller also collects
status of four external alarm inputs connected to the External Interface board. The summary status of the
repeater can be indicated on a relay port, available on the external
interface connector. This relay can be used to indicate to external
equipment if the repeater is functioning properly.
The internal serial bus utilized to retrieve the data from the
various modules is master / slave based, where the Control
Module is the master and all other units are slaves. The bus is
based on a 4-wire RS485 multi drop bus. Communications
protocol used between modules is the Avitec proprietary protocol
AviNet. In case communication with a module fails, the module
generates a communications alarm to the OMC.
The Control Module contains a RS232 port used for local access to the repeater. Furthermore, the GSM
modem can be used for remote access.
LIMPA 1 UL
(2 UL Chains)
Filtering and
Distribution
Module DL 1
Power Supply 1
(2 and 4 Channel Rep)
LIMPA 2 UL (4 Ch. rep)

(2 UL Chains)
Power Supply 2
(4 Channel Rep)
External Alarm
Interface
Reference Generator
Filtering and
Distribution
Module DL 2
(ER only)
Serial Bus
Control
Module
LIMPA 1 DL
( 2 DL Chains)
GSM
modem
LIMPA 2 DL (4 Ch. rep)

(2 DL Chains)
General repeater block diagram (from a controller perspective)

On regular intervals, the Control Module sends a heartbeat message to the OMC to confirm that the repeater
is operational, and that the communications path between the repeater and the OMC is operational.
The Control Module collects statistics on how many timeslots are utilized in the uplink path of the repeater.
Once per day, a traffic report is sent to the OMC regarding the utilization of the repeater. This is used to get
an estimate on how much traffic is generated from the repeater coverage area.
The Control Module includes a Real Time Clock (RTC). The RTC keeps track of at what time alarms and
events occur. This RTC has its own backup battery in order to keep up proper time keeping even during long
power failures.
The power supply unit contains a battery, which is used to backup the Control Module. In case of a power
failure, the controller and built in wireless modem have sufficient power to report power failure alarms to the
repeater OMC.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
31 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Control Module LED
On the Control Module there are 3 LEDs to indicate the status.

LED 1, Green
OFF
GSM Module switched OFF
Permanent ON
GSM Module Switched on, not registered on network
Slow Flash
GSM Module switched on, registered on network (approximately 1 flash per second)
Quick flash
Module switched on, registered on network, call active (approx. 3 flashes per second)
LED 2, Red
OFF
Control Module switched OFF
Slow Flash
Control Module switched on, status OK (once every 10 seconds)
Quick flash
Control Module switched on, one or more errors / alarms detected (except door status)
LED 3, Blue
OFF
Control Module switched OFF, or no one logged in
Slow Flash
Control Module switched on, nobody logged in locally OK (once every 10 seconds)
Quick flash
Control Module switched on, someone logged in remotely or locally
2.6.5
PSUP, Power Supply
The module named PSUP, Power Supply, is dimensioned to handle a

2-channel repeater unit.
The PSUP is fed by 110/230 V AC, 50/60 Hz or -48 V DC. The
PSUP generates secondary DC voltages for the repeater modules. The
input is equipped with a surge, EMI, EMC suppression filter.
In the PSUP there is a backup battery module. It consists of a rechargeable battery pack, charging and
supervision electronics. This backup battery will provide the Control Module and wireless modem with
enough capacity to send an alarm in case of input power failure.
The power supply module is connected to all other electronic modules via the distribution board.
The power supply has a switch which allows it to be set in on position or in stand by.
Power Supply LED

The power supply has 4 LEDs to indicate the status.
Input
Power
+6V
+15V
+28V
LED 1, Input Power, Green

Slow flash
Power supply unit operating on AC or DC
OFF
Power supply unit not operating
LED 2, +6V, Red

Slow flash (every 10 seconds)
Avitec AB
+6V power supply operating
A1009300 Rev G
32 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Quick flash
+6V power supply not operating or operating with malfunction
LED 3, +15V, Red

Quick flash
LED 4, +28V, Red

Quick flash
2.6.6
Ref Gen, Reference Generator Module
The module named Ref Gen, Reference Generator Module consists of 4 parts:
crystal oscillator, 10 power splitters, control circuitry and microcontroller for
communication with Control Module.
The reference generator provides a reference signal to the synthesizers in the
repeater and to the microcontrollers in the LIMPAs and FDMs. Depending on
repeater type, two different crystal oscillators exist:
On-Frequency repeaters: TXCO, temperature compensated crystal
oscillator
Frequency Translating or Band Shifting repeaters: OCXO oven controlled crystal oscillator with ultra
high stability
2.6.7
EAIM, External Alarm and Interface Module
Four external alarm sources can be connected to the alarm module, EAIM. These
sources must generate a voltage between 12 and 24 VDC. The presence or absence
of this voltage will trigger the alarm depending on how alarm thresholds have been
configured in the controller software.
The module can also supply +15V to external alarm sources. The maximum
allowed load on this supply is 50mA.
One relay contact closure is provided to reflect the status of the repeater.
For operations of external alarms see 3.4.7 External Alarms.
2.6.8
Split/Combiner
In 4-channel repeaters there are four LIMPAs. The split/combiners split and distribute the signals to the extra
two LIMPAs as well as combine the signals from the extra LIMPAs.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
33 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
2.7
Internal Connections
2.7.1
LIMPA
LIMPA
DL2 DL1
UL2 UL1
UL2 UL1
IN/OUT
FDM
IN/OUT
FDM
DL2 DL1
Donor Antenna
Server Antenna
LIMPA and FDM Connections for a Channel Selective 2-channel repeater

UL 3+4
DL 3+4
LIMPA
LIMPA
LIMPA
LIMPA
DL 1+2
Splitter/
Combiner
UL 1+2
FDM
IN/OUT
FDM
IN/OUT
Splitter/
Combiner
UL 1+2
DL 1+2
UL 3+4
DL 3+4
Donor Antenna
Server Antenna
LIMPA and FDM Connections for a Channel Selective 4-channel repeater
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
34 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Frequency Translating or Band Shifting Repeaters
FDM
DL2 DL1
Directional Coupler
UL1
Link Antenna
UL1
FDM
DL2 DL1
LIMPA
UL1
DL2
Link Antenna
FDM
FDM
DL2 DL1
UL2 UL1
UL2
UL1
FDM
FDM
DL2
Donor Antenna
Server Antenna
LIMPA and FDM connections for a 2-channel remote unit

with an Internal Combiner (IR)
LIMPA
DL1
IN/OUT
UL2
UL2
UL1
LIMPA and FDM connections for a

2-channel Double Donor (DD) unit
UL2
IN/OUT
FDM
FDM
LIMPA
DL1
IN/OUT
DL2
FDM
UL2
Directional Couplers
Link Antenna
LIMPA and FDM connections for a

2-channel Single Donor (SD) unit
LIMPA
DL1
IN/OUT
UL2 UL1
DL2
IN/OUT
UL1
LIMPA
IN/OUT
IN/OUT
UL2
IN/OUT
DL2 DL1
FDM
LIMPA
LIMPA
IN/OUT
LIMPA
IN/OUT
2.7.2
DL1
Server Antennas
LIMPA and FDM connections for a 2-channel remote

unit with an External Combiner (ER)
Frequency and band shifting repeaters with 4-channels have splitters mounted in the same way as the channel
selective repeaters. In DD and ER type repeaters the splitter is mounded under the FDMs.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
35 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
2.8
Signal Paths
2.8.1

LIMPA, Downlink
Channelizer DL
Chain 1
~
~
~
Donor Antenna
FDM
Channelizer and amplifier, chain 2
D
C
Power Amplifier UL
Channelizer UL
Chain 1
~
~
~
~
C
Combiner
Splitter
Duplex Filter
Ref
LIMPA, Uplink
The signal from the antenna comes in to a duplex filter that separates and filters the uplink and downlink
signals. The signal is amplified in a LNA, split and fed to the channelizers the LIMPAs.
Each channelizer is configured to operate on a unique narrow frequency band. In the channelizer the signal is
mixed down to an intermediate frequency (IF), and is filtered on a GSM channel basis. After filtering, the
signal is mixed up to the original desired frequency and amplified.
The signal is amplified in the power amplifier. It is then fed to the combiner and further on via a duplex filter
to remove undesired out of band signals and intermodulated signals, to the antenna.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
36 (164)
Server Antenna
Ref
FDM
Power Amplifier DL
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
4-channel repeaters have the same layout as above, but the signals are split into four parallel flows.
LIMPA, Downlink 1 + 2
Channelizer DL
Power Amplifier DL
~
~
~
Ref
FDM
FDM
LIMPA, Downlink 3 + 4
C
D
LIMPA, Uplink 3 + 4

Power Amplifier UL
Combiner
Splitter
Duplex Filter
Avitec AB
Channelizer UL
~
~
~
~
Ref
LIMPA, Uplink 1 + 2
A1009300 Rev G
37 (164)
Server Antenna
Donor Antenna
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
2.8.2
Frequency Translating and Band Shifting Repeaters,

Donor Unit
LIMPA, Downlink
Channelizer DL
Chain 1
~
~
~
Ref
FDM
Power Amplifier DL
FDM
C
D
Channelizer UL
Chain 1
~
~
~
~
Combiner
Splitter
Duplex Filter
Link Antenna
Coupler connected
to the BTS
Ref
LIMPA, Uplink
Single donor, 2 channel repeater

This illustration above shows a single donor unit where the signal from the base station is split into each
channelizer in the downlink. In a double donor unit below the base station uses air combining and hence has
one antenna for each TRU which means that two signals are fed into the repeater.
In the downlink the signal is mixed in the channelizer with a reference signal and transformed into another
frequency the link frequency. In the uplink the original RF frequency is restored.
There is no power amplifier in the uplink. The signal is fed directly into the base station via a 30dB coupler
and hence doesnt need a high output power.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
38 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
LIMPA, Downlink
FDM
Channelizer DL
Chain 1
~
~
~
Ref
Coupler connected
to the BTS
Power Amplifier DL
FDM
Link Antenna
D
S
D
Channelizer UL
Chain 1
~
~
~
FDM
C
Combiner
Splitter
Duplex Filter
Ref
LIMPA, Uplink
Double donor, 2 channel repeater
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
39 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
2.8.3
Frequency Translating and Band Shifting Repeaters,

Remote Unit
LIMPA, Downlink
Channelizer DL
Chain 1
~
~
~
Link antenna
FDM
D
C
Power Amplifier UL
Channelizer UL
Chain 1
~
~
~
~
C
Combiner
Splitter
Duplex Filter
Server Antenna
Ref
FDM
Power Amplifier DL
Ref
LIMPA, Uplink
Remote unit with internal combining, 2 channel repeater

A frequency translating or band shifting repeater has a reference generator which feeds all channelizers with
a reference frequency. The channelizer contains two synthesizers, one for the down conversion from the input
frequency F1 to the intermediate frequency, and one for the up conversion to F2.
The illustration above shows a unit with internal combining, which means that in the downlink the output of
the power amplifiers are combined, filtered and sent to the antenna. In units with external combining, the
output from each amplifier is filtered separately and transmitted out on one antenna port each.
The output power in a ER (external combiner) is roughly 3dB higher than in an IR (internal combiner),
since the combiner causes a 3dB loss.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
40 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
LIMPA, Downlink
Channelizer DL
Chain 1
~
~
~
Ref
D
S
Server Antennas
Link antenna
FDM
Power Amplifier UL
Channelizer UL
~
~
~
Combiner
Splitter
Chain 1
FDM
Power Amplifier DL
Ref
FDM
LIMPA, Uplink
Chain 1
Duplex Filter
Remote unit with external combining, 2 channel repeater
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
41 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Monitoring and Control
Avitec GSM-EDGE repeaters contain a Control Module, see 2.6.4 Control Module, which controls all
parameters in the repeater, monitors alarm sources and sends reports and alarms to the AEM.
The repeaters can be accessed on site through the Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) port or remotely over
a built in modem.
When a RS232 cable is plugged in to the LMT port, there are two options for communication; terminal mode
or RMC mode.
Terminal mode is accessed by using a terminal emulation software, such as HyperTerminal or
ProComm. Settings should be ANSI or VT100 emulation, baud rate 9600, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, No
parity and No flow control. A simple command language is used to control the repeater in this mode.
Repeater Maintenance Console (RMC) mode allows configuration and control of the repeater via a user
friendly Windows software.
Note! All instructions in this chapter assumes that the repeater is controlled using the Repeater Maintenance
Console, RMC.
For use of the terminal mode please refer to the document GSM-EDGE Repeater Command and Attribute
Summary which contains detailed description of all attributes and commands.
3.1
Software Features
This first chapter contains an overview of the repeater software features. More in-depth descriptions are to be
found in the following chapters.
Please also refer to the installation part of this manual for more information about repeater installation and
configuration.
3.1.1
User Access Levels
Only one user at a time can be logged in to each repeater. If someone is logged in locally to a repeater it will
not respond to remote access attempts until the local user has logged off or has been logged off by the system
after a configurable number of minutes of inactivity.
Four (4) different user accounts are available for a repeater. Two accounts have both read and write access,
and two have read only access. The Avitec Element Manager has a unique username (with full read and write
access).
These are the default usernames and passwords.
User Name
Password
Authority
USERNAM1
PASSWRD1
read/write
USERNAM2
PASSWRD2
read/write
USERNAM3
PASSWRD3
read only
USERNAM4
PASSWRD4
read only
The user names and passwords can be changed using the RMC. However, it is recommended to have a
centralized password policy managed from the Avitec Element Manager.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
42 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Change Username or Password

Select
Configuration and
Communication
Make the changes
3.1.2
RF-configurations, Statuses, Alarms and Levels
The firmware controls and monitors all repeater parameters. In the event of a failure, an alarm is logged in the
repeater. If the repeater is controlled by the AEM, the alarm is also transmitted to the Avitec Element
Manager.
The repeater can be configured to handle alarms concerning a number of different parameters. Each alarm
can also be individually configured in a number of ways.
All statuses and measured levels can be read online from the RMC. This includes for instance voltage levels,
RF-levels and temperatures.
3.1.3
Local Alarm Log
The repeater stores the latest 40 alarms in a local alarm log. The data that is stored for each alarm is the time
at which an alarm occurred and the alarm information which consists of alarm source, alarm severity, alarm
attributes and in some cases an additional alarm description.
If an alarm for some reason fails to be transmitted to the AEM, the repeater reads the alarm log entries and
tries to retransmit the alarms a configurable number of times to the AEM or until successfully delivered to the
AEM.
3.1.4
External Alarms
If the option for external alarms has been included four (4) external alarm sources can be connected to the
repeater. These can be for instance fire alarms or external door sensors. These alarms operate on a voltage
between 12 and 24VDC. The presence or absence of this voltage will trigger the alarm depending on how
alarm thresholds have been configured. The external alarms have only two states ok or error. The
external alarms can be given individual names to help identify them in the alarm list.
As for all alarm sources a delay can be set that defines how many seconds an external alarm should be in
error state before an alarm is generated.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
43 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
3.1.5
Relay Connection
The repeater contains a relay, located on the External Alarm and Interface Module. This relay can be used to
notify external monitoring equipment about malfunctions in the repeater
The relay can be configured to be activated on any number of external or internal alarms (while other alarm
sources leave the relay unaffected).
3.1.6
Heartbeat Reports
On regular intervals, the repeater sends a heartbeat report to the AEM to confirm that the repeater is
functioning. The heartbeat message contains information about the RF-configuration and the alarm sources. It
ensures that the data communication from the repeater to the AEM is working properly.
The heartbeat interval can be set from 1 to 1440 minutes. Setting the heartbeat to 0 disables the transmission
of heartbeats.
3.1.7
Traffic Measurements
Each uplink LIMPA contains circuitry to detect how many timeslots are active in the uplink path, i.e. detect
ongoing traffic. In 15-minute intervals the total number of active timeslots in each chain is calculated and
compared to the total number of timeslots. The percentage is saved in a log. Based on this information traffic
reports are sent to the AEM on a configurable time of the day.
3.1.8
Modem Control
The repeater can be equipped with a GSM or a GSM-R modem built into to the Control Module, utilizing the
actual GSM or GSM-R network for remote communication. The modem should be equipped with a SIM-card
when the repeater is installed at site, see 4.4.3 Set Up Remote Access.
The Control Module is responsible for enabling the power to the modem, unlocking the SIM-card, using the
configured PIN-code and making sure the modem is logged in to the network correctly. Depending on
network configuration and modem usage, the modem might require different modem initialization strings to
work properly. This modem initialization string is set and verified during repeater setup.
At regular intervals, the Control Module polls the modem to see that the modem connection is functioning
properly.
To ensure that the repeater is always remotely accessible, the controller can be configured for scheduled
power cycling of the modem. This means that the modem is powered off, powered on, registered to the
network and put back on line.
3.1.9
Battery Backup for Control Module and Modem
The repeater contains a back-up battery, mounted in the main power supply. This battery backs up the
Control Module with the built in modem. In case of a power failure, the battery contains enough energy for
the repeater to dial up the repeater OMC and inform about the power supply disruption.
In case the battery is not plugged in correctly, or the battery charge is too low (broken battery), an alarm is
generated to the OMC.
3.1.10 SMS or Data Call for Alarms and Reports

The repeater can be controlled remotely via SMS or Data Call. If the repeater is configured to send alarms via
SMS, it can still communicate via Data Call. However, if the repeater is configured for Data Call, incoming
SMS messages will not be registered.
Please refer to 4.4.3 Set Up Remote Access for details about the remote communication using Data call and
SMS.
Note! Avitec Element Manager does not support communication via SMS.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
44 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
3.1.11 Full Repeater Configuration Available

The Control Module keeps track of the exact repeater type it is controlling, and its performance parameters,
including maximum uplink and downlink gain, serial number of repeater, software version in Control
Module, controller hardware version, as well as hardware version of all included components.
Within the repeater the Control Module communicates with other devices using their serial number as an
address. Serial numbers therefore have an important role in the repeater configuration.
3.1.12 Repeater Integration into AEM

When the repeater has been installed at site and the remote communication has been enabled, the repeater can
be integrated to the Avitec Element Manager. This is done by the operator of the AEM. After entering the
telephone number to the repeater, the AEM dials up the repeater, downloads all the repeater parameters and
statuses into a database. When all parameters have been downloaded, the AEM configures the repeater with
the telephone number where alarms and reports should be sent, and optionally with a secondary telephone
number where the repeater can dial in case connection to primary number fails.
When heartbeat reports and alarms are sent from the repeater to the AEM also the latest information about the
status and RF-configuration is included. This means that the AEM operator always has information about the
current status in the AEM database (and do not need to call the repeater to find this out).
Note! Once the repeater is integrated to the AEM, all changes to the repeater should preferably be done from
the Avitec Element Manager in order to ensure that the database always contains correct information.
3.1.13 Repeater ID and Tag

When the repeater is integrated into the Avitec Element Manager the repeater is assigned a repeater ID,
which is a unique identifier in the repeater network. This ID is used by the AEM to keep track of the
repeaters in the AEM database.
The repeater Tag can be used to give the repeater a more logical name, such as the site ID or installation
place. If Tag is set during site installation, this can easily be read by the AEM during AEM integration,
giving the AEM operator a clear identification of the site.
Refer to 4.4.2 Set Repeater Name (TAG) on how to set the repeater Tag.
3.1.14 Two separate software banks

The controller contains two different program banks. The software can be executed from one bank while new
software is downloaded to the other. When new software has been completely downloaded, the execution is
moved over to the new program bank. The software download can be done at site, or remotely via a modem.
See 3.8 Upgrading Repeater Firmware for description about how to upgrade the firmware.
Note! During software download no measurements will be made in the repeater. However, the RF
transmission will still be fully operational.
3.1.15 Real Time Clock

The Control Module contains a battery backed-up real time clock, which will stay active even during a power
failure. The real time clock is used for instance to keep track of when an alarm occurred, when to retransmit
an alarm and at what time of the day to send traffic report to the AEM.
If the repeater is controlled by the Avitec Element Manager, the AEM will automatically time synchronize
repeaters, to ensure that the time is always set correctly in the entire repeater network.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
45 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
3.2
RF Parameters
3.2.1
Channel Assignments
Assigning channels to the repeater is easy using the Repeater Maintenance Console. Depending on the
repeaters configuration there are different channel assignment options.
In channel selective repeaters with two or four channels only the repeated channels from the BTS need to be
configured. For frequency translating repeaters also the link channels between the donor and remote unit need
to be configured. If some channels in the repeater are not used, these need to be switched off (see 4.4.1 Set up
RF Configuration, for details).
Channels and links are configured using the standard ARFCN conventions.
Note! To ensure signal quality in the coverage area, it is important that all channels and link channels are
separated by two guard channels. For example, if channel 34 is used, next allowed channel or link channel is
37.
Note! It is recommended that the BCCH channel is configured as chain one (1) in the repeater. It is though
possible to configure the BCCH alarm monitoring to any channel.
3.2.2
Repeater Gain
Setting the gain in the repeater plays an important role in the

repeater configuration. Since the gain affects the coverage area of
the repeater, it is in most cases desired to have as high gain as
possible. However, since incorrect gain settings might cause the
repeater to oscillate, especially channel selective repeaters, it is
important to configure the gain carefully.
The gain is adjusted by changing the attenuation of the repeater. The
attenuation can be changed in 1 dB steps. If the attenuation for
example is set to 30 dB, the repeaters gain is lowered by 30 dB
from its maximum performance. Maximum gain in the repeater can
be read from the Product Information menu (choose
Configuration/Product).
See 4.4 Configure the Repeater, for more information about gain
settings.
3.2.3
Power Level
The repeater has a constant gain in both uplink and downlink paths. The gain is set by defining the
attenuation as described above.
The maximum output level from the repeater can also be defined. If the input signal amplified by the gain set
exceeds the set output limit, an ALC (Automatic Level Control) loop is activated. This ALC ensures that the
amplifier does not add distortion to the radio signal.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
46 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Output power, dBm
ALC
+43
+38
Gain: 108 dB
-70
-65
Input signal, dBm
The maximum output power level is set in this RMC window. There
are fixed values to choose from. The maximum power level can be
set individually for uplink and downlink of each channel. The power
level can also be set to OFF, meaning that no output power is
transmitted out in the chain.
The power level in the downlink should be adjusted not to send
radio signals too far into neighboring cells, but yet be enough to
cover the service area. In the uplink a signal from a user close to the
repeater should not cause a transmit of too high power into the BTS
antenna.
For frequency translating repeaters the signal strength of the link
channel should not be set too high just enough to reach between
the donor and the remote site.
In channel selective repeaters, the uplink and downlink power levels
are normally set to the same value, while the values in the frequency
translating repeaters depend on the link budgets for the installation.
See 4.1.5 Link Budget.
Note! Chains not used in the repeater must have power level set to
OFF.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
47 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
3.2.4
Amplifier Saturation
If the output power reaches a certain limit in the repeater the ALC is
activated, as described above. For alarm and RF configuration
purposes there is an Amplifier Saturation indicator and alarm
parameter implemented. This indicator detects problems with the
system setup or environment and can also be used during repeater
installation and configuration.
The indicator has four levels:
below optimum settings (low)
working in the optimum range (ok)
going into saturation (high)
well into saturation (critical)
When the repeater is configured the BCCH gain in the downlink
should be increased until the saturation indicator reaches the
optimum range. This ensures that the repeater has optimized gain
settings. See 4.1.5 Link Budget.
3.2.5
Input / Output Levels
The input and output power levels to and from the repeater are
constantly monitored for each chain separately. The input level is
measured directly at the input of the LIMPA. The output power is
measured directly before the output of the LIMPA.
The measurable input power to the repeater ranges from -110 dBm to
about -25 dBm. The output power level varies depending on repeater
model. The dynamic range on the output power is roughly 25 dB,
meaning that a repeater with a maximum output power of 37 dBm
can detect output power levels down to approximately 12 dBm. If the
output power level is lower than lowest detectable level, the RMC
reports a dash.
By using these values together with the gain settings in the repeater it
is possible to monitor the functionality of the amplifier chains. A too
low output power in a chain might for instance indicate some
problem with the LIMPA.
These measurements can also be useful during installation of the repeater, for example by monitoring the
input signal level constantly while aiming antennas towards the donor unit detecting the direction for the
maximum signal level. Monitoring the output level is helpful in determining how much the gain must be
increased to reach maximum output power.
Note! The uplink power levels will only be displayed when there is a user in the repeater coverage area
generating traffic. Also, DTX (Discontinuous Transmission Mode) enabled networks will cause the mobiles
to generate traffic only when the subscriber is actually talking. This will cause the uplink meters to fluctuate a
lot. The same applies to the downlink channels not configured as BCCH, since RF is only transmitted in the
traffic channels if a call is handled by this TRX.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
48 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
3.2.6
BCCH Configuration
The BCCH channel can be configured on any chain. The most common though, is to configure the BCCH on
chain 1. This is also how the repeater is configured when it is delivered.
The repeater monitors the BCCH output power in the downlink to ensure that the power level stays above a
configurable threshold. If the level drops below the threshold, for example if an obstacle is raised between the
feeding base station and the repeater, an alarm is generated. The threshold level is set in the Alarm
Configuration window.
In each chain the BCCH can be configured in three different ways:
Required
the output power must be present on this chain
Either
the output power must be above the threshold on

this or any of the other chains configured
Skip
the output power is not measured on this chain
By default, the repeater is configured with Required in chain 1,

and Skip in the other chains. This means that if the BCCH drops
in chain 1, an alarm is generated.
Examples of how to use the BCCH configuration:

Two 1-channel sectors are to be transmitted through a frequency translating ER repeater, where each
sector is transmitted out via separate antennas. Both channels need to have a constant output power
above the threshold. In this case both chains should be configured as Required.
The base station supports BCCH fall-over, where the BCCH will automatically switch over to TRX 2
in case the default BCCH TRX fails. Configuring the repeater as Either will cause the repeater to
require output power on chain 1 or 2. In this case the BTS will generate an alarm, why we do not need
an alarm in the repeater OMC as well.
3.2.7
Return Loss (VSWR)
The server FDM contains circuitry to measure the reflected power levels back from the connected server
antenna cables. A too high level on the reflected power generates an alarm.
Typical reasons for a high reflected power level can be an antenna connector being improperly tightened, a
broken cable or a broken antenna.
Frequency Translating and Band Shifting ER (external combining) repeaters contain two server FDMs, one
for each server antenna, and hence two reflected power levels are measured. All other repeater types contain
only one server FDM.
The level for when to generate an alarm is configurable as number of dBs difference between forward and
reflected power levels. Default level is 10 dB, and normally this value should not be changed.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
49 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
3.3
Hardware Identification
3.3.1
Repeater Type Identification
When a login to a repeater is made using the Repeater Maintenance Console, the RMC detects the repeater
type and adjusts the user interface correspondingly. The same RMC can be used for all repeater types.
3.3.2
Hardware Inventory
A repeater contains a number of different building blocks such as FDM, LIMPA, Power Supply, etc. Some of
these are so called active devices meaning that they contain a micro controller used for monitoring of module
parameters. Some are passive devices, for example the distribution board.
The Control Module communicates with the active devices using a master/slave configuration, where the
Control Module is the master and the active devices are slaves. Each active device uses its serial number as
an address. A slave only replies to requests with the correct address information.
During production the repeater is configured with all the serial numbers of all the devices in the system. For
passive devices, the article number of the device is added. Once the system is configured, the Control Module
polls all the active devices for article numbers and production information as well as software versions and
statistics of the active devices.
Via the RMC the full repeater inventory can be read, including statistics of the active devices.
Select
Configuration and
Product
List of all hardware

in the repeater
Repeater TAG
Repeater ID
List of all active

devices
Control Module ID
RF Parameters
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
50 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
3.3.3
Replacing/Reconfiguring Hardware Modules
If a module needs to be changed it is important to update the repeater with the new hardware information. For
active devices this is crucial to ensure communication between the new module and the Control Module. For
all devices it gives an up-to date inventory of the entire network.
The hardware is reconfigured by logging in to the repeater via the RMC and switching to Terminal Mode. If
the change concerns an active or passive device the command syntax varies slightly.
Format:
HARDWARE REPLACE <OldSNO> <NewSNO> [Article Number]
<OldSNO>
<NewSNO>
is the serial number of the module that has been removed

is the serial number of the new module
[Article Number] is used if a passive module, such as a distribution board or external interface board is
changed.
Example 1:
HARDWARE REPLACE 2J3A 3ASA
replaces the broken module 2J3A with the new module 3ASA.
Example 2:
HARDWARE REPLACE 3AZC 3EEF J691001A
replaces the old module 3AZC with the new module 3EEF, with article number J691001A.
If the repeater is controlled by the Avitec Element Manager a refresh of the repeater should be initiated from
the AEM as soon as the hardware has been replaced and the repeater configuration has been updated. This
ensures that the AEM also contains the latest hardware configuration.
Note! The current hardware configuration can be displayed in terminal mode by entering the command
HARDWARE without parameters.
3.4
Alarm System
The Avitec repeaters contain a number of different alarm sources, both analog and digital, to ensure that the
repeater works with desired performance.
3.4.1
Alarms and End of Alarms
When the Control Module detects a failure in the repeater, an alarm is transmitted to the Avitec Element
Manager, informing the operator about the error condition. When the alarm has ceased, an end of alarm is
sent to the AEM, stating that the alarm source is now OK.
The alarms can also be monitored via the RMC either locally or remotely via the modem.
Each alarm and end of alarm updates the AEM database with the latest status of the alarm source, ensuring
that the AEM operator always has the correct repeater status in the system.
To generate an alarm a number of consecutive measurements must first show an error state.
To generate an end of alarm only one OK measurement is needed.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
51 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Alarm level
Alarm is sent after three
seconds above threshold
End of alarm is sent as

soon as status is OK
Alarm threshold
Time
Alarms can be of five different severity levels

Severity Level
Description
Critical
A critical error has occurred which affects the functionality of the repeater. This type
of alarm requires immediate action.
Major
A major error has occurred. This type of alarm should be investigated within a short
time.
Minor
A minor error has occurred. This type of alarm should be investigated, but is not
urgent.
Warning
Something has occurred that does not affect the operation of the repeater but may be
important to notice. For example, someone has logged on to the repeater.
Cleared
A cleared alarm. This is the end of alarm.
Note! User related alarms (as described in 3.4.6 Alarm Sources) do not send an end of alarm.
3.4.2
Alarm Acknowledgements and Retransmissions
The 40 latest alarms and end of alarms are stored in the repeaters local alarm log. In case an alarm is not
acknowledged (see below), the alarm will be retransmitted to the AEM after a configurable number of
minutes. The retransmission will be repeated a configurable number of times. Default retransmit interval is 10
minutes. Default number of retries is three.
Select
Configuration and
Reports
Number of
retransmissions
Repetition cycle
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
52 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Alarm log
Select Alarm
Log
Repeater Message
No
Date/Time
Description
Attribute/Alarm
Source
Severity
Class
Alarm
acknowledged
Acknowledgement
using RMC
Additional
information about
a selected alarm
3.4.2.1
Alarm Acknowledgement using the RMC
Each alarm can be manually acknowledged using the Repeater Maintenance Console. However, if the
repeater is controlled by the Avitec Element Manager, a manual acknowledgement of the alarm means that
the AEM will not be aware of the change in the repeater status.
3.4.2.2
Alarm Acknowledgement using the Avitec Element Manager
If the repeater is integrated to and controlled by the Avitec Element Manager, an alarm is considered
acknowledged when the repeater has dialed the AEM, logged in to the AEM and delivered the alarm. Once
delivered to the AEM, the acknowledgement of the event is taken care of locally at the AEM, why no dialback needs to be performed to acknowledge the alarms in the repeater.
3.4.2.3
Alarm Acknowledgement using SMS
If the repeater is configured to send alarms using SMS, alarm acknowledgement can be made in two different
ways.
the alarm is acknowledged as soon as the alarm SMS is successfully received by the Short Message
Service Centre
or
the alarm is acknowledged by sending a special alarm acknowledgement SMS back to the repeater from
the alarm destination.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
53 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Select
Configuration and
Reports
Pick one alternative

from the drop-down
menu
All alarms transmitted from the repeater contain a message number. Acknowledgement of an alarm is done
by sending an SMS to the repeater containing this message number.
Note! Only the defined Primary SMS address can acknowledge alarms.
The table below displays the format of alarm acknowledgement messages.
Message field
Format
Description
Repeater ID
XX-YY-ZZZZ
ID of the repeater that the message is intended for
Message number
NNNNN
Message number set by originator
Command
ACT
Action command
Argument
ACK
Acknowledge action
Argument
MMMMM
Message number of the alarm message to acknowledge
The message fields are separated with blanks.

For example, sending an SMS to the repeater with the text
01-42-4711 00242 ACT ACK 00023
will acknowledge alarm number 00023 from repeater 01-42-4711.
3.4.3
Alarm Repetition
As soon as the repeater detects an alarm or an end of alarm, a connection to the Avitec Element Manager is
established and the alarm event is reported. Many alarm sources are configured for the error to be present
during three seconds before an alarm is generated. End of alarm is triggered as soon as an OK state is
detected.
If an alarm should constantly toggle between OK and ERROR the communications interface might be
blocked. To prevent this there is a parameter called Minimum Alarm Repetition. This parameter defines how
many minutes must elapse before a new alarm can be transmitted from the same alarm source.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
54 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
An alarm is sent when the level

has been above the threshold for
three seconds
Level
An end of alarm is sent as

soon as status is OK
Three minutes have elapsed and
a new alarm is transmitted
Alarm Threshold
Minimum alarm
repetition
Time
This illustration shows an alarm source with an upper threshold, and a fluctuating level around the alarm
threshold. In this example, the first alarm will be sent as indicated. The next alarm will be transmitted after
three minutes, when the minimum alarm repetition period has elapsed.
Select
Configuration and
Reports
Minimum time
between alarms
3.4.4
Relay Output
The repeater can be ordered with a relay option. The relay, located on the External Alarm and Interface
Module, can be used to indicate the summary status of the repeater. Each alarm source can be configured to
be affecting the relay or not, see next section. The relay is set to be open when there is no alarm and closed
as an alarm occurs.
If the repeater is part of an antenna distribution system in for example a tunnel, all tunnel equipment can be
monitored from one central location using current loops. This means that the tunnel service engineers can
independently from the Avitec Element Manager staff be informed about the repeater status.
Each alarm source can be individually configured if the relay should be affected or not.
Note! The relay status is not affected by the login / logout alarm parameters.
For installation testing purposes, it is possible to test the open / close function of the relay. This test procedure
makes sure the relay is closed for 2.5 seconds, then opens for 10 seconds, and finally closes for 2.5 seconds
before going back to original state.
Select
Configuration and
Alarm
Click on Relay Test
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
55 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
3.4.5
Alarm Configuration
A number of different parameters can be configured for how the alarms are transmitted to the repeater OMC.
Each alarm source can also be individually configured in a number of different ways.
Select
Configuration and
Alarms
Alarm
Affect relay
Alarm transmission
enabled
Requires
acknowledgement
Lower and upper

thresholds
Number of faulty
measures
External Alarms
Affect relay If checked, an active alarm from the alarm source affects the relay status
Enbl. If checked, the alarm is transmitted to the repeater OMC
Note! This only affects the transmission of the alarm. The alarm is still measured, and corresponding
alarm status is still displayed in the repeater status screen and in the heartbeat reports transmitted to the
repeater OMC.
Ack. All alarms will by default be transmitted to the repeater OMC requiring acknowledgement (the
box is checked). Disabling this checkbox removes this requirement, which means that an alarm will only
be transmitted once, regardless if an acknowledgement is received or not.
Lower Lower threshold, not applicable for all alarm sources. Please refer to document GSM-EDGE
Repeaters Command and Attribute Summary for details on the usage of thresholds for each alarm
source.
Upper Upper threshold, not applicable for all alarm sources. Please refer to document GSM-EDGE
Repeaters Command and Attribute Summary for details on the usage of thresholds for each alarm
source.
Time Defines how many consecutive measurements from one alarm source that should be measured as
ERROR before an alarm is triggered.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
56 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Note! In most cases, all default alarm configurations can be left unchanged, except the BCCH alarm which is
called Power level downlink. Please refer to 3.2.6 BCCH Configuration for details about the BCCH alarm
configuration.
3.4.6
Alarm Sources
Temperature Related Alarms

Alarm
Code
Description
Trigger
Temperature
TEM
Measures the temperature in the repeater.
Temperature too
high or too low
The temperature is located on the controller

board.
Power Supply
Temperature
PTM
Measures the temperature in the repeaters power

supply
Temperature too
high or too low
Power Related Alarms

Alarm
Code
Description
Trigger
Power Supply Level
PSL
Measures the input power supply level.
Level too high or

too low
This is used to detect if the power supply in to

the repeater is dropping too low or getting too
high.
Power Supply 1
PW1
Measures the +28V generated by the repeaters

power supply.
Level too high or

too low
Power Supply 2
PW2
Measures the +15V generated by the repeaters

power supply.
Level too high or

too low
Power Supply 3
PW3
Measures the +6.45 V generated by the repeaters

power supply
Level too high or

too low
Power Supply 4
PW4
Measures the +6.45 V generated by the repeaters

power supply feeding the controller
Level too high or

too low
Battery for Mobile

Equipment
BAT
Measures the battery charge in the repeaters

backup battery
Charge drops
below a defined
threshold or is too
high
User Related Alarms

Alarm
Code
Description
Trigger
Valid Login to
repeater
VLI
Detects a login to the repeater, either locally or

via remote connection.
A successful login
User logged out from

repeater
LGO
Detects a logout from the repeater.
A logout
Illegal Logins
exceeded limit
ILI
Detects and counts the number of failed login

attempts.
Threshold
exceeded
The counter is decreased by one every hour. A

threshold can be set for number of allowed
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
57 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
attempts before the login is blocked.

Changes made by
logged in user
CLR
Detects all changes made to repeater settings by a

user logged in to the repeater.
NA
RF Related Alarms
Alarm
Code
Description
Trigger
Antenna Isolation
Measurements
AIM
Measures the antenna isolation.
Isolation is
outside defined
interval
Two channels are used, one BCCH channel, and

one so called Listener channel. By default, these
channels are the ones configured in chain 1 and
two, but can be changed using the RMC.
The repeater can be configured to measure the
antenna isolation on a certain time every day, and
in case the isolation is too low, an alarm is
generated.
Input Overload
Downlink
IOD
Input Overload
Uplink
IOU
Power Level BCCH

Downlink
PDL
Detects input overload on the downlink chain.
Overload
This alarm is used to detect if there is other

equipment in the frequency band causing the
input of the repeater to be blocked, and hence
decreasing the repeater performance. This can for
example be a base station from another operator
being mounted too close to the repeaters donor
antenna.
Detects input overload on the uplink chain.
Overload
This alarm is used to detect if there is other

equipment within the frequency band causing the
input of the repeater to be blocked, and hence
decreasing the repeaters performance. This can
for example be harmonics from TV-transmitters
or other strong radio signals.
Measures the output power of the BCCH channel
in the downlink. If the BCCH drops below the
configured threshold an alarm is generated.
Output power
level BCCH too
low
Reasons for the BCCH dropping might be an

obstacle raised between the BTS and the
repeater, or a reconfiguration of the BTS where
the output power is decreased. A dropped BCCH
output power from the repeater will decrease the
repeaters coverage area.
Voltage Standing
Wave Ratio
Downlink
Avitec AB
WRD
Monitors the reflected power level at the server

antenna port (s).
An alarm might be caused by a broken antenna
cable, or the antenna connector not being
properly tightened.
A1009300 Rev G
The difference
between the
transmitted and
reflected power is
too low
58 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Repeater Performance Related Alarms

Alarm
Code
Description
Trigger
Amplifier Chain
Downlink
AMD
This is a gain alarm.
Expected output
power too high or
too low compared
to calculated output
power.
Amplifier Chain
Uplink
AMU
Amplifier Chain
Saturation Downlink
ASD
The repeater measures the input signal level in

the downlink chains and compares it to expected
output power with regards to attenuation in
repeater. If the output power is too high or too
low, something might be failing in the amplifier
chain, and hence an amplifier chain alarm is
triggered.
This is a gain alarm.
The repeater measures the input signal level in
the uplink chains and compares it to expected
output power with regards to the attenuation in
repeater. If the output power is too high or too
low, something might be failing in the amplifier
chain, and hence an amplifier chain alarm is
triggered.
Measures saturation in the amplifier chain
downlink.
Expected output
power too high or
too low compared
to calculated output
power.
Saturation enters
defined level
An amplifier chain going into saturation means

that the repeater input signal level and/or gain is
not set correctly. An amplifier going too deep
into saturation might cause the signal quality to
be decreased.
There are four levels:
below optimum settings
working in the optimum range
going into saturation
well into saturation
Amplifier Chain
Saturation Uplink
ASU
Measures saturation in the amplifier chain

uplink. An amplifier chain going into saturation
means that the repeater input signal level and/or
gain is not set correctly. An amplifier going too
deep into saturation might cause the signal
quality to be decreased. There are four levels:
Saturation enters
defined level
below optimum settings

working in the optimum range
going into saturation
well into saturation
Synthesizer
Downlink
SZD
Detects if a synthesizer in the downlink is

unlocked
Synthesizer
unlocked
Synthesizer Uplink
SZU
Detects if a synthesizer in the uplink is unlocked
Synthesizer
unlocked
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
59 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Communication
Between Controller
and Active Devices
COM
Detects errors in the communication between

controller and active devices
Errors in the
communication
Alarm
Code
Description
Trigger
Door
DOO
Checks if the repeaters door is open or closed
Door is open
Door Alarm
3.4.7
External Alarms
If the option for external alarms has been included, four (4) external alarm sources can be connected to the
repeater. These can be for instance fire alarms or external door sensors. These alarms operate on a voltage
between 12 and 24VDC. The presence or absence of this voltage will trigger the alarm depending on how the
alarm thresholds have been configured. The external alarms have only two states ok or error.
As for all alarm sources a delay can be set that defines how many seconds an alarm should be in error state
before an alarm is generated
Alarm
Code
Description
Trigger
External Alarm 1
EX1
Monitors any alarm source, for example fire alarms

or external door sensors connected to the external
interface.
Error from
alarm source
External Alarm 2
EX2

interface.
Error from
alarm source
External Alarm 3
EX3

interface.
Error from
alarm source
External Alarm 4
EX4

interface.
Error from
alarm source
The external alarms can be given individual names of up to 19 characters.

Select
Configuration and
Alarm
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
60 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
New name for

external alarm 1
To name an external
alarm click on Edit
3.4.8
Alarm Format
Each alarm transmitted from the repeater contains a number of fields, in detail describing the event that
caused the alarm. The alarm is transmitted as an ASCII text string, each field separated by a blank/white
space.
Using the Avitec Element Manager to control the repeater, the alarm string is delivered to the Transceiver for
further processing in the AEM system.
When SMS is used to control the repeater, the string is sent as clear text to the alarm address (main address).
Message field
Format
Description
Repeater ID
XX-YY-ZZZZ
ID of the repeater causing the alarm. When monitoring the repeater

using the AEM, this repeater ID is set by the AEM during the
repeater installation phase. Using SMS, this repeater ID should be
modified to uniquely identify the repeater in the network.
Message number
NNNNN
Message number from the repeater, increased for each message sent
to this address
Message type
ALARM
Means that the message is an alarm or end of alarm (alarm cease)
Date
DDMMYY
Day, month and year when the alarm was detected
Time
HHMMSS
Hour, minute and second when the alarm was detected
Alarm Source
PW1, DOO
Code for alarm source. Please refer to GSM-EDGE Repeater

Command and Attribute Summary to obtain a detailed list of all
available alarm sources in the repeater.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
61 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Severity
CC
Abbreviation for severity of the alarm. This severity varies between

the different alarm sources.
CR = critical
MA = major
MI = minor
WA = warning
CL = cleared
When an and of alarm is sent, the severity is CL = cleared
Class
CC
Abbreviation for kind of alarm

CO = communication alarm
EN = environmental alarm
QS = quality of service alarm
PR = processing alarm
EQ = equipment alarm
Status
C..C
Status for the Alarm Source generating the alarm.

Please refer to document GSM-EDGE Repeater Command and
Attribute Summary to obtain detailed information about the status.
If for example Alarm Source is SZU (Synthesizer Uplink), status
parameter format is described in the SZU attribute in the GSMEDGE Repeater Command and Attribute Summary.
Additional alarm
text
CCCC
This quoted string contains additional alarm information, such as

measured levels when the alarm condition was detected.
Example:
01-01-0001 00049 ALARM 251103 132137 WRD CR QS 1 Current return loss is 9.0 dB
This is an alarm message from repeater 01-01-0001, indicating that the reflected level (WRD) on the antenna
port is 9.0 dB.
3.5
Repeater Heartbeat
On regular intervals, the repeater sends a heartbeat report to the AEM to confirm that the repeater is
functioning. When monitoring the repeater using the Avitec Element Manager, the heartbeat reports play a
key role. They contain the repeater configuration and are transmitted between the repeater and the AEM on
regular intervals.
3.5.1
Heartbeat Tasks
With the heartbeat reports, a number of tasks are carried out.

3.5.1.1
Ensuring Repeater to AEM Communications path
By configuring the repeater to regularly establish a connection to the AEM, the functionality of the data
communications path between the repeater and the AEM is verified. This ensures that for instance the alarms
will be transmitted properly.
If an expected heartbeat is not received by the AEM, an alarm is generated to the AEM operator. Reasons for
a heartbeat message failing to be delivered can be:
No power the repeater site might experience a power failure, and the battery backing up the controller
and modem is empty
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
62 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Broken donor antenna If the repeater antennas have been tampered with, the repeater might not get
adequate signal to establish a connection to the AEM
Failing BTS If the feeding BTS for some reason goes down, the repeater will loose its network
connection, and hence fail to establish a connection to the Avitec Element Manager.
3.5.1.2
AEM Database Synchronization
The Avitec Element Manager stores all repeater parameters in a database. This database is populated during
the repeater integration into the AEM, when the AEM downloads all the repeater parameters. If the AEM
operator wants to monitor the configuration of the repeater, the parameters can be read from the database
without having to connect to the repeater.
In case of an alarm, the AEM updates the database with the status of the alarm source. In case the repeater
failed to deliver the alarm to the AEM, there will be a discrepancy between the repeater configuration and the
configuration in the database. Furthermore, if a technician at site makes changes to the RF-configuration of
the repeater, the configuration will differ from the AEM configuration.
For this reason, each heartbeat report contains all the relevant RF-parameters and status of all the alarm
sources in the repeater. This means that each heartbeat report will update the AEM with all status and RF
parameters.
Note! Once the repeater is integrated to the Avitec Element Manager, it is recommended that all
reconfigurations are made from the AEM.
Note! If a user logs in to the repeater making changes, as soon as the user logs out, an alarm will be
transmitted to the AEM informing the operator that a change has been made. When this alarm is received, the
operator can initiate repeater synchronization where all repeater parameters will be updated.
3.5.1.3
Time Synchronization
Each heartbeat message transmitted to the AEM contains a time stamp of the local time inside the repeater.
Upon reception in the AEM, the time stamp is compared to the Avitec Element Manager time. If the
difference between the repeater and AEM time is too big, time synchronization is initiated by the AEM,
adjusting the time in the repeater. In this ways, we ensure that a repeater integrated to the Avitec Element
Manager always contains the correct time information.
Note! If the time is adjusted by a user logged in to the repeater, once the user logs out, a heartbeat is sent to
the AEM to ensure that the time is correctly synchronized.
3.5.2
Configuring the Heartbeat
The Heartbeat is configured to be transmitted on a regular interval. As soon as the report is successfully
delivered, the repeater will wait the configured interval before transmitting the report again. The interval can
be set from once per minute to once every 1440 minutes (24 hours). Setting the heartbeat interval to zero
disables transmission of the heartbeat reports.
If the heartbeat report was not successfully transmitted, it will be retransmitted again after a configurable
number of minutes. The Control Module will try a configurable number of times to transmit the report to the
Avitec Element Manager / repeater OMC.
Default retransmit interval is one minute, and three retries will be made to transmit the report. In this example
a heartbeat is sent every 24 hours and the number of retransmits has been set to 2 with a one minute interval.
Select
Configuration and
Reports
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
63 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Repetition cycle
Retransmissions
Repetition cycle for
retransmission
Note! The report retransmit interval and number of report retransmissions also applies to the traffic reports.
Note! When monitoring the repeater using the Avitec Element Manager, the heartbeat interval is decided by
the AEM operator as a part of the repeater to AEM integration procedure.
3.5.3
Heartbeat Format
The heartbeat report is transmitted as an ASCII text string, with a number of fields representing the RFconfiguration and status parameters, each field separated by a blank/white space.
Using the Avitec Element Manager to control the repeater, the heartbeat report is delivered to the Transceiver
for further processing in the AEM system.
When SMS is used to control the repeater, the report is sent as clear text to the main address.
Since the different EDGE-GSM repeater types contain different number of configurations and alarm
parameters, the formats of the heartbeats vary between repeater types Please refer to document GSM-EDGE
Repeater Command and Attribute Summary for details on the various heartbeat formats.
3.6
Traffic Measurement
Avitec repeaters constantly monitor the radio signal in the uplink path. By doing this, it is possible to detect
how much traffic is generated from within the repeaters coverage area.
On a regular basis, a traffic report is transmitted to the Avitec Element Manager, allowing for traffic analysis
to identify peak hours and hotspots in the radio network covered by the Avitec repeaters.
3.6.1
Traffic Measurement Procedure
The repeater software allows for real time tracing of the repeater utilization in the uplink path of the repeater.
RSSI
Each chain in the repeater/LIMPA contains an RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indicator), which detects the
input level. By monitoring this RSSI all the active timeslots in the uplink above a configurable threshold can
be detected. A counter inside the LIMPA microcontroller counts all the detected active timeslots on a chain
by chain basis.
Traffic
Threshold
Timeslot
In the example above, timeslots 2, 4 and 8 are above the configured traffic threshold
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
64 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Once every 15 minutes, the controller calculates the percentage of all active timeslots being above the
threshold. The result is stored in a traffic log. On a configurable time of the day, the utilization for the last 24
hours is transmitted to the repeater OMC, after which the log is cleared.
The utilization is calculated as:
Utilization = All detected timeslots / Total number of timeslots * 100
3.6.2
Active Intervals
The repeater calculates the utilization in the uplink for each 15 minute interval (96 intervals per day). An
active interval is defined as an interval where detected number of active timeslots is above a certain
threshold. By default, an interval is considered active when 8 timeslots or more are detected. This feature is
useful for trouble shooting purposes in low traffic areas. If no intervals have been active during the last day or
so, a suspicion might be that there is an erroneous configuration or a failing server antenna.
The repeater also saves the time point for when last timeslot was detected in the uplink path of the repeater.
3.6.3
Viewing Traffic Reports from the RMC
Traffic reports can be monitored via the RMC.

Select Utilization
Current 15 minute
interval
Earlier intervals
Real time traffic
3.6.4
Interpreting Traffic Data
The traffic data should not be treated as definite facts for two major reasons:
Most GSM-EDGE networks today have DTX (Discontinuous Transmission Mode) enabled. When DTX
is enabled there is only transmission from the mobile station when the user is talking. This means that
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
65 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
even though there is a call going through the repeater there is no detectable traffic when the user is
silent.
GPRS enabled networks can use one or more timeslots, depending on network configuration, mobile
type and subscriber activity.
It is not possible to make definite decisions as to how many calls are going through a repeater or if a repeater
site / base station is reaching its capacity limit, but gives a very good indication about trends on the site. For a
non-GPRS enabled network, reaching utilizations of up to 30% of the interval at the same time as the base
station indicates 100% utilization probably means that most calls are originated from within the repeater
coverage area.
3.6.5
Traffic Measurement Configuration
A number of different parameters are available in order to configure the behavior of the traffic measurements
and traffic reports.
Active Intervals
Traffic Threshold
3.6.5.1
Active Intervals
For each 15 minute interval, all timeslots are counted. If the number of timeslots is above the active intervals
threshold, the current interval is considered as an Active Interval.
This threshold is set as number of timeslots. Default value is 8 timeslots.
3.6.5.2
Traffic Threshold
A traffic threshold can be set to define on what level measured should start. The value is set in dBm. If the
traffic threshold is set to -85, any signal above -85 dBm is considered as traffic originated from within the
repeaters coverage area.
3.6.5.3
Traffic Reports
The Traffic Report is configured to be transmitted on a fixed time point of the day. By default the repeater
transmits the traffic data at 02.00.00 in the morning. A recommendation is to transmit the traffic data to the
repeater OMC during low traffic hours, for example during night/early morning.
Select
Configuration and
Reports
Report Time
In case the traffic report was not successfully transmitted, it will be retransmitted again after a configurable
number of minutes. The controller will try a configurable number of times to transmit the report to the Avitec
Element Manager / repeater OMC.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
66 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Default retransmit interval is one minute, and three retries will be made to transmit the report. (Same setting
as for the heartbeat.)
Note! The report retransmit interval and number of report retransmissions also applies to the heartbeat
reports.
Note! When monitoring the repeater using the Avitec Element Manager, the traffic report time point is
decided by the AEM operator as a part of the repeater to AEM integration procedure.
Note! By default, in frequency translating donor repeaters, transmission of traffic data to the AEM is
disabled. Since the same traffic should be transmitted through the remote and the donor unit, disabling the
traffic report eliminates redundant information in the Avitec Element Manager database.
3.6.6
Traffic Report Format
Each traffic report transmitted from the repeater describes the repeater utilization for the last 24 hours. The
traffic report is transmitted as an ASCII text string, with a number of fields describing the utilization in detail,
each field separated by a blank/white space.
Using the Avitec Element Manager to control the repeater, the traffic report is delivered to the Transceiver
for further processing in the AEM system.
When SMS is used to control the repeater, the string is sent as clear text to the main address.
Message field
Format
Description
Repeater ID
XX-YY-ZZZZ
ID of the repeater sending the traffic report. When monitoring

the repeater using the AEM, this repeater ID is set by the
AEM during the repeater installation phase. Using SMS, this
repeater ID should be modified to uniquely identify the
repeater in the network.
Message number
NNNNN
Message number from the repeater, increased for each

message sent to this address
Message type
PERFO
Means that this is a traffic report
Date
DDMMYY
Day, month and year when message is generated
Time
HHMMSS
Hour, minute and second when message is generated
First Measure Date
DDMMYY
Date of the first traffic measurement
First Measure Time
HHMMSS
Time of the first traffic measurement
Utilization Data
M..M
M..M shows information about the 96 measured 15 minute

intervals.
M = '0' means a utilization of 0% to 2%
...
M = 'A' means a utilization of 20% to 22%
M = 'B' means a utilization of 22% to 24%
...
...
M = 'T' means a utilization of 58% to 60%
M = 'a' means a utilization of 60% to 62%
M = 'b' means a utilization of 62% to 64%
M = 't' means a utilization of 98% to 100%
If no data is available, a dash ('-') is reported.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
67 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Example:
01-01-0323 00755 PERFO 270803 020001 260803 020000
00000001011212233468BCDCBCBDGHGKDFDEDFHJGFDCBCBA9BCBDEFGEGEFLKHEDEDA9868678654223
21210100010000
This example shows a traffic report from the repeater 01-01-0323. First measurement is done at 2 AM, 26th
of august 2003, and traffic report is transmitted 24 hours later.
3.7
Remote Communication
Avitec repeaters contain a GSM or a GSM-R modem for remote communication. There are two different
ways of communication:
Using data call / modem connection.
Note! This requires the SIM-card in the modem to be configured with data service.
Using SMS to configure the repeater with simple text messages.
The Avitec Element Manager always uses data call communication with the repeater, why all repeaters being
controlled by the AEM must have data service enabled on the SIM card.
Configuring the repeater to send alarms and reports via SMS it is still possible to establish data calls to the
repeater, as long as the SIM card is data service enabled.
The repeater contains a back-up battery, mounted in the main power supply. This battery backs up the
Control Module with the GSM module. In case of a power failure, the battery contains enough energy for the
repeater to dial up the repeater OMC and inform about the power supply disruption.
This section describes in detail how the remote communication works. For a step by step instruction on how
to configure the remote communication, please refer to 4.4.3 Set Up Remote Access.
3.7.1
Modem Control
Since repeaters might be installed in remote areas and be difficult to reach, it is important that the remote
communication is reliable and that a repeater can be recovered from network failures or power failures.
A number of features are implemented in order to maximize the remote access availability.
3.7.1.1
Tracing Modem Activity
When no one is logged in to the repeater, all activity performed between the controller and the modem is sent
out via the LMT port. By connecting a cable to the LMT port and starting the RMC in Terminal Mode (or by
using a terminal emulation software as described in section 1.4.1 Repeater Firmware, all controller activity
can be traced. This is useful for troubleshooting the modem connection as described later.
3.7.1.2
GSM Module Initialization
After a power failure, and upon user request, the controller performs a full initialization of the GSM module.
This consists of three steps:
1.
If the SIM-card in the GSM module has the PIN code enabled, the control module unlocks the PIN code.
In case wrong PIN-code is configured, the controller will not try to unlock the SIM again until the PINcode is changed. This avoids the SIM card being locked by a controller repeatedly trying to unlock the
SIM with the wrong PIN code.
2.
Once the SIM is unlocked, the controller waits for the SIM to log in to the GSM network. Depending on
signal quality and network configuration this might take a while. The controller will wait a configurable
number of seconds (default 50 seconds) for the GSM-module to login to the network. In case no network
is found, a modem power cycle will be initiated.
3.
When the module is successfully logged in to the network, the controller configures the modem with the
modem initialization string as configured when setting up the remote configuration. The modem
initialization string is a network dependent string. The default string is suitable for most networks, but
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
68 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
some networks might require some tweaking of this string. Refer to section 3.7.5 Troubleshooting
Remote Communication, for more information.
3.7.1.3
Monitoring Modem Connection
The controller constantly monitors the status of the modem connection to ensure that it is working properly,
and that the modem is logged in to the GSM network.
In case the modem is not registered to the network, or the controller cannot properly communicate with the
modem, a power cycling of the modem is initiated, after which the modem will reinitialized.
3.7.1.4
Scheduled Modem Power Cycling
In addition to polling the modem to ensure the repeater online status, the controller can be configured to
perform an automatic power cycling on a scheduled time of the day, see 4.4.3 Set Up Remote Access. Power
cycling the modem ensures the latest network configuration for the GSM module, such as the HLR Update
Interval etc.
Note! By default, the scheduled modem power cycling is disabled.
3.7.2
Local or Remote Access
The controller contains a connection manager that only allows for one connection at a time. This means that
if a user is logged in to the repeater locally the modem will not answer incoming calls. If someone is logged
in to the repeater over the modem or the controller is busy dialing the Avitec Element Manager to deliver
alarms and reports, no local login can be performed. To deliver an alarm or a report to the OMC takes from
20 to 50 seconds depending on network and modem configuration. Hence, the time the modem is occupied
reporting to the AEM is very short. The controller can only configure the modem when no user is logged in to
the system.
A trace of all modem initialization activities is sent out via the LMT port. This is useful when verifying and
trouble shooting the remote communication.
3.7.3
Remote Communication using Data Call
When the repeater is configured to use data call for remote communication, the modem connection is used for
delivering alarms and reports and for remote communication with the repeater.
Chapter 4.4.3 Set Up Remote Access contains step by step instruction for how to configure the repeater for
communication using data call.
3.7.3.1
Avitec Element Manager Addresses
The controller can be configured with two different addresses (telephone numbers) to which alarms and
reports are delivered. In case the repeater cannot deliver alarms and reports to the primary address, the next
call will be made to the secondary address.
A fallback functionality is available, which means that the controller falls back to the primary address after a
configurable number of minutes. If this interval is set to 0, the fallback will not be performed. A user can
always force the controller to fall back to the primary address.
Note! When the repeater is integrated to the Avitec Element Manager system, these addresses are set by the
AEM, why they need not be configured during site installation.
3.7.3.2
Verifying the Remote Communication
When the remote configuration has been set up and the user is logged out, the communication can be verified
using the modem feature of the RMC and dialing the data number. The remote communication is verified as
soon as a successful remote login to the repeater has been performed.
However, as a first step, it is recommended to verify that the modem is initialized correctly. After configuring
the modem using the RMC, make sure to initiate a power cycling of the modem. This is done from the RMC
menu.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
69 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Click on the drop-down menu Actions,

choose Power Cycle Modem on
Logout
When the user logs out the controller power cycles the modem, after which the GSM modem is initialized
and registered onto the network. The modem is now ready for remote access.
In case the initialization procedure reports an error, please refer to Trouble Shooting section later in this
chapter.
Verify the remote communication either by having someone attempting to integrate the repeater from the
Avitec Element Manager, or by dialing the repeater using the Repeater Maintenance Console.
When a successful login is made, the
controller redirects the output to the
modem, as in this example.
Note! It is very important to dial the data number of the SIM. In case the voice number is dialed, the call is
answered, but almost immediately the call will be hung up.
3.7.3.3
SIM-card Using Single Numbering Scheme
If the network is configured using Single Numbering Scheme (SNS), some special considerations apply.
The Avitec repeaters are by default configured so that networks using SNS always will have calls routed to
the data service in the modem. When dialing from within the network to a repeater having an SNS-configured
SIM will operate normally, since the call originator informs the system that the bearer is of type DATA.
However, when dialing from outside the GSM-network trying to connect to the repeater can be difficult.
Depending on the interface to the roaming network or to the PSTN network if an analog modem is used, the
bearer type can default to voice. If the bearer is set to voice, the data service cannot be converted to DATA,
and a call setup cannot be completed.
Note! This is not a repeater related problem; the solution is to verify how the external network interfaces
handles the VOICE vs. DATA bearer type.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
70 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
3.7.4
Remote Communication using SMS
By configuring the repeater to communicate using SMS it is possible to receive reports and alarms, and to
perform remote configuration of the repeater using simple SMS / text messages.
3.7.4.1
SMS Communications Overview
The SMS (Short Message Service) system in a GSM network is a point-to-point packed based messaging
system, which enables mobile phones to send and receive short text messages, SMS-messages. The SMS
packet can have a maximum length of 160 characters. Each message also contains information about the
originator address, where the telephone numbers are referred to as MSISDN addresses.
SMS
SMS
Repeater
BTS
BTS
Short Message
Service Centre
SMSC
LAN/
WAN
SMS
Server
When the repeater wants to send a message to a mobile phone, the message is first sent to the Short Message
Service Center (SMSC). The SMSC communicates with the network to determine where the destination
mobile is located, after which the message is forwarded to the destination address as shown above. If the
destination mobile phone is not within coverage or turned off, the message will be stored in the SMSC. When
the mobile is turned on and logs in to the network, the SMSC will send the stored message(s) to the mobile.
The SMSC center will store undelivered messages for a configurable number of hours before they are
discarded (normally 3-5 days).
Optionally, a dedicated server having direct network (LAN/WAN) connection to the SMSC can be used as a
repeater OMC. This means that messages coming to the SMSC from the repeater will be forwarded to the
server. The server is assigned its own MSISDN within the network / SMSC, allowing for the same repeater
configuration to work in this setup.
Note! Avitec Element Manager does not support the SMSC interface or monitoring of repeaters using SMS.
3.7.4.2
Repeater Access Control using SMS
When configuring the repeater for SMS communication, a repeater access list is configured, containing up to
four different telephone numbers. Alarms and reports are always sent to a dedicated address, the Primary
Address.
Select
Configuration and
Communication
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
71 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Choose SMS
Primary address
When SMS messages are sent to the repeater to read or write parameters, the repeater checks the MSISDN
for the originator of the message. If the message is any of the first two telephone numbers in the access list,
full access to the repeater is allowed (SET, GET and ACT messages). If the message is from any of the other
numbers in the list, read-only commands (GET) are allowed. Messages from any other MSISDN than those
four in the list are discarded.
3.7.4.3
Message Formats for Repeater Configuration
Configuring the repeater is done by sending SET, GET and ACT commands in the same way as when
entering commands in terminal mode. For a detailed description of all available commands, refer to document
GSM- EDGE Repeaters Command and Attribute Summary.
Reading parameters will always return a reply, while setting parameters will not generate a reply message. If
the syntax of the message is wrong, the repeater will reply with a message explaining the syntax error.
Sending ACT (ACTion) messages will not return a reply, but might cause alarms or heartbeat reports to be
sent, depending on action request.
All messages to the repeater must start with the repeater ID. In case the repeater ID is set incorrectly, the
repeater replies back with an error reply containing the correct repeater ID.
All fields in the messages to and from the repeaters are separated by blanks. Maximum message length to and
from the repeater is always 160 characters.
Note! Please refer to separate chapters on alarm format and format on traffic and heartbeat reports.
Format on Sending Messages

Message field
Format
Description
Repeater ID
XX-YY-ZZZZ
ID of the repeater that the message is intended for
Message number
NNNNN
Message number set by the originator
Command
GET, SET, ACT
Command type
Attribute
SSS
A three letter attribute following the GET, SET or ACT

attribute
Parameters
<Text>
Optional parameters.
Repeater Reply Format

Message field
Format
Description
Repeater ID
XX-YY-ZZZZ
ID of the repeater sending the message
Message number
NNNNN
5-digit message number increased for every message sent from
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
72 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
the repeater to this address.

Message Reference
MMMMM
This is a 5 digit number reference to the message number

sending the message generating this reply.
Command
GET
Command type sent to the repeater, originating the message.
Attribute
SSS
Attribute sent to the repeater
Reply
<Text>
Reply message.
Error Reply Format

Message field
Format
Description
Repeater ID
XX-YY-ZZZZ
ID of the repeater sending the message
Message number
NNNNN
5-digit message number increased for every message sent from

the repeater to this address.
Text
ERROR
Text field indicating that this is an error message.
Message Reference
MMMMM
This is a 5-digit number reference to the message number

sending the message generating this reply.
Error Type
SSS
WID = Wrong repeater ID

VAL = Wrong value of parameter sent
COM = Command error. Unknown command or attribute.
Error Message
<Text>
A textual description of the error in the message.
Example 1:
Sending
01-01-0001 00003 GET TAG
gets the site tag / name as defined during repeater installation.

Reply:
01-01-0001 00017 00003 GET TAG RFID-2339
indicating that the name of this site is RFID-2339.

Example 2:
Sending
01-01-0001 00004 SET TAG RFID-2339-VALLEY
changes the site name to RFID-2339-VALLEY.

Example 3:
Sending
01-01-0001 00003 SET CHA 1 125
generates the reply

01-01-0001 00018 ERROR 281103 175900 00003 VAL Error(12): Illegal channel number,
channel number is from 1 to 124.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
73 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
3.7.5
Troubleshooting Remote Communication
The Avitec Repeaters are equipped with a GSM module embedded on the Control Module of the repeater.
This allows for remote communication with the repeater over the GSM network. Since many networks have
their own personality, performing first time configuration of the remote communication sometimes requires
tweaking of the modem parameters.
This section describes some trouble shooting techniques if configuring the repeater for remote access fails.
Radio
LinkProtocol
(RLP)
Modem
Laptop
RS232
BTS
Interworking
Function Unit
(IFU)
Control module in
Avitec Repeater
Switch
Centre
This illustration is a simplified schematic of the remote communication between a GSM module in a repeater
and an analog modem. The analog modem in the computer communicates with the Interworking Function
Unit (IFU), which is the GSM network analog network interface. The call is routed via the switch center over
the air interface to the data call number in the SIM-card of the GSM module.
The controller is responsible for establishing connections with the Avitec Element Manager, and to answer
incoming calls to the repeater.
As described in previous sections, the controller only accepts one login at a time, either via Local
Maintenance port (LMT) or modem connection. Hence, when verifying the remote access of the repeater, it is
important to log out from the repeater locally before trying to access the repeater remotely.
3.7.5.1
Modem Initialization Errors
As described in section 3.7.3.2 Verifying the Remote Communication, it is recommended to switch over to
terminal mode after doing the modem configuration, to log out from the repeater and observe the output from
the controller.
A number of different failure messages can be identified.
In this example the controller fails to
initialize the modem. The most
common reason for this failure is that
the SIM-card is not inserted correctly,
or that the SIM is broken.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
74 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
As stated in this screen dump, this

failure is caused by the wrong PINcode being configured. No more
attempts will be made to unlock the
PIN-code until the code is
reconfigured. Try configuring the
correct PIN-code by logging in to the
RMC again. Optionally, disable the
PIN-code request on the SIM. This is
easiest configured by disabling the
PIN-code request of the SIM using a
normal GSM phone.
This error is reported when the wrong

modem initialization string is
configured. Login to the RMC and
verify that the correct modem
initialization string is set. For details
on the different modem initialization
strings, please refer to the document
GSM Module - AT Command
Reference.
The modem failing to register on the

network mainly depends on that the
GSM signal detected by the modem is
too low.
The signal level might be too low because of some different reasons:
1.
The GSM network is temporarily out of service.
2.
Signal from the BTS is too low (misaimed antennas or broken feeder
cables).
3.
The modem cable between the Donor FDM and the modem has been
tampered with.
4.
Modem broken.
Modem Cable
The modem normally needs a signal level of -105 dBm or better to successfully log in to the network.
Please refer to 3.7.5.4 Common Problems, on how to read the modem signal level when logged in locally to
the repeater.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
75 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters

3.7.5.2
Direct Modem Access
To allow for advanced trouble shooting of the communications, it is possible to access the modem directly
via the Control Module from a laptop.
LMT Port
RS232 cable
GSM
Control Module
Module
Laptop
Log in to the repeater as usual, either with RMC, or with a terminal emulation program, such as
HyperTerminal. If using RMC. When the login is completed, select Terminal Mode, this will give access to
the repeater command prompt in the same way as with HyperTerminal.
When the repeater prompt is accessible, type in the command
ACCESS MODEM
press <Enter>.
When typing ACCESS MODEM, the controller will send all the characters typed directly out the modem
port. All characters replied back from the modem will directly go out the LMT port back to the computer.
To abort an ACCESS MODEM session, press three - in a row (all three within one second) to come back to
the repeater command prompt.
Note! When accessing the modem port the modem might be configured with echo off, meaning that the
characters entered will not be echoed back to the screen. In order to enable echo, press Enter.
After that, type
ATE1
(invisible), followed by Enter. The modem should then reply with

OK
indicating that the echo is enabled. All characters entered will now be echoed back to the terminal program.
3.7.5.3
Manually answering incoming calls
It is possible to manually answer incoming calls without involving the repeater software at all, to verify that
the remote access and the network itself works as intended. In order to verify the remote communication,
make sure to have someone stand by to dial up the repeater with a terminal emulation program, for example
HyperTerminal.
Go in to Direct Modem Access as described earlier. When in direct access mode, ask the person standing by
to dial up the repeater.
As soon as a call is received, the text
RING
will repeatedly be displayed on the screen.

Type the modem command
ATA
press enter. This will inform the modem to answer (ATtention Answer).
When the connection is established, a connect message will be displayed including the connection speed.
Sometimes the information comes together with some miscellaneous information, such as error correction
protocols etc.
Note! Make sure the remote peer dials the Data Call number
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
76 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
As seen in the example, if the voice

number is dialed instead of the data
number, or if the modem contains an
illegal modem initialization string, the
message
OK
or
NO CARRIER
will be displayed almost immediately.
Try to change the modem initialization string. The modem initialization string mainly used to configure the
remote communication is AT+CBST.
Successful modem initialization strings used by Avitec includes (most common first):
AT+CBST=7,0,1
AT+CBST=0,0,1
AT+CBST=0,0,1
AT+CBST=7,0,3
Once the modem initialization string is entered, try again to dial up the repeater. For details on the different
modem initialization strings, please refer to the document GSM Module - AT command reference.
If the setup is successful, the connect message will be brought up;
CONNECT 9600
This means that an online connection is established to the remote peer. From now on, all characters typed on
the keyboard will end up on the remote peers screen. Similarly, all characters typed by the remote peer will
be displayed on the screen.
In the example, the incoming call was
successfully answered, and the remote
user entered the text message.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
77 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
In order to come back to modem command mode, press +++ (three pluses) rapidly (within one second).
Receiving
OK
means that the modem is back in command mode.

Typing
ATH
followed by <Enter> terminates the connection to the remote peer. The message
NO CARRIER
will be displayed.
3.7.5.4
Common Problems
Problem
When enabling the remote access for the repeater, the modem fails to log in to the network.
Solution
Signal strength from the donor site is too low. The signal strength can be read directly from the modem. Go
in to Direct Modem Access as described earlier. Use the command AT+CSQ (documented below) to read out
the signal strength.
In order to have good signal quality, Avitec recommends that the signal strength should be better than -95
dBm. If signal strength is lower, try to adjust the antennas to get a better signal strength from the donor.
Documentation of +CSQ command from a modems manual
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
78 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
In the example the reply to AT+CSQ is

0,7 meaning 7*2 dB above -113 dBm;
the modem detects a signal level of -99
dBm.
Problem 1
Repeater is configured properly, and answers the incoming call, but when trying to dial the repeater using an
analogue mode, no modem handshaking is heard from the dialing modem.
Problem 2
When dialing the repeater, the repeater answers the incoming call, but no connection is established, and after
a while the repeater disconnects the call.
Solution to the above problems

The most common cause is that the number called is the voice number of the SIM, not the data number.
Therefore, make sure to dial the data number.
If data call is used, the problem probably is an illegal modem initialization string.
In order to change the modem string, go to the repeater command prompt. Try changing the modem
initialization string and log out to let the controller reinitialize the modem.
If problem remains, try a few different modem initialization strings. Avitec have been successful with the
following modem initialization strings:
AT+CBST=7,0,1
AT+CBST=0,0,1
AT+CBST=0,0,1
AT+CBST=7,0,3
Please refer to the modem manual for detailed description of the modem initialization strings.
Problem
It is possible to call the repeater from another GSM mobile, but not from an analog modem.
Solution
This problem is most likely related to the modem configuration and/or the configuration of the IFU unit. Try
to decrease the communications speed and make sure that the modem error correction is supported by the
IFU. Verify the IFU configuration to see if there are any known problems with the modem connections.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
79 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters

Problem
When dialing the repeater, or when the repeater is dialing the Element Manager, the connection is terminated
before the handshaking is completed.
Solution
When a repeater is answering an incoming modem call, or calling up the OMC to deliver an alarm or a report,
the repeater will wait a configurable number of seconds for the call to be established. If no communication is
established within this time, the call will be hung up. If this interval is set too low, the handshaking is
terminated too fast. In the RMC, verify the Modem Connect Time to see that it is set to at least 30 seconds.
3.8
Upgrading Repeater Firmware
The software installed in the repeater is called firmware. Using the RMC it is possible to see what firmware is
installed, install upgrades etc
The firmware can be upgraded in the field while the repeater is operational.
The RMC is used to upload software to the controller. Since the controller contains two separate software
banks, software can be downloaded to one bank while executing from the other. Once software is
successfully uploaded, the new software is executed.
All repeater configurations remain unchanged when upgrading the software to a new version.
Firmware Control via RMC
View the currently
installed firmware
1. Open the Firmware upload view in RMC.
Upload new
firmware
1. Open the Firmware upload view in RMC. In the box labeled Firmware Location
select the directory where your firmware files (ARF files) are located.
In the box labeled Installed Firmware information about the currently installed
firmware is displayed.
2. Select the firmware to upload from the firmware list, labeled Select new firmware
to upload. For each firmware available, there is information about version and
compatibility with the repeater you are currently connected to. Below this list there
is a box with detailed information about the selected firmware.
3. Click Start Upload. During upload a status screen displays upload progress
information while you wait. The upload takes about 10 minutes with a local
connection and 15 minutes over the GSM network.
4. Upload completed.
5. The user is logged out and the new firmware is initiated.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
80 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
4
4.1
Installation
Prepare the Site
4.1.1
Site Selection
4.1.2
Antennas
4.1.3
Antenna Isolation Test
4.1.4
Site Installation Advice
4.1.5
Link Budget
4.1.6
Engineering Considerations
4.2
Install Repeater
4.2.1
Unpack the Repeater
4.2.2
Mount the Repeater
4.2.3
Ensure Proper Grounding
4.2.4
Ensure Good EMV Protection
4.2.5
Attach Antenna Cables
4.2.6
Supply Power to the Repeater
4.2.7
Mount the Coupler
4.2.8
Connect External Alarms
4.3
Start up Repeater
4.4
Configure Repeater
4.4.1
Set up RF Configuration
4.4.2
Set Repeater Name
4.4.3
Set up Remote Access
4.4.4
Alarm Configuration
4.4.5
Heartbeat Configuration
4.4.6
AEM Report Configuration
4.5
Installation Checklists
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
81 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
4.1
Prepare the Site
4.1.1
Site Selection
Site selection is one of the most critical decisions affecting the overall performance of the system.
Repeater locations
These are examples of common repeater locations.
roofs of buildings adjacent to the affected area with the antennas mounted to the penthouse or building
sides
top of a hill that is obstructing the donor sites coverage, with the antennas mounted on poles at ground
level
a water tower with antennas mounted at the top
an existing utility pole with equipment and antennas mounted below any existing power lines
a newly installed pole or tower
Important Issues
There are a few important considerations to be made while choosing the best possible site for a repeater:
Ensure access to commercial power (sun-panels is an option)
Ensure adequate signal strength. For example: to obtain the maximum output, e.g. +37 dBm, from a
channel selective repeater an input signal of approximately -53 dBm is needed into the repeater 3. To
obtain the maximum output from a Frequency Translating Repeaters remote site, e.g. +40dBm, an input
signal of -65 dBm is needed.
A conventional channel selective repeater must be located where the BTS signal strength is great enough
to be recognized by the system. It should also be located no more than 15 km from the donor site and 5
km from the furthest area to be served.
Ensure line of sight (LOS) between the BTS antenna and the repeaters donor antenna for channel
selective repeaters, and between the link antennas for frequency translating repeaters. If the signal
strength is adequate, LOS may in some cases not be necessary.
4.1.2
Antennas
Select antennas for the system with the proper directivity and high front-to-interference ratio in order to
optimize repeater coverage and system noise performance.
Ensure adequate antenna insulation for the chosen repeater type.
Link antennas typically have a narrow horizontal and vertical beam width (less than 35 degrees) and high
gain (15 25 dBi). The narrow horizontal beam width will keep interference from the repeater link channel to
a minimum. Parabolic disc antennas which offer beam widths of <10 degrees are ideal for both donor and
remote link antennas.
Server antennas are determined by the type of area to be covered. For a conventional repeater it can be any
standard GSM base station antenna that has a good front to back ratio (>=25 dB) and between 30 and 120
degrees horizontal beam width, depending on the desired coverage area. For a frequency translating antenna
it may be an omni antenna.
Use compass or planning tool to get the exact direction and tilt of the antenna
The input signal to the antenna needs to be -71 dBm if the antenna gain is 18dBi
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
82 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters

Antenna Types
For server antenna purposes panel antennas are suitable for Channel Selective Repeaters and omni antennas
or directional antennas for Frequency Translating Repeaters.
Link antennas and pick-up antennas are often narrow beam panel antennas with high gain for Channel
Selective repeaters and narrow beam antennas with gain depending on distance for Frequency Translating
Repeaters
Antenna Direction
Direct repeater coverage away from the donor cell to minimize RF signal coverage overlap. If the BTS has
different sectors always choose to use the carriers used in the sector facing away from the remote site in order
to avoid inter symbol interference (ISI).
4.1.3
Antenna Isolation Test
The antenna isolation is the difference between the output signal on the server antenna and the signal leaking
into the donor or link antenna.
At a conventional installation with a channel selective repeater the antenna isolation needs to be large enough
not to cause any signal distortion. For EDGE-signals (8-PSK) as much as 25 dB of margin (antenna isolation
repeater gain) may be required to maintain signal quality. At the remote site of a frequency translating
repeater installation the antenna isolation needs to be approximately 75dB.
Signal leaking over to

the donor/link antenna
Donor or link antenna
Repeater
Server antenna
Local or remote
connection
Computer
with RMC
The antenna isolation can be measured through the use of a function in the RMC. The measurement can be
made at the time the repeater is configured as well as regularly when the repeater is up and running. The
measurement can be made when the repeater is operational.
Note! The measurement only takes a few seconds, but if the repeater is operational at the time of the
measurement there is a risk of loosing calls during the time the parameters are changed.
4.1.3.1
Single Measurement
Select RF/Status
Prepare for the

measurement
Avitec AB
Ensure that the BCCH is in chain 1 or change the setup so that the measurement is
done on the chain that contains the BCCH. Use a silent channel in the other
chain. This channel will be used for detecting the leaking signal and needs to be
free of traffic.
A1009300 Rev G
83 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
If the BCCH is not

on chain 1:
Select
Configuration and
Antenna Isolation
Measurement
Define the channel that contains the BCCH and the listener channel.
Go back to
RF/Status.
Use the Actions drop
down menu and
select Force
Antenna Isolation
Measurement
Click on
to
monitor the result
4.1.3.2
Regular Measurements
The RMC can initiate regular antenna isolations measurements.

Select
Configuration and
Antenna Isolation
Measurement
Enable the
measurement
Define the time
point
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
84 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters

4.1.3.3
Alternative method for antenna isolation measurement
The antenna isolation can also be measured by use of a signal generator and a spectrum analyzer. Use a signal
generator to generate a carrier wave signal on the server antenna, and a spectrum analyzer to measure the
signal leaking over to the donor antenna.
Note! The repeater does not need to be connected.
Signal leaking
over to donor
antenna
Repeater
Measurement of
leaking signal
Input to
server
antenna
Signal
Generator
Spectrum
Analyzer
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
85 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
4.1.4
Site Installation Advice
4.1.4.1
In a channel selective repeater there are two antennas one donor antenna to pick up the signal from the BTS
and one server antenna to serve the coverage area.
An input signal to the repeater of more than -49 dBm must be present to obtain +37 dBm output. This
example illustrates the various signal levels and antenna gains needed to form a properly functioning repeater
system.
Received signal level
-72 dBm
Donor antenna (4 ft dish)
+25 dBi
Cable loss (100 ft of 7/8 inch)
-2 dB
Input to repeater
-49 dBm
Gain of repeater (example)
+86 dB
Output from repeater
+37 dBm
-2 dB
Server antenna gain
+13 dBi
Repeater ERP
+48 dBm
The donor antenna faces the BTS. Free line of sight is desirable but not necessary if the signal strength at the
exact location of the antenna is strong enough.
The server antenna may be mounted above or below the donor antenna depending on the site conditions.
Important is the vertical separation needed to achieve adequate isolation between antennas. The isolation has
to be at least 10-25 dB higher than the repeater gain (the higher number for EDGE). This may well be in the
region of 20 meters or more. Other alternatives are metal screening with wire mesh or horizontal antenna
separation.
A high gain antenna will help in minimizing the overall path loss to achieve the desired output power. Donor
antenna gains are typically 20 to 25 dBi, while server antennas are often 10 to 15 dBi. The server antenna
normally has a horizontal beam of 60 to 120. Donor antennas should have a horizontal and vertical beam
width of less than 30 to correctly select the donor base station (instead of other nearby base stations).
This table can be used as a guideline for antenna separation. Antennas are assumed to be highly directional
and pointed in the opposite direction.
Vertical Antenna separation
Horizontal Antenna Separation
Separation (m)
Isolation (dB)
Separation (m)
Isolation (dB)
75
45.5
10
87.1
10
51,7
20
99,1
50
65,5
30
106.2
100
71.5
40
111,2
150
75,1
50
115
250
77,6
The table demonstrates that vertical separation is much more effective.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
86 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
The physical separation between the donor and server antennas has been calculated using the following
formulas.
Vertical Separation:
Horizontal Separation:
I
D
Gd
Gs
=
=
=
=
=
I (dB) = 28 + 40 log (D/)

I (dB) = 22 + 20 log (D/) (Gd Gs)
Isolation
Distance between donor and server antennas (m)
Wavelength (m)
Gain of donor antenna facing server antenna (dB)
Gain of server antenna facing donor antenna (dB)
Site Installation Channel Selective Repeater
Donor Antenna
Recommended isolation is
10-25dB higher than the
repeater gain (typically 25m)
Server Antenna
Coaxial cable diameter of

or more is recommended
Channel Selective
Repeater
7/16 type
connectors, female
Site installation for channel selective repeaters

4.1.4.2
A Frequency Translating Repeater consists of two parts a donor unit and a remote unit. The donor unit is
installed at the base station site and connected to the base station through a 30 dB RF coupler.
A separation of at least 2 carrier bands (600 kHz) is necessary between the link frequencies and the Broadcast
Frequencies. In the illustration below the link carriers are F6 and F7 and the Broadcast Carrier Frequencies
are F1 and F2 which gives more separation than is needed.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
87 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
F1 and F2
F6 and F7
Link Antenna
Server Antenna
Link Antenna
16mm2
Ground
Cable
F1 and F2
Repeater
Remote
Unit
Repeater Donor Unit
Coupler
16mm2
Ground
Cable
BTS
It is important to remember that a whole sector must be used when installing a Frequency Translating
Repeater. The base station sector using F1 and F2 is transmitted to the repeater. The base station sector used
must have the same number of carriers as the repeater.
At the remote site an input signal greater than -75dBm is desired. An input of -65 dBm is necessary to deliver
an output of +40dBm.
This example illustrates the signal levels and antenna gains needed to form a properly functioning repeater
system.
Received signal level
-87 dBm
Donor antenna (4 ft dish)
+25 dBi
-2 dB
Input to repeater
-64 dBm
Gain of repeater (example)
+105 dB
Output from repeater
+41 dBm
-2 dB
Server antenna gain
+13 dBi
Repeater ERP
+52 dBm
The isolation between antennas at the remote site seldom needs to be more than 75dB. This value can be
achieved with a limited antenna displacement, often as low as 3 meters. The relatively modest isolation
requirement allows the use of omni-directional antennas for coverage.
A high gain antenna will help in minimizing the overall path loss to achieve the desired output power. Donor
antenna gains are typically 20 to 25 dBi, while server antennas are often 10 to 15 dBi. The coverage antenna
normally has a horizontal beam of 60 to 120. Donor antennas should have a horizontal and vertical beam
width of less than 30 to correctly select the donor base station (instead of other nearby base stations).
This table can be used as a guideline for antenna separation. Antennas are assumed to be highly directional
and pointed in the opposite direction.
Vertical Antenna separation
Horizontal Antenna Separation
Separation (m)
Isolation (dB)
Separation (m)
Isolation (dB)
75
45.5
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
88 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
10
87.1
10
51,7
20
99,1
50
65,5
30
106,2
100
71,5
40
111,2
150
75,1
50
115
250
77,6
The table demonstrates that vertical separation is much more effective

The physical separation between the donor and server antennas has been calculated using the following
formulas.
Vertical Separation:
Horizontal Separation:
I
D
Gd
Gs
=
=
=
=
=
I (dB) = 28 + 40 log (D/)

I (dB) = 22 + 20 log (D/) (Gd Gs)
Isolation
Distance between donor and server antennas (m)
Wavelength (m)
Gain of donor antenna facing server antenna (dB)
Gain of server antenna facing donor antenna (dB)
Site Installation Frequency Translating Repeater

BTS Antenna
Link Antenna
Coaxial cable diameter of or more

is recommended
N-type connector, female
Cap
Coupler
BTS
Single Donor Unit
N-type
connector,
female
7/16 type
connector,
female
Site Installation for Frequency Translating or Band Shifting Repeater Single Donor Unit
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
89 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
BTS
Antennas
Link Antenna
Tx/Rx 1
Tx/Rx 2
Coaxial cable diameter of or
more is recommended
Caps
N-type connector, female

Double Donor Unit
Couplers
A double donor unit

can alternatively be
connected to two
different BTS
N-type
connectors,
female
BTS
7/16 type
connector,
female
Site Installation for Frequency Translating Repeater Double Donor Unit

4.1.4.3
A Band Shifting Repeater is identical with a frequency translating repeater; the only difference is that the link
is on another band than the broadcast frequency.
By using another band for the link the isolation between antennas at the remote site becomes very low. It
might in some applications even be possible to use the same antenna for both the link and the service area.
4.1.5
Link Budget
It is important to make a link budget before the installation is completed. This budget will give the necessary
input for tuning the system and to ensure good system performance.
In this example these fixed parameters are used:
BTS sensitivity (without diversity gain)
-106 dBm
BTS output Power
+41 dBm
Donor unit output power
+33 dBm
Remote unit output power
+40 dBm
4.1.5.1
Downlink Path
The Downlink path is quite straightforward to set up in a repeater installation, and also gives a good
indication of the actual path loss between the donor and the remote unit. The gain in the units is simply
adjusted until the desired output levels are achieved. This procedure is simplified by the built in monitoring
functions in the Avitec repeaters.
Remember though, that the repeater is not a piece of measurement equipment, and has a limited accuracy
when presenting input and output levels. (+/-3dB and +/-2dB respectively)
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
90 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Here two different link path losses will be analyzed, representing two extremes regarding the distance
between the donor and remote unit: 6.5 and 26 kilometers. Free space path loss is assumed in both cases.
(Feeder losses are varied to get further extreme values).
Total Link loss (6.5km):

-0.5 + 15 -108 +15 - 0.5 = - 79dB
|
--------- Feeder loss between Remote unit and Link antenna
---------------- Link antenna at Remote site 15dBi
----------------------Free space path loss at 925MHz / 6.5km
---------------------------Link antenna at Donor site 15dBi

---------------------------------Feeder loss between Donor unit and link antenna
Total Link loss (26km):

-2.5 + 15 -120 +15 - 2.5 = - 95dB
|
-------- Feeder loss between Remote unit and Link antenna
----------------Link antenna at Remote site 15dBi
---------------------Free space path loss at 925MHz / 26km
--------------------------Link antenna at Donor site 15dBi
---------------------------------Feeder loss between Donor unit and link antenna
The downlink path based on the above link loss calculation for 6.5 and 26 kilometers.
BTS
Coupler
G=xdB
G=-30dB
P=+41dBm
Avitec AB
Donor Unit
G=22dB
Link Path
Remote Unit
G=-79dB
P=+33dBm
G=86dB
P=-46dBm
A1009300 Rev G
P=+40dBm
91 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
BTS
Coupler
G=xdB
G=-30dB
Donor Unit
G=22dB
P=+41dBm
Link Path
Remote Unit
G=-95dB
P=+33dBm
G=102dB
P=-62dBm
P=+40dBm
Note that the shorter link distance gives the opportunity to reduce the donor downlink gain and increase the
remote downlink gain. This will reduce the output power in the link antenna and minimize interference
caused by the link, and thereby simplify frequency planning.
The longer link distance is probably close to the maximum useful distance, since timing advance will only
allow a repeater cell radius of 5-6 kilometers in this case. (The delay through the repeater chain is typically 2
x 6 us, equal to an increase of timing advance by 6-7 units)
In the case of a BTS with extended range capability longer link paths are possible, but then link antennas with
more gain should be considered. 20dBi antennas have been used in some installations, reducing total link loss
by 10dB compared to the above numbers. Keeping everything else constant, this would allow for another
23km of link distance.
4.1.5.2
Uplink Path
The settings of the Repeater Uplink path requires much more careful planning than the Downlink. Very
different results can be obtained depending on the Repeater Uplink gain setting, and there will always be a
trade off situation between the Repeater cell sensitivity and BTS cell sensitivity. Low Repeater Uplink gain
will result in poorer Repeater cell sensitivity but only a small BTS cell sensitivity degradation. The opposite
is also true; high Repeater Uplink gain will result in good repeater cell sensitivity but a larger reduction in
BTS cell sensitivity.
The calculations to determine the sensitivity in the Repeater cell and the BTS cell is based on the formula for
determining the total noise figure for a cascade of amplifiers and attenuators:
NF1
G1
NF2
G2
NF3
G3
NF4
G4
NFtot = NF1 + (NF2-1)/G1 + (NF3-1)/(G1*G2) + (NF4-1)/(G1*G2*G3 ) + (units, not dBs)

This equation is basically used to find the total noise figure at two points in the cascade made up by the
repeater installation. Note that if there is a device in the chain that is affected by thermal noise from an
antenna, the equation has to be modified for that device. E.g. if device 3 is connected via an aerial
connection, its contribution to the total gain is
NF3/(G1*G2).
5.
The first point is the entire chain including the BTS receiver noise figure. This value is then directly
used to calculate the repeater cell sensitivity.
6.
The second point is the same cascade excluding the BTS receiver and coupler noise figure. This noise
figure is, in combination with the gain to this point, converted to an equivalent noise floor. This is then
added to the BTS receiver equivalent noise floor. The sum of the noise is then converted back to a noise
figure used to calculate the BTS cell sensitivity.
First the equivalent BTS noise figure corresponding to the BTS sensitivity must be calculated from the
following equation:
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
92 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Eq. BTS noise figure = -106 - ( -174 + 54 + 8 ) dB = 6 dB

C/N for 0.4% BER (ETSI ETR 103)
10 x log(BW) BW=251kHz (ETSI ETR 103)
Thermal noise floor
BTS sensitivity
This value is used in all calculations below.
Example 1: Rule of thumb setup with 26km link

As a starting point (rule of thumb) the uplink gain can be set equal to the downlink gain settings.
For the -95dB link this will give the situation shown in the figure below:
Remote
Unit
Link path
Donor
Unit
Coupler
G=102dB
NF=3dB
G=-95dB
NF=95dB
G=22dB
NF=5dB
G=-30dB
NF=30dB
BTS
G=xdB
NF=6dB
NFtot=8,9dB
Gtot = -1dB
NFtot=4,2dB
The 8.9dB noise figure through the repeater chain corresponds to a sensitivity of
-174 + 54 + 8 + 8.9 dBm = -103.1 dBm

|
----------------
---------------------
----------------------------
----------------------------------
Repeater chain total noise figure with BTS

C/N for 0.4% BER (ETSI ETR 103)
10 x log (BW) BW = 251kHz
Thermal noise floor
The noise floor from the repeater chain at the BTS receiver input is:
-174 + 54 + 5.5 - 1 dBm = -115.5 dBm
|
----------------
---------------------
----------------------------
----------------------------------
Total gain in Repeater chain

Repeater chain total noise figure without BTS &
coupler
10 x log (BW) BW = 251 kHz
Thermal noise floor
This must now be added to the BTS receiver noise floor, which is:
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
93 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
-174 + 54 + 6 dBm = -114.0 dBm

|
---------------------
----------------------------
----------------------------------
BTS receiver noise figure

10 x log (BW) BW = 251 kHz
Thermal noise floor
And when they are added the total noise floor at the BTS receiver input becomes:
10 * LOG [10^(-115.5/10) + 10^(-114.0/10) ] = -111.7 dBm
This is a 2.3dB higher BTS receiver noise floor compared to the starting value (114-111.7=2.3), which means
that the BTS receiver sensitivity has degraded from -106 dBm to -103.7dBm without diversity.
Summary of example 1:
The calculations in example 1 used a very simple setup technique for the uplink path. The gain in the Uplink
was simply set equal to the Downlink gain in both the Donor and Remote unit. This resulted in:
Sensitivity in Repeater cell = -103.1 dBm
Sensitivity in BTS cell = -103.7 dBm without diversity, a reduction of 2.3dB.
Note that the BTS Diversity receiver will maintain its original sensitivity of -106dBm since no Repeater noise
it emitted into its input. However, the diversity gain will be lower than normal because of the Repeater noise
emitted into the BTS main receiver input.
Also note that all traffic through the Repeater will only enter the BTS main receiver input, NOT the diversity
receiver input. This may cause a Diversity alarm on some types of BTSs. This is normal and should be a
simple matter of configuring the alarms in the BTS.
Example 2: 26km link with high Repeater cell sensitivity

To get good Repeater cell sensitivity, the Uplink gain must be increased compared to example 1. If the gain
from the Repeater server cell antenna to the BTS receiver antenna input is positive (larger than 0 dB), the
Repeater can in fact be considered to be Tower Mounted Amplifier (TMA). The major difference is of course
that the antenna is located 26km from the BTS in this case. The sensitivity of the original BTS cell will be
degraded more than in example 1 because the noise floor will be higher at the BTS receiver input.
The example 2 setup looks like the figure below:
Remote
Unit
Link path
G=105dB
NF=3dB
G=-95dB
NF=95dB
Donor
Unit
Coupler
G=26dB G=-30dB
NF=4.5dB NF=30dB
BTS
G=xdB
NF=6dB
NFtot=5.3dB
Gtot = +6dB
NFtot=4.2dB
Doing the calculations yields:

Sensitivity in BTS cell = -100.2 dBm without diversity, a reduction of 5.8dB.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
94 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
It is obvious that the increased Uplink gain has improved Repeater cell sensitivity on the cost of the BTS cell
sensitivity.
Example 3: 6.5km link with 2dB lower gain in the downlink compared to uplink
Remote
Unit
Link path
Donor
Unit
Coupler
G=84dB
NF=3dB
G=-79dB
NF=79dB
G=22dB
NF=5dB
G=-30dB
NF=30dB
BTS
G=xdB
NF=6dB
NFtot=10.5dB
Gtot = -3dB
NFtot=5.2dB

Sensitivity in BTS cell
= -104.5 dBm without diversity, a reduction of 1.5dB.
This example shows a relatively small reduction in the BTS cell sensitivity on the cost of a rather poor
Repeater cell sensitivity. In this case however, it is possible to increase the Uplink gain in the Remote unit
and reduce it equally much in the Donor unit. This will improve the overall noise figure as dictated by the
NFtot equation on page 3. This is examined in the next example.
Example 4: 6.5km link with high BTS sensitivity and optimized Repeater
sensitivity
The Donor Uplink gain in example 3 was 22dB. Since the minimum configurable gain in the Donor unit is
12dB, it can be reduced by 10dB. This is compensated for in the Remote unit and this setup looks like:
Remote
Unit
Link path
G=94dB
NF=3dB
G=-79dB
NF=79dB
Donor
Unit
G=12dB
NF=10dB
Coupler
G=-30dB
NF=30dB
BTS
G=xdB
NF=6dB
NFtot=10.1dB
Gtot = -3dB
NFtot=3.7dB

Although the improvement compared to Example 3 is only a few tens of a dB, the cost of the improvement
is just a few moments of calculations. With more total Uplink gain the improvement is larger. See the next
example.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
95 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Example 5: 6.5km link with optimized Repeater sensitivity

Remote
Unit
Link path
G=100dB
NF=3dB
G=-79dB
NF=79dB
Donor
Unit
G=12dB
NF=10dB
Coupler
G=-30dB
NF=30dB
BTS
G=xdB
NF=6dB
NFtot=6.1dB
Gtot = +3dB
NFtot=3.2dB

Compared to example 4, the repeater sensitivity has been improved by 4dB but the BTS sensitivity has been
reduced by 2dB.
Summary
It has been shown by several calculation examples that some care is needed when the Uplink gain is
configured in a CSFT installation if optimum sensitivity is desired. However, rule of thumb setup will only
cause a small BTS sensitivity degradation with a typical BTS, but Repeater cell sensitivity will not be
optimum.
Note that feeder looses between Repeater server antenna and Remote unit are not included in the
calculations.
4.1.6
Engineering Considerations
4.1.6.1
Channel Separation
Avitec recommends a spacing of two GSM channels between the carriers in the amplifier chains. These two
"guard channels" create a centre-to-centre separation of 600 kHz.
Decreasing the spacing may lead to degraded performance.
4.1.6.2
Minimum Link Channel Spacing
When setting up a frequency translating repeater Avitec recommends a spacing of two GSM channels
between the link frequency and the radio frequency. These two "guard channels" create a centre-to-centre
separation of 600 kHz.
Decreasing the spacing may lead to degraded performance.
4.1.6.3
Gain Adjustment
Use only the required power to cover blind spots or coverage areas, to minimize border overlap with the
donor BTS
Optimize repeater gain levels to achieve system path balance and an acceptable noise level contribution
Reflections, phase fluctuations and other variables can all affect the quality of radio traffic and on site
adjustments and measurement will always have to be carried out to ensure reliable radio communication.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
96 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters

4.1.6.4
Overlapping Coverage
Ideally, the repeater system will be engineered with minimal overlapping coverage between the donor base
station and the repeater. However, the mobile unit will occasionally receive signals from both the donor and
the repeater at similar levels. This situation is comparable to a mobile receiving multiple signals at varying
times due to multi-path propagation.
The GSM standards require that systems must accommodate up to 16s of multi-path delay for two received
signals that are less than or equal to 10dB apart. The CSR922 repeater contributes a maximum signal delay of
6s.
4.1.6.5
Are calls possible on link frequencies for frequency translating

repeaters?
Calls cannot be connected via the link frequencies for the following reasons.
The mobile station (MS) searches for the Broadcast Control Channel (BCCH) beamed from the Base
Transceiver Station (BTS) Even though the MS may find the frequency translated link signal BCCH
transmission; it will not be possible to initiate a call through it.
When a call is initiated, the BTS switches from BCCH to the Stand Alone Control Channel (SDCCH), which
(apart from other information) instructs the MS which frequency (ARFCN) to use during the call. This makes
the MS switch back to the non-frequency translated ARFCN (BTS frequency), where it will find no BTS
signal and the call is aborted. The same is true when logging into the network.
Note! The BCCH, SDCCH, and TCH channels are logical GSM channels, not to be confused with Absolute
Radio Frequency Channels (ARFCN). Only the latter are associated with specific frequencies.
4.1.6.6
Frequency Hopping and Repeaters
Frequency hopping usually means that the input baseband traffic at frame level is switched between fixed
frequency RF-channels. In order for the hopping to be effective, four or more channels are used. The Avitec
channel selective repeater with appropriate number of channels can function with this kind of hopping.
However, frequency hopping can also mean that the frequency of each transceiver is changed in phase with
transmission frames. This is usually called synthesized hopping. Being more complex than the baseband type,
it has not been widely implemented in GSM networks.
When GSM is evolving into EDGE, traffic will be IP-packet based. IP-traffic studies show that frequency
hopping does not improve the capacity or performance of the channel. A tendency is that frequency hopping
will not be frequently used in EDGE networks.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
97 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
4.2
Install the Repeater
Instructions in the left column are fast track instructions and can be used by experienced users. Other users
are recommended to read the complete text in this installation guide
4.2.1
Unpack the Repeater
Unpack the
repeater
Inspect the shipped material before unpacking the equipment, document any visual
damage and report according to routines.
A delivery of a repeater from Avitec contains:
Checklist with delivered items
Repeater
Wall mounting kit or rack mounting kit (defined in order)
4 bolts for attaching repeater to mounting kit
Cable cover
Keys to repeater and insex tool for bolts
CD containing Product Description and Users Manual
Any other specifically ordered item
4.2.2
Mount the Repeater
Mount the
repeater on a wall,
on a pole or in a
rack
Mount the repeater in an accessible location and in a location that fulfils the
environmental requirements.
The repeater can be mounted on the wall, on a pole or in a 19 inch rack. The
Repeater is delivered with a wall mounting kit or a rack mounting kit.
The repeater needs to be mounted tightly to eliminate vibrations
Wall mounting kit

Ensure proper
ventilation
Rack mounting kit
Mount the repeater so that heat can be dispersed from it. The repeater wall mounting
kit ensures an optimum airflow between the wall and the repeater itself. Do not
block this air channel as it will cause the MTBF of the repeater to drop dramatically,
or even in the worst case cause the repeater to fail completely.
If possible use a wall in the shadow to minimize the overall sun loading. If sufficient
shielding cannot be obtained, an additional sun shield should be mounted.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
98 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Example of a sun shield
4.2.3
Connect the
grounding
protection
Ensure Proper Grounding

Ensure that good grounding protection measures are taken to create a
reliable repeater site. Make sure to use adequately dimensioned
grounding cables. The minimum recommended conductive area for a
grounding cable is 16mm2.
The antenna cabling should be connected to ground every 10m by a
reliable grounding kit.
Make sure the grounding product used is suitable for the kind and size
of cable being used.
Connect the repeater box bolt to the same ground.
Ground
Ground connector on repeater
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
99 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
4.2.4
Ensure Good EMV Protection (Lightning)

Caution
If insufficient Electro magnetic Protection is provided,
or if EMV measures are not taken, warranties issued by Avitec are not valid.
Connect the
lightning
protection
The lightning hazard to electric and electronic equipment consists in the

interferences of direct lightning current infections and high surge voltages induced
by the electromagnetic field of nearby lightning channels or down conductors.
Amplitudes from cloud-to-earth lightning amounts to several 10kA and may last
longer than 2 ms. The damage caused depends on the energy involved and on the
sensitivity of the electronics systems.
Ensure that lightning protection measures are taken to create a reliable repeater site.
Protect all coaxial cables and power cables from the transients caused by lightning.
Fit all cables with suitable lightning protection devices.
For detailed information please refer to IEC 61024-1 and 61312-1 for international
standards for protection of information systems against LEMP, Lightning
Electromagnetic Pulse, including radio transmitters. They define proper planning,
installation and inspection of effective lightning protection systems.
The top of the
mast must be
higher than
the antennas
and be
properly
grounded
The
grounding
path must
have reliable
continuity
and be
correctly
dimensioned
Antennas
Primary Protective
Devices
Equipotential
Grounding Bars
Secondary
Protective Devices
Protective Device
230V AC/48V DC
The Avitec repeaters comply with the EN standard ETS 301 498-8 which stipulates
demands on lightning/surge protection for typical infrastructure telecom equipment
installations.
Several lightning protection devices should be used in series with declining
threshold voltages to help attenuate the pulse component which makes it through the
first layer of protection.
The primary protective device is part of the site installation and is not supplied by
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
100 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Avitec. Coaxial lightning protection is normally one of these three types: Gas
capsule, High-pass and Bandpass.
There also need to be a protective device installed on the power supply cord.
Protective device installed in connection with the power supply
4.2.5
Attach Antenna Cables
Note!
For Frequency Translating Repeaters see also 4.2.6 Mount the Coupler
Note!
For site installation advice and descriptions of antenna installation see 4.1 Prepare
the Site.
Attach the antenna

cables to the
repeater antenna
connections
Connectors
The connector to the directional coupler (frequency translating repeaters donor unit)
is N-type female. Antenna connections are DIN 7/16 connectors, female.
Compatibility
Make sure that cables and connectors are compatible. Using cables and connectors
from the same manufacturer is helpful.
Connectors
All connectors must be clean and dry
Waterproof all
outdoor
connections
Waterproof all outdoor connections using silicone, vulcanizable tape or other

suitable substance as moisture and dust can impair RF characteristics.
Make sure enough room has been allocated for the bending radius of the cable. RF
cables must not be kinked, cut or damaged in any way
Connect the RF cables to the antennas tightly but without damaging threads
Fasten cables tight to cable ladder or aluminum sheet
Cable Dimensions
For short length of feeder cables use , for longer feeder cables use 7/8. Chose
thicker coax cables for lower attenuation. Minimize the length of the coax cables to
reduce the attenuation
Jumper Cables
Use jumper cables for easy installation. The RF Coaxial cable can be substituted at
each end with a jumper cable.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
101 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
4.2.6
Mount the Coupler

Caution!
When the coupler is connected the affected base station sector needs to be taken out of service. Turn the base
station off before detaching the cable to the base station cell antenna. It might shut down the whole network
chose an off-peak time for this installation.
Note!
The Coupler is used only in connection with Frequency Translating or Band Shifting
Repeaters.
Mount the coupler
The connection between the donor unit and the BTS is made using an Avitec
Coupler. The attenuation from the BTS to the repeater is -30 dB. The attenuation
through the coupler from the BTS to the antenna is minimal.
Avitec Coupler
The coupler is connected in series with the BTS antenna. J1 and J2 are used for the
connection of the coupler in-between the BTS and the cable to the BTS antenna.
To Antenna
Link Antenna
7/16 type
connector
N-type connector,
female
Cap
RF Coaxial cable
7/16 type
connector
-30dB Coupler
BTS
N-type connector,
female
7/16 type connector,

female
Coupler connections
J3 or J4 is connected to the repeater donor unit depending on the orientation of the
coupler. If J1 is connected to the BTS; J3 is used for connection with the repeater, if
J2 is connected to the BTS; J4 is used for connection with the repeater. The
connector not used (J3 or J4) must be sealed with a cap to prevent the ingression of
dust and water.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
102 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
J1 and J2 are DIN 7/16 connectors, one male and one female
J3 and J4 are N-type connectors, female
4.2.7
1.
Disconnect the antenna from the base station
2.
Decide whether to connect a filter in series with the antenna cable (between the
coupler and the antenna) to prevent any disturbances from the repeater to reach
the antenna
3.
Attach the coupler in-between the base station and the antenna cable. (J1 and
J2).
4.
Attach the coupler connector closest to the base station to the repeater donor
antenna connector
5.
Attach a cap to the connector closest to the antenna connection
6.
Turn the base station back on and verify that it is operational.
7.
Seal the coupler with rubber tape. Start on the base station antenna cable and
wrap to the base station port cable. Wrap in a circular motion downwards.
Cover the coupler and its connecting parts completely. This will provide a
weather resistant seal. Complete by adding three layers of PVC tape for UV
protection.
Supply Power to the Repeater

Caution!
The antenna cables must be connected to the repeater before input power is switched on. Alternatively the
antenna connections on the repeater can be terminated with 50ohm termination plugs.
Note!
Avitec repeaters can be fed by 110/230 V AC, 50/60 Hz or 48 V DC. Ensure that the
right voltage is used.
Connect the
repeater to the
power supply
Input power is connected to the repeater via a plinth inside the repeater.
The strain relief fitting is a Pg 13.5 suitable for a 6-12 mm cable diameter.
230 V AC or 110 V AC
Connect the power cable to the plinth with the phase linked to the brown cable,
neutral linked to the blue and ground to the yellow/green. See illustration below.
Phase
Neutral
Ground
L
N
Strain Relief Fitting
Avitec AB
Connection Plinth
A1009300 Rev G
103 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
48 VDC
Connect the power cable to the plinth with negative (-48V) to the uppermost
connection and positive (0V) to the middle connection. Leave the lower connection
empty. See illustration below.
Negative
Positive
-48V
0V
Strain Relief Fitting
Connection Plinth
Recommended cable areas for 48VDC

0 - 10 meters between repeater and
power supply
2,5 mm
10 50 meters between repeater and

power supply
4 mm
Over 50 meters between repeater and

power supply
Recommendation is to reconfigure the

installation, or to make special
arrangements to increase cable area
Requirements on 48 V power supply

The 48V power supply must comply with SELV requirements, as defined in
EN60950, which implies double isolation. The output power needs to be 48VDC
+25%/-15%.
For a 2 channel repeater the maximum input current is 8A, for a 4-channel repeater
16A.
Note!
Back-up battery
In 4-channel repeaters there are two power supplies one in each part of the box.
Each power supply has its own power switch. Both need to be switched on.
Backup Battery
There is a back-up battery installed in connection with the power supply. If there is a
power failure the battery will supply enough power for the Control Module in the
repeater to send information about the power failure.
The backup battery can be switched on an off separately. The switch is placed
adjacent to the input power switch on the power supply.
In 4-channel repeaters there is a backup battery only in connection to the main
power supply unit.
At delivery the back-up battery is connected. It can be replaced by lifting the battery
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
104 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
pack out of the crate and disconnecting the cable.
Connector
4.2.8
Connect External Alarms
Connect external
alarms
If the repeater is equipped with an external alarm interface card the connector plinth
for the external alarms is located at the bottom of the repeater.
The strain relief fitting in is a Pg 13.5 suitable for a 6-12 mm cable diameter.
Connect the alarm cords to the plinth according to the pin layout below (in the
standard version pins 14 18 are not used).
Pin # Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
External alarm 1A
External alarm 1B
External alarm 2A
External alarm 2B
External alarm 3A
External alarm 3B
External alarm 4A
External alarm 4B
Alarm +15V
Alarm 0V
Relay A
Relay B
GND
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
External Alarm
Four external alarm sources can be connected to the repeater. These alarms operate on
a voltage between 12 and 24VDC. The presence or absence of this voltage will trigger
the alarm depending on how the alarm polarity has been configured via software.
The alarms can be given individual names and be configured active-low or activehigh, so that the alarm is given either in the presence or absence of applied power.
Active high means that an applied voltage of between 12 and 24 V will cause the
external alarm indicator to turn red. Active low means that when there is no voltage
the alarm indicator will turn red.
The repeater can supply +15 VDC to an external alarm source through pin 9 and 10.
The maximum allowed load is 50mA.
The repeater contains a relay (pin 11 and 12) that can be connected to an external
device to indicate an alarm. The relay can be configured to trigger on any number of
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
105 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
internal and external alarms. The maximum current that can be supplied is 50mA.
The default setting is that the relay is open when there is no alarm and closed as an
alarm occurs.
For configuration of external alarms see section 4.4.4 Alarm Configuration.
4.2.9
Close Repeater
Close repeater
Avitec AB
Close lid and lock repeater, or continue with the next section: Stat-up the Repeater.
A1009300 Rev G
106 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
4.3
Start-up the Repeater

Caution!
Make sure the antenna cables or 50 ohm terminations are connected to the repeaters antenna connectors
before the repeater is turned on.
Install the RMC
Install the RMC software on a computer from a CD or a diskette.
Connect to the LMT

port
Open the repeater and connect the computer to the LMT port via a DB9 male
connector with serial RS232 interface.
LMT port
The communication parameters are set automatically by the RMC.
Switch the repeater
on
Switch the repeater on by using the power switches on the power supply.
Note! See caution above!
Power Switches
There are two switches. One is for the battery and one is for the power.
Note! Always switch on both switches when the repeater should be switched on.
Note!
The power switch has two positions; on and stand by. In the stand by position
the repeater is still connected to the input power but not operational.
Note!
On 4-channel models both power supplies need to be switched on.
Check power supply

LEDs
Power Supply LED

Check the LEDs on the Power unit and Control Module to ensure that normal
operation conditions have been attained.
The power supply has 4 LEDs to indicate the status.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
107 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Input
Power
+6V
+15V
+28V
LED 1, Input Power, Green

Slow flash
Power supply unit operating on AC or DC
OFF
Power supply unit not operating
LED 2, +6V, Red

Quick flash
+6V power supply not operating or operating

with malfunction
LED 3, +15V, Red

Quick flash
+15V power supply not operating or

operating with malfunction
LED 4, +28V, Red

Quick flash
+28V power supply not operating or

operating with malfunction
Examples
LED 1 is flashing slowly, LED 2 4 are
flashing slowly (once every 10 seconds)
Input
Power
+6V
+15V
+28V
=> power supply unit is operating without

problem
LED 1 is flashing slowly, one or two of the

red LEDs are flashing quickly
Input
Power
+6V
+15V
+28V
=> Input power is operating but there is a

problem with some of the other voltages
LED 1 is flashing slowly, all of the red
LEDs are flashing quickly
Input
Power
Avitec AB
+6V
+15V
+28V
=> Input power is out and unit is operating

on backup battery
A1009300 Rev G
108 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Check Control
Module LEDs
Control Module LED

The Control Module has 3 LEDs to indicate the status.
LED 1, Green
OFF
GSM Module switched OFF
Permanent ON
GSM Module Switched on, not registered on network
Slow Flash
GSM Module switched on, registered on network

(approximately 1 flash per second)
Quick flash
Module switched on, registered on network, call

active (approx. 3 flashes per second)
LED 2, Red
OFF
Control Module switched OFF
Slow Flash
Control Module switched on, status OK (once every

10 seconds)
Quick flash
Control Module switched on, one or more errors /

alarms detected (except door status)
LED 3, Blue
Start the RMC
OFF
Control Module switched OFF, or no one logged in
Slow Flash
Control Module switched on, nobody logged in

locally OK (once every 10 seconds)
Quick flash
Control Module switched on, someone logged in

remotely or locally
The RMC can be started from the Start menu (or by clicking on the RMC icon, if
made available).
Select Cable
connection
Select
communication port
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
109 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Enter user name and

password
These are the default settings:

User Name
Password
Authority
USERNAM1
PASSWRD1
read/write
USERNAM2
PASSWRD2
read/write
USERNAM3
PASSWRD3
read only
USERNAM4
PASSWRD4
read only
The system does not differentiate between upper and lower case letters.
Note!
Do not use the number pad when entering numbers.
Note!
The controller keeps track of all illegal login attempts. If a user tries to login to
the system without using the correct username or password, the user login will be
blocked when a counter reaches a configurable threshold (default is 8). Every
hour, the counter will be decreased by one, allowing for one more login attempt.
4.3.1
Choose Work View
Choose Console
mode, Terminal
mode or Firmware
mode
Console mode
The console mode displays a large number of repeater parameters and contains
a number of console pages. It adjusts its user interface to adapt to the features of
the connected repeater.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
110 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Terminal mode
The terminal mode is used for communication with the repeater using its native
command line interface. This interface follows the VT100 standard. For some
special actions and error tracing, this mode gives an enhanced availability of the
repeater.
Firmware mode
The firmware mode is used for monitoring the currently installed software and
for uploading new software to the repeater.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
111 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
4.4
Configure the Repeater
The following pages will guide you through the configuration of Channel Selective repeaters as well as
Frequency Translating and Band Sifting repeaters utilizing the Repeater Maintenance Console (RMC)
software.
Configuration of a repeater is made partially on site and partially remotely through the AEM. At site the RF
parameters are set and verified, the repeater is given a name (a tag) and the remote communication is set and
verified. All other configuration can, and should be made from the AEM.
4.4.1
Set up RF Configuration
4.4.1.1
Ensure online
communication with
the repeater
Select RF/Status
This shows a 2-channel repeater.
Chain 1
Channel number
Uplink
Attenuation
Power level
Downlink
Attenuation
Power level
Saturation level
Set all power levels

to OFF
Set Power Level in uplink and downlink to OFF in all chains
In the Power Level menu the output power can be limited to a specific value or the
output power can be switched off completely by choosing OFF.
Set all attenuation
Avitec AB
Set Attenuation to the maximum value in all chains, uplink and downlink.
A1009300 Rev G
112 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
levels to a maximum
Choose the maximum attenuation value from the drop down menu, in this case 30dB.
Set channel numbers
Set the channel numbers for all chains that are to be used in the installation.
In this example the channel in Chain 1 is set to 23 and the channel in Chain 2 is set to
45.
Monitor the input

power
Click on the RF Levels icon to monitor the RF levels.
RF levels icon
- 53
Input power level in downlink chain 1

is -53 dBm
dBm
Input power in the downlink of Chain 1 is dependant on the signal from the serving
Base Station, in this example -53 dBm.
Configure the
downlink in the
channel that contains
the BCCH
Note! Start with the chain that contains the BCCH. This chain has a stabile power
level. In this example Chain 1contains the BCCH.
Set Power Level in Chain 1 downlink to the desired value, in this example
+37 dBm. This value can be based on a link budget, or be the maximum output the
repeater can generate.
View the power meter in the top right corner of the screen. In this example the output
power is +22 dBm.
- 53 dBm + 22 dBm
Adjust attenuation in
the downlink
Avitec AB
Output power level

in downlink chain
is +22 dBm
Lower the attenuation level step by step until the desired output power level is
reached. In this example +37 dBm. Zero attenuation is the same as maximum gain.
A1009300 Rev G
113 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
- 53 dBm
+ 37 dBm
The current output power

level is displayed in this
box
Note! The accuracy of
this measure is 2dBm
The attenuation is
adjusted in this box
The desired power level is
set in this box
Saturation level
indicator
Also use the saturation level indicator. The saturation level is indicated with plain text
as well as with LEDs. The saturation level can be: Low (green), Ok (green), High
(yellow) or Critical (red).
The optimal level is OK, on the verge of High. To reach this value lower the
attenuation step by step until the saturation reaches High. Then raise the attenuation
one step. The saturation should now be back on OK.
Note! Since the repeater has an ALC function (Automatic Level Control), the repeater
will not transmit more power even if the attenuation is lowered even more.
Configure the
downlink in the other
chains
Apply the same Power Level and Attenuation in the other chains.
If the BCCH is in Chain 1 this chain will show a stable power level whereas downlink
and uplink power levels in the other chains depend on the amount of traffic. This will
make these chains appear unstable.
Note! All channels that are not to be used should always be switched off (set Power
Level to OFF.)
Configure the uplink

in all chains
Set the Power Level for the uplink in all chains to the same value as for the downlink
(in this example +37dBm) or to any other level decided in the link budget.
Set the Attenuation 2dB higher than in the downlink. In this example 16dB (14dB +
2dB)
Since the BTS is more sensitive than a mobile unit there may be less signal gain from
the mobile unit in to the BTS (UL) than in the opposite direction. The uplink
attenuation can be adjusted more accurately later on, once the drive test signal
measurements have been completed.
Make an antenna
isolation test
Avitec AB
See 4.1.3 Antenna Isolation
A1009300 Rev G
114 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters

4.4.1.2
Frequency Translating and Band Shifting Repeaters
Start with the donor

unit
Ensure online
communication with
the repeater
The Single Donor (SD) and Double Donor (DD) units are configured in the same
way.
Select RF/Status window

This shows a 2-channel repeater.
Chain 1
Channel number
Link channel
Uplink
Attenuation
Power Level
Downlink
Attenuation
Power Level
Saturation Status

to OFF
Set Power Level in uplink and downlink to OFF in all chains
In the Power Level menu the output power can be limited to a specific value or the
output power can be switched off completely by choosing OFF.
Set all attenuation

levels to a maximum
Set Attenuation to the maximum value in all chains uplink and downlink. Choose
the maximum attenuation value from the drop down menu, in this case 30dB.
Set channel numbers
Set the channel numbers for all chains that are to be used in the installation.
In this example the channel in Chain 1 is set to 23 and the channel in Chain 2 is set
to 45.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
115 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Set Link channel

numbers
Set the Link channels to the desired values. In this example channel 12 in Chain 1
and channel 39 in Chain 2.
View the input

power

RF levels icon
+ 13 dBm
Input power level

in downlink chain 1
is +13 dBm
The input power in the downlink of Chain 1 is in this example approximately

+13dBm. This value reflects the output power from the repeater subtracted by 30dB
(the coupler).
Configure the
downlink in the
channel that
contains the BCCH
Note! Start with the chain that contains the BCCH. This chain has a stabile power
level. In this example Chain 1contains the BCCH.
Set Power Level in Chain 1 downlink (the link) to the desired value, in this
example +37 dBm.
This value can be based on a link budget and depends for instance on the distance to
the remote unit.
View the power meter in the top right corner of the screen. In this example the
output power is +22 dBm.
+ 13 dBm + 22 dBm
the downlink
Avitec AB
Output power level

in downlink chain 1
is +22 dBm
Lower the attenuation level step by step until the desired output power is reached. In
this example +37 dBm. Zero attenuation is the same as maximum gain
A1009300 Rev G
116 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
+ 13 dBm
+ 37 dBm
The current output power

level is displayed in this
box
Note! The accuracy of
this measure is 2dBm
The attenuation is
adjusted in this box
The desired power level is
set in this box
Saturation level
indicator
Also use the saturation level indicator. The saturation level is indicated with plain
text as well as with LEDs. The saturation level can be: Low (green), Ok (green),
High (yellow) or Critical (red).
The optimal level is Ok, on the verge of High. To reach this value lower the
attenuation step by step until the saturation reaches High. Then raise the attenuation
one step. The saturation should now be back on Ok.
Note! Since the repeater has an ALC function (Automatic Level Control), the
repeater will not transmit more power even if you continue to lower the attenuation.
Configure the
downlink in the
other chains
Apply the same Power Level and Attenuation in the other chains.
If the BCCH is in Chain 1 this chain will show a stable power level whereas
downlink and uplink power levels in the other chains depend on the amount of
traffic. This will make these chains appear unstable.
Note! All channels that are not to be used should always be switched off. (Set Power
Level to OFF.)

in all chains
Set the Power Level for the uplink to -10, -13 or -15 dBm depending on the site
design, for instance the number of sectors in the BTS and the level of noise allowed.
Set the Attenuation 2dB higher than in the downlink. In this example the attenuation
in the uplink is set to 16dB (14dB + 2dB= 16dB)
Since the BTS is more sensitive than a mobile unit there may be less signal gain
from the mobile unit in to the BTS (UL) than in the opposite direction. The uplink
attenuation can be adjusted more accurately later on once the drive test signal
measurements have been completed.
Continue with the

remote unit
Avitec AB
The configuration of the Remote Unit is almost identical to the configuration of the
Donor Unit apart from the gain and output power settings.
A1009300 Rev G
117 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters

to OFF
See instruction for donor unit above
Set all Attenuation

levels to a maximum
See instruction for donor unit above
Set channel numbers
Set the same channel numbers as for the donor unit.
Set link channel

numbers
Set the same link channel numbers as for the donor unit.
View the input

power in the
downlink

RF levels icon
- 65 dBm
Input power level

in downlink chain 1
is -65 dBm
The input power in the downlink is in this example approximately

-65dBm.
Note! The input signal level will vary between different repeater installations
depending on the distance between the Donor Unit and the Remote Unit and other
parameters affecting the signals propagation.
Configure the
downlink in the
channel that
contains the BCCH
Set Power Level downlink to the desired value, in this example

+43 dBm. This value can be based on a link budget, or be the maximum output the
repeater can generate.
43
the downlink
Lower the attenuation level step by step until the desired output power is reached. In
this example +43 dBm. See instruction for donor unit above
Configure the
downlink in all other
chains
Apply the same Power Level and Attenuation in all chains.

The presence of the BCCH will ensure stable power levels in this chain whereas
downlink and uplink power levels in other chains will depend on the amount of
traffic. This will make these chains appear unstable.
Note! All channels that are not to be used should always be switched off. (Set Power
Level to off.)

in all chains
Set the Power Level in the uplink in all chains to +37 dBm (the same as for
downlink in the donor unit).
Set the Attenuation 2dB higher than in the downlink.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
118 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
4.4.2
Set Repeater Name (TAG)
The repeater can be given a name that can be used to identify the repeater, for instance the site name. The
name can have up to 20 characters, no space is allowed.
Select
Configuration and
Product.
Insert the name in

this box
4.4.3
Set Up Remote Access
Insert the SIM card
Note! Make sure the SIM card has a Data Call/SMS number and is activated.
The modem is placed next to the LMT port close to the power supply
Pen
SIM card holder
The SIM card holder is on top of the modem

Insert the SIM card by pressing the lever on the left side of the card holder on the
modem (with a pen or another narrow item) so that the card holder pops up. Insert
the SIM card and press the card holder back into place.
4.4.3.1
Data Call Configuration
Note! If the repeater should be controlled by the AEM this Data Call configuration needs to be made.
Select
Configuration and
Communication
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
119 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Pin Code
Select Data Call
Initialization string
Connect times
1.
Choose Data Call
2.
Set pin code, if the SIM card has PIN code request enabled
3.
Set the modem initialization string. This string differs between networks.
Primary recommendation is AT+CBST=7,0,1. If remote communication
cannot be established try 7,0,3 or 0,0,3 or 0,0,1. For more information please
refer to section 3.7.5 Troubleshooting Remote Communication.
4.
Leave Network Connect Time and Modem Connect Time at default values.
5.
Tick Enable Automatic Modem Power Cycling for the modem to be power
cycled once every 24 hours. Set the time at which the modem should be tested.
This function ensures that the repeater always is logged in to the network.
Data call address

Note! Not to be set at
local installation
Note! Do not set addresses for the Data Call. The AEM will call the repeater after
the installation is ready and initiate this communication.
Power Cycle Modem
Avitec AB
Select Actions and initiate a Power Cycle Modem Logout from the drop-down
menu.
A1009300 Rev G
120 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Log out
Select terminal mode.
Type <LOGOUT>
Note! Do not choose Disconnect.
Wait
Wait until verification is ready
Log in remotely
Log in via the modem.
Select Modem
connection
Select
communication port
Save the repeaters

phone number in the
RMC phone book
Test
Avitec AB
Test that the remote access is functioning correctly
A1009300 Rev G
121 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
4.4.3.2
SMS Configuration
Note! AEM can not be used if the repeater is configured for SMS communication.
Select
Configuration and
Communication
Pin Code
Select SMS
Initialization string
Connect times
1.
Choose SMS
2.
Set pin code, if the SIM card has PIN code request enabled
3.
Set modem initialization string to be used at data call connections (if available
in the network). This string differs between networks. Primary
recommendation is AT+CBST=7,0,1. If remote communication cannot be
established try 7,0,3 or 0,0,3 or 0,0,1.
4.
Leave Network Connect Time and Modem Connect Time at default values.
5.
Tick Enable Automatic Modem Power Cycling for the modem to be power
cycled once every 24 hours. Set the time at which the modem should be tested.
This function ensures that the repeater always is logged in to the network.
Set SMS addresses
Set SMS service centre address (the SMSC number to be used).

Set Address 1. This is the address to which all SMS alarms and reports will be sent.
Note! Always set this address.
Set Address 2, 3 and 4 if needed.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
122 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Power Cycle Modem
Select Actions and initiate a Power Cycle Modem Logout from the drop-down
menu.
Log out
Select terminal mode.
Type <LOGOUT>
Note! Do not choose Disconnect.
Wait
Wait until verification is ready
Log in remotely
Log in via the modem
Select Modem
connection
Select
communication port
Save the repeaters

phone number in the
RMC phone book
Test
Avitec AB
Test that the remote access is functioning correctly
A1009300 Rev G
123 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
4.4.4
Alarm Configuration
Select
Configuration and
Alarms
Alarm
Relay connection
enabled
Alarm enabled
Acknowledgement is
required
Trigger levels
Delay time
External Alarms
configuration
The alarm configuration is set up automatically and should be left unmodified,

except for Power level downlink.
Note! Power level downlink (BCCH) should be adjusted to fit the installation in
regards to the output power set. In this example a 3 second drop below 35dBm will
cause an alarm.
Configure external
alarms
Four external alarms can be connected to the repeater. See also section 4.2.8
Connect External Alarms.
Set active high or active low for each of these four alarms.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
124 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Give individual
names to the external
alarms
Edit names
4.4.5
Relay Output
The repeater can be ordered with a relay option. The relay, located on the External Alarm and Interface
Module, can be used to indicate the summary status of the repeater. Each alarm source, external as well as
internal, can be configured to affect the relay or not. See Alarm Configuration below.
If the repeater is part of an antenna distribution system in for example a tunnel, all tunnel equipment can be
monitored from one central location using current loops. This means that the tunnel service engineers can
independently from the Avitec Element Manager staff be informed about the repeater status.
Note! The relay status is not affected by the login / logout alarm parameters.
The default setting is that the relay is open when there is no alarm and closed as an alarm occurs.
For installation testing purposes, it is possible to test the open / close function of the relay. This test procedure
makes sure the relay is closed for 2.5 seconds, then opens for 10 seconds, and finally closes for 2.5 seconds
before going back to original state.
Click on Relay Test
4.4.6
Heartbeat Configuration
This configuration needs to be made if communication via SMS is to be used, otherwise this configuration is
made when the repeater is integrated into the AEM.
Select
Configuration and
Reports
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
125 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Repetition cycle
Retransmissions
Repetition cycle
4.4.7
AEM Report Configuration
This configuration should be left unchanged. If changes to the default settings are to be made these are done
when the repeater is integrated into the AEM.
Select
Configuration and
Reports
Heartbeat
Alarms
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
126 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
4.5
Installation Checklists
4.5.1
Channel Selective Repeater Installation

Check box when done
Repeater Installation
1.1
Ensure isolation between server and donor antenna is adequate
1.2
Measured isolation ____
1.3
Proper grounding made and EMV protection installed
1.4
Cable from donor antenna connected to donor antenna port
1.5
Cable to server antenna connected to server antenna port
1.6
Input power cable connected to the repeater unit
1.7
Cable protection cover bolted to repeater unit, any outdoor

connections waterproofed
Repeater Unit Setup
2.1
Repeater switched on
2.2
Power Supply led and Control Module led shows no error
2.3
Channels set to: 1 ___ 2 ___ 3___ 4___
2.4
BCCH in chain __
2.5
Power level channel with BCCH downlink set to _____
2.6
Attenuation channel with BCCH downlink set to ___ (saturation level checked)
2.7
Power level channel with BCCH uplink set to same as downlink
2.8
Attenuation channel with BCCH uplink set to same as downlink
2.9
Power level and attenuation in other channels set to same levels
2.10
2.11
Output power downlink channel with BCCH ____ (reading from RMC)
2.12
Repeater TAG set to ___________
2.13
Repeater secured and locked
Installation date:_______________ Installer signature:_____________________

Site name: ________________Site number: ______________ GPS coordinates:________
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
127 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
4.5.2
Preparation Sheet, Frequency Translating Repeater
General
Channels to be repeated ___, ___, ___ and ____ => to donor checklist
Link channel (s) to be used ___, ___, ___ and ____ => to donor checklist
Donor Unit
BTS output power
__dBm
Feeder loss between BTS and coupler
___dB
Coupling loss in coupler
___dB
Feeder loss between coupler and donor unit
___dB
__________________________________________________________________
Downlink input power to donor unit (Pin)
Desired link power (Plink): (+37/+34/+31dBm)
__dBm
___dBm*
=> to donor checklist (Power level downlink)

Required donor downlink gain (G) = Plink Pin
___dB
Donor downlink attenuation = 42 G (SD) / 45 - G (DD)
___dB
Attenuation setting to be used (closest larger even number)
___ dB
=> to donor checklist (Attenuation downlink)

Desired uplink ALC level -10/-13/-16 (SD) / -7/-10/-13 (DD)
___dBm
=> to donor checklist (Power level uplink)
Link path
Donor link antenna feeder loss
___dB
Donor link antenna gain
___dBi
Link path loss
___dB
Remote link antenna gain
___dBi
Remote link antenna feeder loss
___dB
_________________________________________________________________
Total link loss (L)
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
___dB
128 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Remote Unit
Downlink input power from link antenna (Pin) = Plink-L
___dBm
Desired remote server power (Pout): 40/37/34 (IR) / 43/40/37 (ER)
___dBm
=> to remote checklist (Power level downlink)

Required remote downlink gain (G) = Pout Pin
___dB
Remote unit downlink attenuation = 105G (IR) / 108-G (ER)
___dB
Attenuation setting to be used (closest larger even number)
___dB
=> to remote checklist (Attenuation downlink)

Desired link power (+37/+34/+31)
___dBm*
=> to remote checklist (Power level uplink)
*Note! Link power should be the same for remote and donor
Date:__________________ Calculated by:_____________________

Site Name: __________________________ Site Number: _____________________
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
129 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
4.5.3
Frequency Translating Repeater, Donor Unit

Check box when done
1.
Coupler Installation
1.1
-30dB Coupler installed on BTS main antenna feeder
1.2
Type N connector closer to antenna terminated with 50 ohm plug
1.3
Type N connector closer to BTS connected to donor cable
1.4
BTS operating normally with coupler installed verified
1.5
Coupler weatherproofed
2.
Donor Unit Installation
2.1
2.2
Cable from coupler connected to donor port
2.3
Cable to link antenna connected to link antenna port
2.4
2.5
Cable protection cover bolted to donor unit, any outdoor

3.
Donor Unit Setup
3.1
Donor unit switched on
3.2
3.3
Channels set to: 1 ___ 2 ___ 3 ___ 4___
3.4
Link channels set to: 1 ___ 2 ___ 3 ___ 4___
3.5
BCCH in channel ____
3.6
Power level link channel with BCCH downlink set to _____
3.6
Attenuation link channel with BCCH downlink set to ___ (according to budget)
3.7
Power level channel with BCCH uplink set to ___ (according to budget)
3.8
Attenuation channel with BCCH uplink set to same as link channel downlink
3.9
Power levels and attenuation in other channels and links set to same levels
3.10
3.11
Output power downlink channel with BCCH ____ (reading from RMC)
3.12
Repeater TAG set to _______________
3.13

Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
130 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
4.5.4
Frequency Translating Repeater, Remote Unit

Check box when done
1.
Remote Unit Installation
1.1
Ensure adequate isolation between link and serving antenna (>75dB)
1.2
1.3
Cable from link antenna connected to link antenna port
1.4
Cable to server antenna connected to server antenna port
1.5
1.6
Cable protection cover bolted to donor unit, any outdoor

2.
Remote Unit Setup
2.1
Remote unit switched on
2.2
2.3
Channels set to same as donor
2.4
Link channels set to same as donor
2.5
Power level channel with BCCH downlink set to ___ (according to budget)
2.6
Attenuation channel with BCCH downlink set to ___ (according to budget)
2.7
Power level link channel uplink set to same as power level as link channel with BCCH
downlink in donor unit
2.8
Attenuation link channel uplink set to same as attenuation as channel with BCCH
downlink
2.9
Power levels and attenuation in other channels and links set to same levels
2.10
2.11
Output power downlink channel (with BCCH) ____ (reading from RMC)
2.12
Repeater TAG set to ___
2.13

Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
131 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Maintenance
5.1
General
The system normally operates without any operator intervention or maintenance. In the unlikely event of a
unit failure, the field replaceable components (antenna unit, cables, etc.) should be checked and replaced if
faulty and the system restored. A failed unit can be removed and replaced with a spare while the rest of the
system (other repeaters) is operating. However, the power supply of the failed repeater should be isolated
from AC mains and DC power before any module is replaced.
Should the system malfunction, the condition of the antenna systems as well as the continuity of the cabling
should be checked before replacing any of the repeater modules.
If the repeater is to be sent back to Avitec the original packing or an equivalent packing needs to be used.
Caution!
If a shipment of a repeater back to Avitec is made within the period of
guarantee the original packing must be used.
Caution
Please be aware that the equipment may, during certain conditions become very warm and can cause minor
injuries if handled without any protection, such as gloves.
5.2
Preventive Maintenance
The Avitec repeaters do not require any preventative maintenance apart from changing the backup battery
once every three years.
Caution
Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type.
Dispose of used batteries according to local laws and instructions.
5.3
Product Disposal
Disposal of this product must be handled according to all national laws and regulations. For detailed
information regarding materials, please refer to Avitec AB.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
132 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Specifications
Note! All data is subject to change without prior notice.
6.1
CSR 922 (R)
Electrical Specifications
Frequency range Uplink, UL
880 915 MHz (E-GSM900)
Frequency range Downlink, DL
925 960 MHz (E-GSM900)
890 915 MHz (P-GSM900)
935 960 MHz (P-GSM900)
876 880 MHz (GSM-R)
921 925 MHz (GSM-R)
35 MHz (E-GSM)
25 MHz (P-GSM)
4 MHz (GSM-R)
Number of channels
12
Channel programming
200 kHz channel spacing
Selectivity
> 60 dB at 400 kHz

> 70 dB at 600 kHz
Ripple in pass band
< 2 dB
Noise figure
2.5 dB typical, < 3 dB at max gain
Maximum input level, non destructive
+ 10 dBm
Propagation delay
5.8 s typical
Output power per carrier (UL/DL)
+ 37 dBm GSM/ GMSK

Modulation Accuracy
GSM / GMSK
< 2.5 RMS and < 10 peak at +37 dBm
EDGE / 8-PSK
< 3.5 % EVM RMS at + 34 dBm
Intermodulation
< - 36 dBm (two carriers at + 37 dBm, 600 kHz spacing)
Spurious emissions
< - 36 dBm for 9 kHz 1 GHz

< - 30 dBm for 1 GHz 13 GHz
Gain
60 90 dB, adjustable, in 1 dB steps
System impedance
50 ohm
Antenna connectors
DIN 7/16
Electrical ratings
110/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz or -48 VDC
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
133 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Power Consumption
160 W typical (traffic dependent)
Mechanical Specifications
Dimensions
540 x 350 x 150 mm
Enclosure
Aluminum (IP 65)
Weight
22 kg
Environmental Specifications
EMC
See compliance below
Operating Temperature
- 25 to + 55 C
Storage
- 30 to + 70 C
Humidity
ETSI EN 300 019-2-4 (see compliance below)
MTBF
> 100 000 hrs
Complies with
R&TTE Directive including

ETS EN 301 502 (ETS EN 300 609-4/GSM 11.26)
ETS EN 301 498-8
EN 60 950
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
134 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
6.2
CSR 924 (R)
880 915 MHz (E-GSM900)
925 960 MHz (E-GSM900)
890 915 MHz (P-GSM900)
935 960 MHz (P-GSM900)
876 880 MHz (GSM-R)
921 925 MHz (GSM-R)
35 MHz (E-GSM)
25 MHz (P-GSM)
4 MHz (GSM-R)
Number of channels
14
Channel programming
Selectivity
> 60 dB at 400 kHz

> 65 dB at 600 kHz
Ripple in pass band
< 2 dB
Noise figure
3 dB typical, < 3.5 dB at max gain
+ 10 dBm
Propagation delay
5.8 s typical
+ 34 dBm GSM/ GMSK

Modulation Accuracy
GSM / GMSK
EDGE / 8-PSK
Intermodulation
Spurious emissions

Gain
60-90 dB, adjustable, in 1 dB steps
System impedance
50 ohm
Antenna connectors
DIN 7/16
Electrical ratings
110/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz or -48 VDC
Power Consumption
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
135 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters

Dimensions
540 x 350 x 220 mm
Enclosure
Aluminum (IP 65)
Weight
33 kg
EMC
- 25 to + 55 C
Storage
- 30 to + 70 C
Humidity
MTBF
> 100 000 hrs
Complies with
R&TTE Directive including

ETS EN 301 502 (ETS EN 300 609-4/GSM 11.26)
ETS EN 301 498-8
EN 60 950
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
136 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
6.3
CSR1822
1710 - 1785 MHz (DCS-1800)
1805 - 1880 MHz (DCS-1800)
75 MHz
Number of channels
1-2
Channel programming
200 kHz Channel spacing
Selectivity
> 60 dB at 400 kHz

> 70 dB at 600 kHz
Ripple in passband
< 2 dB
Noise figure
+ 10 dBm
Propagation delay
5.8 s typical
+ 37dBm GSM/ GMSK

Modulation Accuracy
GSM / GMSK
EDGE / 8-PSK
Intermodulation
Spurious emissions
< - 36 dBm for 9 kHz - 1 GHz

< - 30 dBm for 1 GHz - 13 GHz
Gain
60 - 90 dB, adjustable, in 1 dB steps
System impedance
50 ohm
Antenna connectors
DIN 7/16
Electrical ratings
110/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz or -48 VDC
Power Consumption
Dimensions
540 x 350 x 150 mm
Enclosure
Aluminum (IP 65)
Weight
22 kg
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
137 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
EMC
- 25 to + 55 C
Storage
- 30 to + 70 C
Humidity
MTBF
> 100 000 hrs
Complies with
R& TTE Directive including

ETS EN 301 502 (ETS EN 300 609-4 / GSM 11.26 )
ETS EN 301 498-8
EN 60 950
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
138 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
6.4
CSR1824
1710 - 1785 MHz (DCS-1800)
1805 - 1880 MHz (DCS-1800)
75 MHz
Number of channels
1-4
Channel programming
Selectivity
> 60 dB at 400 kHz

> 70 dB at 600 kHz
Ripple in passband
< 2 dB
Noise figure
+ 10 dBm
Propagation delay
5.8 s typical
Output power per carrier (UL/DL )
+ 34 dBm GSM/ GMSK

Modulation Accuracy
GSM / GMSK
EDGE / 8-PSK
Intermodulation
Spurious emissions

Gain
60-90 dB, adjustable, in 1 dB steps.
System impedance
50 ohm
Antenna connectors
DIN 7/16
Electrical ratings
110/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz or -48 VDC
Power Consumption
Dimensions
540 x 350 x 220 mm
Enclosure
Aluminum (IP 65)
Weight
33 kg
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
139 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
EMC
- 25 to + 55 C
Storage
- 30 to + 70 C
Humidity
MTBF
> 100 000 hrs
Complies with

ETS EN 301 502 (ETS EN 300 609-4 / GSM 11.26 )
ETS EN 301 498-8
EN 60 950
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
140 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
6.5
CSR1922
1850 - 1910 MHz (PCS-1900)
1930 - 1990 MHz (PCS-1900)
60 MHz
Number of channels
1-2
Channel programming
Selectivity
> 60 dB at 400 kHz

> 70 dB at 600 kHz
Ripple in passband
< 2 dB
Noise figure
+ 10 dBm
Propagation delay
5.8 s typical
+ 37dBm GSM/ GMSK

Modulation Accuracy
GSM / GMSK
EDGE / 8-PSK
Intermodulation
Spurious emissions

Gain
System impedance
50 ohm
Antenna connectors
DIN 7/16
Electrical ratings
110/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz or -48 VDC
Power Consumption
Dimensions
540 x 350 x 150 mm
Enclosure
Aluminum (IP 65)
Weight
22 kg
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
141 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
EMC
- 25 to + 55 C
Storage
- 30 to + 70 C
Humidity
MTBF
> 100 000 hrs
Complies with

ETS EN 301 502 (ETS EN 300 609-4 / GSM 11.26 )
ETS EN 301 498-8
EN 60 950
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
142 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
6.6
CSR1924
1850 - 1910 MHz (PCS-1900)
1930 - 1990 MHz (PCS-1900)
60 MHz
Number of channels
1-4
Channel programming
Selectivity
> 60 dB at 400 kHz

> 70 dB at 600 kHz
Ripple in passband
< 2 dB
Noise figure
3 dB typical, < 3, 5 dB at max gain
+ 10 dBm
Propagation delay
5.8 s typical
Output power per carrier (UL/DL )
+ 34 dBm GSM/ GMSK

Modulation Accuracy
GSM / GMSK
EDGE / 8-PSK
Intermodulation
Spurious emissions

Gain
60-90 dB, adjustable, in 1 dB steps
System impedance
50 ohm
Antenna connectors
DIN 7/16
Electrical ratings
110/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz or -48 VDC
Power Consumption
Dimensions
540 x 350 x 220 mm
Enclosure
Aluminum (IP 65)
Weight
33 kg
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
143 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
EMC
- 25 to + 55 C
Storage
- 30 to + 70 C
Humidity
MTBF
> 100 000 hrs
Complies with

ETS EN 301 502 (ETS EN 300 609-4 / GSM 11.26 )
ETS EN 301 498-8
EN 60 950
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
144 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
6.7
CSFT 922 (R) and CSFT 924 (R)
Electrical Specification
880 915 MHz (E-GSM900)
925 960 MHz (E-GSM900)
890 915 MHz (P-GSM900)
935 960 MHz (P-GSM900)
876 880 MHz (GSM-R)
921 925 MHz (GSM-R)
Number of channels
1 2 resp 1-4
Channel programming
Selectivity, donor unit (SD and DD)
> 60 dB at 400 kHz

> 65 dB at 600 kHz
Selectivity, remote unit (IR and ER)
> 60 dB at 400 kHz

> 70 dB at 600 kHz
Ripple in passband
< 2 dB
Noise figure CSFT 922

Donor unit (SD) and (DD)
UL
DL
N/A
Remote unit (IR) and (ER) UL/DL

UL
DL
N/A
Maximum input level, no damage

UL
+ 10 dBm
DL
+ 23 dBm
+ 10 dBm
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
145 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
5.8 s typical
Propagation delay
Output power per carrier CSFT 922

Donor unit (SD)
DL
+ 37 dBm GSM/ GMSK

UL
- 10 dBm GSM/ GMSK

- 13 dBm EDGE / 8-PSK average power
Donor unit (DD)

DL
+ 37 dBm GSM/ GMSK

UL
- 7 dBm GSM/ GMSK

Remote unit (IR)

DL
+ 40 dBm GSM/ GMSK

UL
+ 37 dBm GSM/ GMSK

Remote unit (ER)

DL
+ 43 dBm GSM/ GMSK

UL
+ 37 dBm GSM/ GMSK

Output power per carrier CSFT924

All values 3 dB less than above
Gain
CSFT922
CSFT924
Donor unit (SD)
max 42 dB, adjustable, in 1 dB steps
Donor unit (DD)
Remote unit (IR)
Remote unit (ER)
Gain Flatness (200 kHz BW)
1 dB
Gain Flatness (operational bandwidth)
1.5 dB, at constant temperature
Input to Link Channel Frequency Error
< 1 x 10-9
Modulation Accuracy CSFT 922

Donor unit (SD and DD)
DL
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
146 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
GSM / GMSK
EDGE / 8-PSK
< 3.5 % EVM RMS at +34 dBm average power
UL
GSM / GMSK
< 2.5 RMS and < 10 peak at -10 dBm
EDGE / 8-PSK
< 3.5 % EVM RMS at -13 dBm average power
Remote unit (IR)

DL
GSM / GMSK
EDGE / 8-PSK
< 4 % EVM RMS at +37 dBm average power
UL
GSM / GMSK
EDGE / 8-PSK
Remote unit (ER)

DL
GSM / GMSK
EDGE / 8-PSK
UL
GSM / GMSK
EDGE / 8-PSK

Same as above but measured at 3 dBm lower power levels.
Intermodulation CSFT922
< -36 dBm (two carriers at + 37 dBm DL, 600 kHz

spacing)
< -70 dBm (two carriers at -10 dBm UL, 600 kHz
spacing)
Remote unit (IR)

spacing)
< -36 dBm (two carriers at +37 dBm UL, 600 kHz
spacing)
Remote unit (ER)

spacing)
spacing)
Intermodulation CSFT 924

Same as above but at 3 dB lower output levels.
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
147 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Spurious emissions

System impedance
50 ohm
Antenna connectors
DIN 7/16
Electrical ratings
110/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz or -48 VDC
Power Consumption CSFT 922

110W typical
Remote unit (IR and ER)
200W typical

240W typical
240W typical
Dimensions CSFT 922
540 x 350 x 150 mm
Dimensions CSFT 924
540 x 350 x 220 mm
Enclosure
Aluminum (IP 65)
Weight CSFT 922
22 kg
Weight CSFT 924
33 kg
EMC
- 25 to + 55 C
Storage
- 30 to + 70 C
Humidity
MTBF
> 100 000 hrs
Complies with

ETS EN 301 502 (ETS EN 300 609-4 / GSM 11.26)
ETS EN 301 498-8
EN 60 950
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
148 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
6.8
CSFT 1822 and CSFT 1824
1710 - 1785 MHz (DCS 1800)
1805 - 1880 MHz (DCS 1800)
Number of channels
1 2 resp. 1-4
Channel programming
> 60 dB at 400 kHz

> 65 dB at 600 kHz
> 60 dB at 400 kHz

> 70 dB at 600 kHz
Ripple in passband
< 2 dB

UL
DL
N/A

UL
DL
N/A

UL
+ 10 dBm
DL
+ 23 dBm
+ 10 dBm
Propagation delay
5.8 s typical

Donor unit (SD)
DL
Avitec AB
+ 37 dBm GSM/ GMSK

A1009300 Rev G
149 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
UL
- 10 dBm GSM/ GMSK

Donor unit (DD)

DL
+ 37 dBm GSM/ GMSK

UL
- 7 dBm GSM/ GMSK

Remote unit (IR)

DL
+ 40 dBm GSM/ GMSK

UL
+ 37 dBm GSM/ GMSK

Remote unit (ER)

DL
+ 43 dBm GSM/ GMSK

UL
+ 37 dBm GSM/ GMSK

Output power per carrier CSFT1824

All values 3 dBm less than above
Gain
CSFT1822
CSFT1824
Donor unit (SD)
Donor unit (DD)
Remote unit (IR)
Remote unit (ER)
1 dB
< 1 x 10-9

DL
GSM / GMSK
EDGE / 8-PSK
UL
GSM / GMSK
EDGE / 8-PSK
Remote unit (IR)
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
150 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
DL
GSM / GMSK
EDGE / 8-PSK
UL
GSM / GMSK
EDGE / 8-PSK
Remote unit (ER)

DL
GSM / GMSK
EDGE / 8-PSK
UL
GSM / GMSK
EDGE / 8-PSK

Same as above but measured at 3 DB lower power levels.


spacing)
spacing)
Remote unit (IR)

spacing)
spacing)
Remote unit (ER)

spacing)
spacing)

Same as above but at 3 dB lower output power levels.
Spurious emissions

System impedance
50 ohm
Antenna connectors
DIN 7/16
Electrical ratings
110/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz or -48 VDC
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
151 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters

150W typical
240W typical

240W typical
270W typical
Dimensions CSFT1822
540 x 350 x 150 mm (per unit)
Dimensions CSFT1824
540 x 350 x 220 mm (per unit)
Enclosure
Aluminum (IP 65)
Weight CSFT1822
22 kg
Weight CSFT1824
33 kg
EMC
- 25 to + 55 C
Storage
- 30 to + 70 C
Humidity
MTBF
> 100 000 hrs
Complies with

ETS EN 301 502 (ETS EN 300 609-4 / GSM 11.26)
ETS EN 301 498-8
EN 60 950
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
152 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
6.9
CSFT 1922 and CSFT 1924
1850 - 1920 MHz (PS 1900)
1930 - 1990 MHz (PS 1900)
60 MHz
Number of channels
1 2 resp 1-4
Channel programming
> 60 dB at 400 kHz

> 65 dB at 600 kHz
> 60 dB at 400 kHz

> 70 dB at 600 kHz
Ripple in passband
< 2 dB

UL
DL
N/A
Noise figure CSFT1924

UL
DL
N/A

UL
+ 10 dBm
DL
+ 23 dBm
+ 10 dBm
Propagation delay
5.8 s typical

Donor unit (SD)
DL
Avitec AB
+ 37 dBm GSM/ GMSK

A1009300 Rev G
153 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
UL
- 10 dBm GSM/ GMSK

Donor unit (DD)

DL
+ 37 dBm GSM/ GMSK

UL
- 7 dBm GSM/ GMSK

Remote unit (IR)

DL
+ 40 dBm GSM/ GMSK

UL
+ 37 dBm GSM/ GMSK

Remote unit (ER)

DL
+ 43 dBm GSM/ GMSK

UL
+ 37 dBm GSM/ GMSK


All values 3 dB less than above.
Gain
CSFT1922
CSFT1924
Donor unit (SD)
Donor unit (DD)
Remote unit (IR)
Remote unit (ER)
1 dB
Link to output Channel Frequency Error
< 1 x 10-9

DL
GSM / GMSK
EDGE / 8-PSK
UL
GSM / GMSK
EDGE / 8-PSK
Remote unit (IR)
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
154 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
DL
GSM / GMSK
EDGE / 8-PSK
UL
GSM / GMSK
EDGE / 8-PSK
Remote unit (ER)

DL
GSM / GMSK
EDGE / 8-PSK
UL
GSM / GMSK
EDGE / 8-PSK

Same as above but measured at 3 dB lower power levels.
Intermodulation CSFT1922

spacing)
spacing)
Remote unit (IR)

spacing)
spacing)
Remote unit (ER)

spacing)
spacing)

Same as above but at 3 dB lower power levels.
Spurious emissions

System impedance
50 ohm
Antenna connectors
DIN 7/16
Electrical ratings
110/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz or -48 VDC

Avitec AB
150W typical
A1009300 Rev G
155 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
240W typical

240W typical
270W typical
Dimensions CSFT1922
540 x 350 x 150 mm
Dimensions CSFT1924
540 x 350 x 220 mm
Enclosure
Aluminum (IP 65)
Weight CSFT 1922
22 kg
Weight CSFT 1924
33 kg
EMC
- 25 to + 55 C
Storage
- 30 to + 70 C
Humidity
MTBF
> 100 000 hrs
Complies with

ETS EN 301 502 (ETS EN 300 609-4 / GSM 11.26)
ETS EN 301 498-8
EN 60 950
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
156 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
6.10 CSFT 91822 and CSFT 91824

Electrical Specification
880 915 MHz (E-GSM900)
925 960 MHz (E-GSM900)
890 915 MHz (P-GSM900)
935 960 MHz (P-GSM900)
1710 - 1785 MHz (DCS-1800)
1805 - 1880 MHz (DCS-1800)
35 MHz (E-GSM)
25 MHz (P-GSM)
Number of channels
1 2 resp. 1 4
Channel programming
> 60 dB at 400 kHz

> 65 dB at 600 kHz
> 60 dB at 400 kHz

> 70 dB at 600 kHz
Ripple in passband
< 2 dB

UL
DL
N/A

UL
DL
N/A

UL
+ 10 dBm
DL
+ 23 dBm
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
157 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
+ 10 dBm
Propagation delay
5.8 s typical

Donor unit (SD)
DL
+ 37 dBm GSM/ GMSK

UL
- 10 dBm GSM/ GMSK

Donor unit (DD)

DL
+ 37 dBm GSM/ GMSK

UL
- 7 dBm GSM/ GMSK

Remote unit (IR)

DL
+ 40 dBm GSM/ GMSK

UL
+ 37 dBm GSM/ GMSK

Remote unit (ER)

DL
+ 43 dBm GSM/ GMSK

UL
+ 37 dBm GSM/ GMSK


All values 3dBm less that above
Gain
Gain
CSFT91822
CSFT91824
Donor unit (SD)
Donor unit (DD)
Remote unit (IR)
Remote unit (ER)
1 dB
< 1 x 10-9
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
158 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters

DL
GSM / GMSK
EDGE / 8-PSK
UL
GSM / GMSK
EDGE / 8-PSK
Remote unit (IR)

DL
GSM / GMSK
EDGE / 8-PSK
UL
GSM / GMSK
EDGE / 8-PSK
Remote unit (ER)

DL
GSM / GMSK
EDGE / 8-PSK
UL
GSM / GMSK
EDGE / 8-PSK

Same as above but measured at 3dB lower power levels


spacing)
spacing)
Remote unit (IR)

spacing)
spacing)
Remote unit (ER)

spacing)
spacing)

Same as above but at 3dB lower output power levels
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
159 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Spurious emissions

System impedance
50 ohm
Antenna connectors
DIN 7/16
Electrical ratings
110/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz or -48 VDC

150 W typical
220 W typical

240 W typical
240 W typical
Dimensions CSFT 91822
540 x 350 x 150 mm (per unit)
540 x 350 x 220 mm (per unit)
Enclosure
Aluminum (IP 65)
Weight CSFT91822
22 kg
Weight CSFT91824
33 kg
EMC
- 25 to + 55 C
Storage
- 30 to + 70 C
Humidity
MTBF
> 100 000 hrs
Complies with

ETS EN 301 502 (ETS EN 300 609-4 / GSM 11.26)
ETS EN 301 498-8
EN 60 950
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
160 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
6.11 CSFT 18922 and CSFT 18924

1710 - 1785 MHz (DCS 1800)
1805 - 1880 MHz (DCS 1800)
Link Frequency Range Uplink, UL
880 915 MHz (E-GSM 900)
Link Frequency Range Downlink, DL
925 960 MHz (E-GSM 900)
75 MHz
Number of channels
1 2 resp 1-4
Channel programming
> 60 dB at 400 kHz

> 65 dB at 600 kHz
> 60 dB at 400 kHz

> 70 dB at 600 kHz
Ripple in passband
< 2 dB

UL
DL
N/A

UL
DL
N/A

UL
+ 10 dBm
DL
+ 23 dBm
+ 10 dBm
Propagation delay
5.8 s typical
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
161 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters

Donor unit (SD)
DL
+ 37 dBm GSM/ GMSK

UL
- 10 dBm GSM/ GMSK

Donor unit (DD)

DL
+ 37 dBm GSM/ GMSK

UL
- 7 dBm GSM/ GMSK

Remote unit (IR)

DL
+ 40 dBm GSM/ GMSK

UL
+ 37 dBm GSM/ GMSK

Remote unit (ER)

DL
+ 43 dBm GSM/ GMSK

UL
+ 37 dBm GSM/ GMSK


All values 3dBm less that above
Gain
Gain
CSFT18922
CSFT18924
Donor unit (SD)
Donor unit (DD)
Remote unit (IR)
Remote unit (ER)
1 dB
< 1 x 10-9
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
162 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Modulation Accuracy
DL
GSM / GMSK
EDGE / 8-PSK
UL
GSM / GMSK
EDGE / 8-PSK
Remote unit (IR)

DL
GSM / GMSK
EDGE / 8-PSK
UL
GSM / GMSK
EDGE / 8-PSK
Remote unit (ER)

DL
GSM / GMSK
EDGE / 8-PSK
UL
GSM / GMSK
EDGE / 8-PSK

Same as above but measured at 3dB lower power levels
Intermodulation

spacing)
spacing)
Remote unit (IR)

spacing)
spacing)
Remote unit (ER)

spacing)
spacing)

Same as above but at 3dB lower output power levels
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
163 (164)
GSM-EDGE Repeaters
Spurious emissions

System impedance
50 ohm
Antenna connectors
DIN 7/16
Electrical ratings
110/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz or -48 VDC

110 W typical
220 W typical

200 W typical
270 W typical
540 x 350 x 150 mm (per unit)
540 x 350 x 220 mm (per unit)
Enclosure
Aluminum (IP 65)
Weight CSFT 18922
22 kg
Weight CSFT 18924
33 kg
EMC
- 25 to + 55 C
Storage
- 30 to + 70 C
Humidity
MTBF
> 100 000 hrs
Complies with

ETS EN 301 502 (ETS EN 300 609-4 / GSM 11.26)
ETS EN 301 498-8
EN 60 950
Avitec AB
A1009300 Rev G
164 (164)
RMC MANUAL
Repeater Maintenance Console

Short Guide
Valid from RMC version 2.17
Copyright 2005 AVITEC AB

No part of this document may be copied, distributed, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system,
or translated into any human or computer language without the prior written permission of Avitec AB.
The manufacturer has made every effort to ensure that the instructions contained in this document are
not be covered by this document. The manufacturer's liability for any errors in the document is limited to
customer assumes full responsibility when using them. The manufacturer welcomes customer comments as
part of the process of continual development and improvement of the documentation in the best way
representative.
Avitec AB
SW 022 93 00 rev C
1 (6)
RMC MANUAL
Installation
1.1
Requirements
CPU
Pentium, 200 MHz (Pentium III, 500 MHz recommended)
RAM
64 MB (128 MB recommended)
Hard Drive
10 MB free disk space
CD-ROM
Required for installation
Video resolution
800 x 600 with at least 15 bit color depth (approx. 32000 colors)
24 bit color depth (16.7 million colors) recommended
It is possible to run the program in 256 or 16 color modes, but colors will appear
distorted
Operating system
1.2
Windows 98SE/NT/2000/XP
Installation Procedure
1.
Ensure the computer and operation system complies with the requirements above.
2.
Insert the CD-ROM into your CD-ROM reader. This will in most cases auto-start the setup program. If
not select your CD-ROM drive and double-click the file Setup.exe.
3.
Follow the setup program guide through the installation process. Specify where the program should be
installed.
4.
When the installation is finished, start the RMC from the Start menu (no reboot is needed)
1.3
Connection Setup
The RMC opens in

Console mode
Avitec AB
SW 022 93 00 rev C
2 (6)
RMC MANUAL
Cable Connection Set up

Select Cable and
Next
Select the serial port to
be used.
Select Connect
1.3.1
Modem Connection Set up
Select Modem and

Next
Select the modem to use.
Select Next
The RMC automatically receives a list of available modems from the

Windows operation system.
Note!
It is important that the modem is installed in Windows according to the

manual provided by the modem manufacturer.
Enter the phone number.

Type the number or
choose one from the
phone book.
Select Connect and

wait for the connection
to be established
Avitec AB
SW 022 93 00 rev C
3 (6)
RMC MANUAL
1.3.2
Login
Enter username and

password (in terminal
mode the login prompt is
text based).
Select Next
1.4
How to Change a Parameter
There is a two step procedure to change a parameter in RMC.

Change the value
A value can be changed by typing it or by choosing a value from a

drop down menu
In this case there is a drop down menu. Click on ! to the right of

the box and chose a value.
Apply or cancel the
change
As soon as a change is made or a value is inserted this symbol

appears
The change is applied by clicking the green accept button

The change is canceled by clicking the red cross (or by pressing Esc)
1.5
How to Use the Phone Book
Modem phone numbers to can be stored in the RMC phone book. Each computer user is allocated an
individual RMC phonebook which is stored in the windows registry.
Select Modem during login.
Initial screen
Avitec AB
SW 022 93 00 rev C
4 (6)
RMC MANUAL
1.5.1
Add a Phone Number
Type the number in the phone

number edit box
Click Add
This brings up a dialog box
Enter a description of the
phonebook entry
Click Ok
1.5.2
Edit a Phone Number
Select a number in the list

Select Edit
This brings up a dialog box
Make the changes
Select Ok
1.5.3
Delete a Phone Number
Select a phone number in the list

Select Delete
Confirm
Avitec AB
SW 022 93 00 rev C
5 (6)
RMC MANUAL
1.5.4
Import/Export Phonebook Data
Select Phonebook Options

Choose between the options:
!
Save phonebook
Restore the phonebook
Synchronize phonebook
The file extension is RPF. Files

can be used in RMC versions 2.00
and later.
Phonebook data from RMC
version 1.xx (INI-files) can also
be imported.
Avitec AB
SW 022 93 00 rev C
6 (6)
COMMAND AND ATTRIBUTE SUMMARY
Command and Attribute Summary for

Avitec AB
EDGE/GSM repeaters
Document Revision 1.0
Software Version: 1.04
Release date: 2005-02-02
Avitec AB
February 2005
1 (102)
Contact Information
Phone:
+46 8 475 47 00
Fax:
Email:
+46 8 475 47 99
software.support@avitec.se
Web:
http://www.avitec.se
Address: Avitec AB
Box 20116
S-161 02 BROMMA
SWEDEN
COPYRIGHT AVITEC AB 2005

No part of this document may be copied, distributed, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval
system, or translated into any human or computer language without the prior written permission of Avitec
AB.
The manufacturer has made every effort to ensure that the instructions contained in the documents are
not be covered by the documents. The manufacturer's liability for any errors in the documents is limited to
customer assumes full responsibility when using them. The manufacturer welcomes customer comments
as part of the process of continual development and improvement of the documentation in the best way
representative.
Avitec AB
February 2005
2 (102)
Contents
1
Introduction...................................................................................................................... 8
Repeater Naming Conventions ........................................................................................ 8
GET and SET-Attributes ................................................................................................. 9

3.1
ADD - SMS Address Access List .................................................................................... 9
3.2
ADC - Active Devices Count........................................................................................... 9
3.3
AIC - Antenna Isolation Measurement Channels............................................................. 9
3.4
AIE - Antenna Isolation Measurement Enabled............................................................. 10
3.5
AIM - Antenna Isolation Measurement Status............................................................... 10
3.6
AIP - Antenna Isolation Measurement Progress ............................................................ 11
3.7
AIT - Antenna Isolation Measurement Timepoint ......................................................... 11
3.8
AL1 - Compressed Alarm Format.................................................................................. 12
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
3.15
ALA - Alarm Configuration Settings............................................................................. 13
3.16
ALL - Compact Message for Getting Status and RF Parameters from Repeater ........... 13
3.17
ALV - Analog Levels..................................................................................................... 14
3.18
AMD - Status of Amplifier Chain Downlink................................................................. 15
3.19
AMU - Status of Amplifier Chain Uplink...................................................................... 15
3.20
ASC - Telephone Number to OMC, or Address of SMSC ............................................ 16
3.21
ASD - Amplifier Chain Saturation Downlink Status ..................................................... 16
3.22
ASL - Amplifier Chain Saturation Level ....................................................................... 17
3.23
ASU - Amplifier Chain Saturation Uplink Status .......................................................... 18
3.24
ATD - Attenuation Downlink ........................................................................................ 19
3.25
ATU - Attenuation Uplink ............................................................................................. 20
3.26
BAT - Battery for Mobile Equipment ............................................................................ 20
3.27
CFG - Compact message to receive repeater configuration ........................................... 20
3.28
CHA - Channel Configuration ....................................................................................... 21
3.29
CHL - Channel Limits.................................................................................................... 22
3.30
COM - Status of Communication Between Controller and Hardware Devices ............. 22
3.31
DAT - Date .................................................................................................................... 24
3.32
DDI - Detailed Device Information ............................................................................... 25
3.33
DEV - Sets the Different Communications Methods ..................................................... 25
3.34
DOO - Door Status......................................................................................................... 26
3.35
EAC - External Alarm Configuration ............................................................................ 26
3.36
EAD - External Alarm Description................................................................................ 26
3.37
EX1 - External Alarm 1 ................................................................................................. 27
3.38
Avitec AB
February 2005
3 (102)
3.39
3.40
3.41
EXT - Configuration of External Alarms....................................................................... 28
3.42
FRX - Fiber Optic Receiver Status ................................................................................ 28
3.43
FTX - Fiber Optic Transmitter Status ............................................................................ 29
3.44
HDC - Hardware Device Count ..................................................................................... 29
3.45
HDI - Hardware Device Information ............................................................................. 29
3.46
HWV - Hardware Version ............................................................................................. 30
3.47
ILA - Invalid Login Attempts ........................................................................................ 30
3.48
IOD - Input Overload Downlink Status ......................................................................... 30
3.49
IOU - Input Overload Uplink Status .............................................................................. 31
3.50
IPL - Input Level............................................................................................................ 31
3.51
LAI - Last Antenna Isolation Measurement Level......................................................... 32
3.52
LAR - Last Antenna Isolation Measurement Reply ....................................................... 33
3.53
LLN - Log Length.......................................................................................................... 33
3.54
LIT - Log Item ............................................................................................................... 33
3.55
LMT - Timeout in Minutes ............................................................................................ 34
3.56
LNK - Link Channel ...................................................................................................... 34
3.57
LPC - Last Power Cycling of Modem............................................................................ 35
3.58
LVD - Peak Power Out level Downlink......................................................................... 35
3.59
LVU - Peak Power Out level Uplink ............................................................................. 36
3.60
MAD - Main Address .................................................................................................... 37
3.61
MAR - Minimum Alarm Repetition Cycle .................................................................... 38
3.62
MCT - Modem Connection Time .................................................................................. 38
3.63
MDL - Repeater Model.................................................................................................. 38
3.64
MGA - Maximum Gain.................................................................................................. 39
3.65
MIS - Modem Initialization String................................................................................. 39
3.66
MPE - Automatic Modem Power Cycling Enabled ....................................................... 40
3.67
MPT - Automatic Modem Power Cycling Timepoint.................................................... 40
3.68
MNR - Maximum Number of Alarm Retransmissions ................................................. 41
3.69
MRR - Maximum Report Retransmission ..................................................................... 41
3.70
MSG - Message Counter................................................................................................ 41
3.71
MTP - Modem Type ...................................................................................................... 42
3.72
NCH - Number of Channels........................................................................................... 42
3.73
NCT - Network Connect Time....................................................................................... 43
3.74
NOL - Number of Successful Logins............................................................................. 43
3.75
NUA - Next Un-acknowledged Alarm........................................................................... 43
3.76
OLV - Optical Levels..................................................................................................... 43
3.77
OPL - Output Levels ...................................................................................................... 44
3.78
ORP - OMC to Controller Password.............................................................................. 45
3.79
PDC - Power Downlink measurement Configuration .................................................... 45
3.80
PDL - Power Downlink Level........................................................................................ 46
3.81
PIN - Sets the PIN Code Used to Lock Up GSM Module ............................................. 47
Avitec AB
February 2005
4 (102)
3.82
PLB - Level of BCCH output power in Downlink......................................................... 47
3.83
PSD - Power Supply Distribution Levels....................................................................... 48
3.84
PSL - Status of Power Supply Level.............................................................................. 50
3.85
PTM - Power Supply Temperature Status...................................................................... 50
3.86
PW1 - Status of Power 1 ................................................................................................ 51
3.87
3.88
3.89
3.90
PWD - Set Password to Access Repeater....................................................................... 55
3.91
RCA - Repetition Cycle for non Acknowledged Alarms............................................... 55
3.92
RCH - Repetition Cycle for Heartbeat ........................................................................... 56
3.93
RCR - Repetition Cycle for Reports .............................................................................. 56
3.94
RFP - RF Parameters...................................................................................................... 56
3.95
RID - Repeater ID .......................................................................................................... 57
3.96
RLY - Relay Status ........................................................................................................ 57
3.97
ROP - Controller to OMC password. ............................................................................. 58
3.98
RSP - Repeater Status Parameters.................................................................................. 58
3.99
SAC - SMS Acknowledge Configuration ...................................................................... 58
3.100 SFT - Secondary OMC address Fallback Timer ............................................................ 59

3.101 SIS - System Information String .................................................................................... 59
3.102 SIT - System Initialization Time.................................................................................... 60
3.103 SSC - Secondary Service Center Address...................................................................... 61
3.104 SUT - System Up Time.................................................................................................. 61
3.105 SWV - Software Version ............................................................................................... 61
3.106 SZD - Status of Synthesizers in Downlink Chain .......................................................... 61
3.107 SZU - Status of Synthesizers in Uplink Chain ............................................................... 62
3.108 TAG - Equipment Tag ................................................................................................... 63
3.109 TEM - Status of Temperature ........................................................................................ 63
3.110 TIM - Time .................................................................................................................... 63
3.111 TMD - Terminal Mode .................................................................................................. 64
3.112 UID - User ID ................................................................................................................ 64
3.113 VLD - Valid Peak Limiting Levels Downlink ............................................................... 64
3.114 VLU - Valid Peak Limiting Levels Uplink .................................................................... 65
3.115 WRD - Status of Voltage Standing Wave Ratio Downlink ........................................... 65
3.116 WRL - Voltage Standing Wave Ratio Level.................................................................. 66
Traffic Related GET and SET Attributes ...................................................................... 67

4.1
AIS - Active Intervals String.......................................................................................... 67
4.2
ATS - Active Timeslots ................................................................................................. 67
4.3
CTI - Current Traffic Interval ........................................................................................ 68
4.4
LAT - Last Active Timeslot........................................................................................... 68
4.5
PRF - Sending of Report................................................................................................ 68
4.6
TAT - Traffic Activity Threshold .................................................................................. 69
4.7
TTL - Traffic Threshold................................................................................................. 69
Avitec AB
February 2005
5 (102)
4.8
TPD - Timepoint of Traffic Report Transmission.......................................................... 69
4.9
TRF - Traffic String ....................................................................................................... 70
4.10
UCI - Utilization Current Interval.................................................................................. 70
4.11
ULI - Utilization Last Interval ....................................................................................... 71
Alarm Attribute Configuration ...................................................................................... 72

5.1
AIM - Antenna Isolation Measurements ........................................................................ 72
5.2
AMD - Amplifier Chain Downlink................................................................................ 74
5.3
AMU - Amplifier Chain Uplink..................................................................................... 74
5.4
ASD - Amplifier Chain Saturation Downlink................................................................ 74
5.5
ASU - Amplifier Chain Saturation Uplink..................................................................... 75
5.6
BAT - Battery for Mobile Equipment ............................................................................ 75
5.7
CLR - Changes made by logged in user......................................................................... 76
5.8
COM - Communication Between Controller and Active Devices ................................. 76
5.9
DOO - Door ................................................................................................................... 76
5.10
5.11
5.12
5.13
5.14
FRX - Fiber Optic Receiver ........................................................................................... 78
5.15
FTX - Fiber Optic Transmitter ....................................................................................... 79
5.16
ILI - Illegal Logins exceeded limit................................................................................. 79
5.17
IOD - Input Overload Downlink .................................................................................... 80
5.18
IOU - Input Overload Uplink......................................................................................... 80
5.19
LGO - User logged out from repeater ............................................................................ 80
5.20
PDL - Power Level BCCH Downlink............................................................................ 81
5.21
PSL - Power Supply Level............................................................................................. 81
5.22
PTM - Power Supply Temperature ................................................................................ 82
5.23
PW1 - Power Supply 1................................................................................................... 82
5.24
PW2 - Power Supply 2................................................................................................... 82
5.25
PW3 - Power Supply 3................................................................................................... 83
5.26
PW4 - Power Supply 4................................................................................................... 83
5.27
SZD - Synthesizer Downlink ......................................................................................... 84
5.28
SZU - Synthesizer Uplink .............................................................................................. 84
5.29
TEM - Temperature ....................................................................................................... 84
5.30
VLI - Valid Login to repeater ........................................................................................ 85
5.31
WRD - Voltage Standing Wave Ratio Downlink .......................................................... 85
Miscellaneous Command Attributes.............................................................................. 86

6.1
ACT ACK ...................................................................................................................... 86
6.2
ACT AIM....................................................................................................................... 86
6.3
ACT CLO....................................................................................................................... 87
6.4
ACT HBT....................................................................................................................... 87
6.5
ACT RCD ...................................................................................................................... 87
6.6
ACT RHW ..................................................................................................................... 87
Avitec AB
February 2005
6 (102)
6.7
ACT RSR ....................................................................................................................... 87
6.8
ACT TRE ....................................................................................................................... 87
6.9
ACT UPA....................................................................................................................... 87
Commands ..................................................................................................................... 89
7.1
ACCESS MODEM ........................................................................................................ 89
7.2
CLEAR LOG ................................................................................................................. 89
7.3
CLEAR SCREEN .......................................................................................................... 89
7.4
HARDWARE ................................................................................................................ 89
7.5
HELP ............................................................................................................................. 90
7.6
LOG ............................................................................................................................... 90
7.7
LOGOUT ....................................................................................................................... 90
7.8
MODEM ........................................................................................................................ 90
7.9
MP.................................................................................................................................. 90
7.10
PERF.............................................................................................................................. 90
7.11
REINIT .......................................................................................................................... 90
7.12
SILENT ON SILENT OFF ............................................................................................ 90
7.13
STATUS ........................................................................................................................ 91
7.14
SYSTEM........................................................................................................................ 91
7.15
TRACE AMP................................................................................................................. 91
7.16
TRACE TRAFFIC ......................................................................................................... 91
Heartbeat Format ........................................................................................................... 93

8.1
Heartbeat Format in conventional 2-channel Repeaters................................................. 93
8.2
Heartbeat Format in 2-channel Fiber Optic Repeaters ................................................... 94
8.3
Heartbeat Format in 2-Channel Frequency Translating Repeaters ................................ 95
8.4
Heartbeat Format in conventional 4-channel Repeaters................................................. 96
8.5
Heartbeat Format in 4-Channel Frequency Translating Repeaters ................................ 98
8.6
Heartbeat Format in 4-channel Fiber Optic Repeaters ................................................. 100
Avitec AB
February 2005
7 (102)
1 Introduction
This document gives an overview of all available commands and attributes for Avitec AB EDGE/GSM
repeaters. Commands and attributes described applies to conventional, frequency shifting and fiber optic
fed repeaters in both 2-channel, 4-channel versions in 850, 900, 1800 and 1900 frequency range.
Note! The commands and attributes apply to controller software version 1.04.
2 Repeater Naming Conventions

Avitec manufactures numerous different repeater types in the EDGE/GSM series for four different
frequency bands; GSM850, GSM900, DCS1800 and PCS1900. For detailed information about the different
repeater types, please refer to main section of the manual.
In the following sections these naming conventions apply:
Conventional Repeater This is a standard repeater, meaning that the repeater contains a donor and a
server antenna, and that the channels picked up on the donor antenna is amplified and retransmitted out the
server antenna. Of course the signals picked up by the server antenna in the repeater coverage area is
amplified and retransmitted towards the base station on the donor antenna.
Conventional repeaters are manufactured in 2 and 4-channel versions, meaning that a maximum of 2 or 4
channels can be repeated.
Frequency Shifting repeaters A frequency shifting repeater consists of two units; the Donor and the
Remote unit. The donor unit is mounted at the base station, and is fed via couplers from the base station
antenna.. The base station channels are translated to a new channel, the link channel. This link channel is
transmitted out the link antenna to the remote unit. At the Remote unit, the link channel is picked up by the
link antenna and translated back to the original channels which are transmitted out on the Server antenna.
Frequency shifting repeaters are manufactured in 2 and 4-channel version.
Frequency Translating repeaters this is the same as a Frequency Shifting repeater.
Band Shifting repeaters This is a special case of the frequency shifting repeaters where the link is on
another frequency band than the repeated frequencies. An example is the CSFT91822, where the repeater
repeats GSM900 frequencies, while the link between the donor and the remote units are on the DCS1800
bands. Band shifting repeaters are manufactured in 2 and 4-channel versions.
Fiber Optic Fed repeaters These repeater types consists of a HUB unit mounted at the base station. The
HUB unit converts the radio signals from the base station to fiber optic signals. At the repeater site, the
fiber optic signals are converted back to radio signals, amplified and transmitted out the server antenna.
Fiber Optic repeaters are manufactured in 2 and 4 channel versions.
Avitec AB
February 2005
8 (102)
3 GET and SET-Attributes

This section describes all the parameters and alarms that can be GET (read) or SET (written) to the control
module.
3.1
ADD - SMS Address Access List
Attribute type: Read and Write

When SMS is used for communication, addresses 1 to 4 indicates addresses that are allowed to read and
write attributes from the controller. All addresses have read access to the controller, but only address one
and two can set parameters and perform ACT commands.
Reply format:
1 X 2 Y 3 Z 4 W
X is address 1, Y address 2, Z address 3 and W is address 4. If no address is available, a -(dash) will be

replied.
Example:
GET ADD
Reply:
1 +46705511125 2 3 +46705521334 4
Example:
SET ADD 3 +46705511125
Configures address number three to be +46705511125

When data call communication is used, this attribute is obsolete.
3.2
ADC - Active Devices Count
Attribute type: Read only

This attribute replies with number of installed active devices to the controller.
Format:
N
N represents the number of devices.

Example:
GET ADC
Reply:
5
meaning that the number of active devices is 5.

3.3
AIC - Antenna Isolation Measurement Channels

The repeater can be configured to measure the antenna isolation on a certain timepoint of the day
(configured using attributes AIE and AIT). If antenna isolation is too low (as configured with attribute
ALA AIM), an alarm is triggered.
For details about the antenna measurement, please refer to attribute ACT AIM in section Miscellaneous
Command Attributes
The antenna isolation is measured using the BCCH downlink and a second listener channel.
By default, downlink chain 1 and 2 settings are used for the antenna measurements. If only one chain is
enabled in the repeater, or if measurement should be done on other channels, this attribute can be used to
configure the alternate channels.
Format:
Avitec AB
February 2005
9 (102)
X Y
X is the BCCH channel, and Y is the second channel used in the measurements.
If configured to 0, same as configured in CHA 1 and 2 is used.
Example:
GET AIC
Reply:
0 122
means that BCCH channel used is the one used in chain 1, but the listener channel is 122.
Example:
SET AIC 46 51
configures the BCCH used during measurements to 46, and listener channel to 51.
Note! Antenna isolation is not measured in Fiber Optic repeaters and band shifting repeaters (CSFT91822
etc).
3.4
AIE - Antenna Isolation Measurement Enabled

Command Attributes
This attribute configures if the automatic measurement should be enabled or not.
Format:
X
X = 0 means measurement of antenna isolation is disabled and X = 1 means measurement of antenna

isolation is enabled.
Example:
GET AIE
Reply:
1
means that the repeater will measure the antenna isolation once per day.
Example:
SET AIE 0
disables the measurement.

etc).
3.5
AIM - Antenna Isolation Measurement Status

The repeater can be configured to measure the antenna isolation on a certain time point of the day
For details about the antenna measurement, please refer to attribute ACT AIM in Miscellaneous
Command Attributes
This attribute replies with the status of last antenna measurement.
Format:
X
X = 0 means OK. X = 1 means antenna isolation is too low, or a failure was encountered (failure cause can
be read out with attribute LAR) during measurement of the antenna isolation.
Avitec AB
February 2005
10 (102)
Example:
GET AIM
Reply:
1
meaning that last antenna measurement detected that the antenna isolation was too low, or the measurement
failed.
etc).
3.6
AIP - Antenna Isolation Measurement Progress

The repeater can perform a measurement of the antenna isolation, either at scheduled timepoints, or upon
user request by entering the command ACT AIM (for details about the antenna measurement, please refer
to attribute ACT AIM in Miscellaneous Command Attributes). Once the antenna isolation measurement
is requested, polling the AIP detects when antenna isolation measurement is completed.
This attribute replies with the progress of current antenna isolation routine.
Format:
X
X = 0 means measurements are completed, and X = 1 means antenna isolation measurement is in progress
Example:
GET AIP
Reply:
1
meaning that antenna isolation measurement is in progress.

etc).
3.7
AIT - Antenna Isolation Measurement Timepoint

Command Attributes
This attribute configures at what timepoint of the day the antenna isolation measurement should be
performed.
Format:
HHMMSS
HH is the hours (in 24 hour notation), MM is minutes and SS is seconds specifying the measurement
timepoint.
Example:
GET AIT
Reply:
031500
meaning that antenna measurement timepoint is 15 minutes past three in the morning.
Example:
SET AIT 170000
sets the time for measurement to 17 in the afternoon.
Avitec AB
February 2005
11 (102)
Note 1! Since antenna measurement might cause dropped calls (radio parameters are changed for 3-4
seconds), it is recommended to set the antenna measurement to be performed during low traffic intervals.
Note 2! Antenna isolation is not measured in Fiber Optic repeaters and band shifting repeaters (CSFT91822
etc).
3.8
AL1 - Compressed Alarm Format

This is a compact message of the alarm configuration strings. This attribute replies with the configuration
of the alarm sources AMU, AMD, BAT, PDL and WRD
The use of the attribute is mainly to increase the speed of repeater installations into the repeater OMC.
Example:
GET AL1
Replies:
0 0 1 006 003 003 0 0 1 006 003 003 0 0 1 90 115 3 0 0 2 0 0 3 012 000 003 0
0 2 013 000 003
which are the alarm configuration strings received as if using the commands
GET
GET
GET
GET
GET
ALA
ALA
ALA
ALA
ALA
AMU
AMD
BAT
PDL
WRD
For a detailed description of the different alarm attributes and alarm strings, please refer to attribute ALA
and section Alarm Attribute Configuration.
3.9

Same as attribute AL1, but replies with configuration for alarm sources TEM, DOO, PW1, PW2 and PW3
3.10

Same as attribute AL1, but replies with configuration for alarm sources EX1, EX2, EX3, EX4 and PW4
3.11

Same as attribute AL1, but replies with configuration for alarm sources VLI, LGO, CLR and ILI
3.12

Same as attribute AL1, but replies with configuration for alarm sources SZU, SZD, PSL, PTM, AIM
3.13

Same as attribute AL1, but replies with configuration for alarm sources IOU, IOD, ASU, ASD, COM
3.14
Avitec AB
February 2005
12 (102)
Same as attribute AL1, but replies with configuration for alarm sources FRX, FTX.
Note! This attribute is only used in fiber optic fed repeaters.
3.15
ALA - Alarm Configuration Settings

Format:
AAA X Y Z LLL UUU TTT
AAA is the alarm source to configure. Please refer to Alarm Attribute Configuration for an overview of
available alarm parameters to configure.
X has double functionality. It determines whether an alarm should be send if error is detected, and it also
configures whether the alarm relay should be affected by the alarm source.
X = 0 means alarm transmission enabled, but alarm doesnt affect the relay output
X = 1 means alarm transmission disabled, and does not affect the relay.
X = 2 means alarm transmission is enabled, and alarm affects the relay output.
X = 3 means alarm transmission is disabled, but alarm affects relay output
Y determines whether an alarm requires to be acknowledged or not.
(When using data call, an alarm is considered acknowledged when the repeater has successfully logged in
to the OMC, and delivered the alarm. In case of SMS, an alarm is considered acknowledged when an
acknowledge message is received from the main address. The alarms can also be acknowledged with the
command ACT ACK when logged in locally or remotely. If an alarm is not acknowledged, it will be
retransmitted up to MNR (maximum number of retransmissions) times, with RCA (repetition cycle for
alarms) minutes interval. Refer to attributes MNR and RCA.)
Y = 0 means Acknowledge required
Y = 1 means No acknowledge required
Z is a threshold indicator, indicating how thresholds are used for this particular alarm source.
Z = 1 means that both thresholds are used for alarm calculation.
Z = 2 means that lower threshold is used
Z = 3 means that upper threshold is used
Z = 4 means that thresholds are ignored, i.e. digital measurement.
Note! Changing parameter Z does NOT affect the measurement of the alarm source. Z is just an indicator
of how the measurement is done, and should NEVER be changed.
LLL is the value of the lower threshold used for alarm calculation.
UUU is the value of the upper threshold used for alarm calculation.
TTT is the time an alarm has to be in erroneous state before an alarm is triggered.
Example:
GET ALA TEM
Returns:
0 0 1 -15 060 5
This means that alarm is enabled and acknowledge required. Both thresholds are used in measuring the
alarm, lower threshold is -15 (degrees), 60 (degrees) is the upper threshold and that the temperature has to
be higher than 60 for 5 seconds before an alarm is triggered.
Example:
SET ALA TEM 0 0 1 0 60 20
Modifies the above alarm source to generate an alarm when the temperature has been above 60 degrees or
below 0 degrees for more than 20 seconds.
3.16
ALL - Compact Message for Getting Status and RF Parameters from

Repeater

This attribute replies with the same information as in the heartbeat sent to the Avitec Element Manager,
except the Time and Date information. Please refer to section Heartbeat Reports.
Avitec AB
February 2005
13 (102)
3.17
ALV - Analog Levels

Returns the snapshot information about the main analog levels in the repeater unit.
Depending on the number of channels in the repeater, the reply varies.
2-channel repeaters:
<P1> <P2> <P3> <P4> <BAT> <TEM> <PTem> <PSUPLevel>
<P1> is the +28 V power supply level out from the Power Supply. If communication with power supply is
in error, a dash (-) is reported.
<P2> is the +15 V power supply level out from the Power Supply. If communication with power supply is
in error, a dash (-) is reported.
<P3> is the +6.45 V power supply level out from the Power Supply. If communication with power supply
is in error, a dash (-) is reported.
<P4> is the +6.45 V power supply level from the Power Supply to the Controller. If communication with
power supply is in error, a dash (-) is reported.
<BAT> is the +10.5 V (when fully charged) power supply level feeding the controller in case of a power
failure. If communication with power supply is in error, a dash (-) is reported.
<TEM> is the temperature in Celsius as measured in the control module.
<PTem> is the temperature in Celsius as measured in the Power Supply. If communication with power
supply is in error, a dash (-) is reported.
<PSUPLevel> is the mains voltage level in to the Power Supply. If communication with power supply is in
error, a dash (-) is reported.
Example:
GET ALV
Reply:
+28.1 +15.0 +6.5 +6.4 +10.1 33 48 229
This displays the four different power levels +28.1 V, +15.0 V, +6.5 V, +6.4 V out from the Power Supply.
Battery level is +10.1 V, Controller temperature is 33 C, Power Supply temperature is 48 C and mains
input level to power supply is 229 V.
4-channel repeaters are equipped with two power supplies, the Master Power Supply, feeding 2 LIMPAs,
Reference Generator, FDMs and the controller, and also the Slave Power Supply, feeding the 2 remaining
LIMPAs.
Format:
<P1Master> <P1Slave> <P2Master> <P2Slave> <P3Master> <P3Slave> <P4> <BAT> <TEM> <PTem
Master> <PTem Slace> <PSUPLevel>
<P1Master> is the +28 V power supply level out from the Master Power Supply. If communication with
master power supply is in error, a dash (-) is reported.
<P1Slave> is the +28 V power supply level out from the Slave Power Supply. If communication with slave
<P2 Master> is the +15 V power supply level out from the Master Power Supply. If communication with
<P2 Slave> is the +15 V power supply level out from the Slave Power Supply. If communication with slave
<P3 Master> is the +6.45 V power supply level out from the Master Power Supply. If communication with
<P3 Slave> is the +6.45 V power supply level out from the Slave Power Supply. If communication with slave
<P4> is the +6.45 V power supply level from the Master Power Supply to the Controller. If communication
with master power supply is in error, a dash (-) is reported.
Avitec AB
February 2005
14 (102)
<BAT> is the +10.5 V (when fully charged) power supply level feeding the controller in case of a power
failure. If communication with master power supply is in error, a dash (-) is reported.
<TEM> is the temperature in Celsius as measured in the control module.
<PTem Master> is the temperature in Celsius as measured in the Master Power Supply. If communication
with master power supply in error, a dash (-) is reported.
<PTem Slave> is the temperature in Celsius as measured in the Slave Power Supply. If communication with
slave power supply in error, a dash (-) is reported.
<PSUPLevel> is the mains voltage level in to the Power Supplies. If communication with master power
supply is in error, a dash (-) is reported.
Example:
GET ALV
Reply:
+28.1 +28.0 +15.0 +15.0 +6.5 +6.5 +6.4 +10.1 33 48 45 229
This displays the eight different power levels +28.1 V, +28.0, +15.0 V, +15.0, +6.5 V, +6.5 V, +6.4 V out
from the Power Supply. Battery level is +10.1 V, Controller temperature is 33 C, Master Power Supply
temperature is 48 C, Slave Power Supply temperature is 45 C, and mains input level to power supply is
229 V.
Note! To read out full power levels in all modules, please refer to attribute PSD (Power Supply
Distribution)
3.18
AMD - Status of Amplifier Chain Downlink

This parameter returns the status of the amplifier chains in the downlink path. Each LIMPA contains two
chains, and the reply depends on number of installed channels / LIMPAs.
Format for 2 channel repeaters:
XY
X is status of Amplifier Chain 1 DL (in downlink LIMPA 1)

Y is status of Amplifier Chain 2 DL (in downlink LIMPA 1)
0 indicates an OK, and 1 an Error.
A - means communication with LIMPA is in error.
Example:
01
means amplifier chain 1 DL is OK, while there is an error in chain 2 DL.

XYZW
X is status of Amplifier Chain 1 DL (in downlink LIMPA 1).

Y is status of Amplifier Chain 2 DL (in downlink LIMPA 1).
Z is status of Amplifier Chain 3 DL (in downlink LIMPA 2).
W is status of Amplifier Chain 4 DL (in downlink LIMPA 2).
A - means communication with corresponding LIMPA is in error.
Example:
0001
means an Error in chain 4 DL, while all other chains are OK.
3.19
AMU - Status of Amplifier Chain Uplink

This parameter returns the status of the amplifier chains in the uplink path. Each LIMPA contains two
chains, and the reply depends on number of installed channels / LIMPAs.
Avitec AB
February 2005
15 (102)
XY
X is status of Amplifier Chain 1 UL (in downlink LIMPA 1)

Y is status of Amplifier Chain 2 UL (in downlink LIMPA 1)
Example:
01
means amplifier chain 1 UL is OK, while there is an error in chain 2 UL.

XYZW
X is status of Amplifier Chain 1 UL (in downlink LIMPA 1)

Y is status of Amplifier Chain 2 UL (in downlink LIMPA 1)
Z is status of Amplifier Chain 3 UL (in downlink LIMPA 2)
W is status of Amplifier Chain 4 UL (in downlink LIMPA 2)
A - means communication with corresponding LIMPA is in error.
Example:
00--
means an that chains 1 and 2 are OK, while there is an error in communication with LIMPA 2 (containing
uplink chains 3 and 4).
3.20
ASC - Telephone Number to OMC, or Address of SMSC

When data call is used, ASC is the telephone number to the OMC. In case of SMS communication, this is
the number to the Short Message Service Center (SMSC).
Example:
GET ASC
Reply:
+46705008999
means, if SMS is enabled, that this is the address to the Short Message Service Center.
If data call is used, the controller will dial this number if an alarm occurs, or a report is to be sent. The
controller can optionally call a secondary OMC address in case message is undeliverable to the ASC
address. Please refer to attribute SSC attribute for details.
Example:
SET ASC 90510
sets the address to 90510.

Note! If data call is used as communications method, setting the address to nothing will disable the sending
of alarms to the OMC, while the controller is still available for remote login.
Example:
SET ASC
Disables the sending of alarms and reports (if data call is used)
3.21
ASD - Amplifier Chain Saturation Downlink Status

The Amplifier Chain Saturation detects if the repeater works in the optimum way. If the input signal to the
repeater is too high, the amplifiers will go into saturation, and hence the repeater will not work within the
optimum range.
Note! Having a chain going well into saturation might indicate that the repeater is oscillating. In this case,
the gain must be decreased in order to avoid severe signal pollution. Also, the antenna isolation should be
verified. Please refer to command ACT AIM for details on how to measure the antenna isolation.
Avitec AB
February 2005
16 (102)
Format for 2-channel repeaters:

XY
X is the Amplifier Saturation status in the Downlink path 1

Y is the Amplifier Saturation status in the Downlink path 2
where
0 indicates an OK
1 indicates an Error.
- (dash) means connection with LIMPA is in error.
Example:
GET ASD
Reply:
10
meaning that the gain in downlink 1 is in error, and downlink chain 2 is OK.
XYZW
X is the Amplifier Saturation status in the Downlink path 1

Y is the Amplifier Saturation status in the Downlink path 2
Z is the Amplifier Saturation status in the Downlink path 3
W is the Amplifier Saturation status in the Downlink path 4
where
0 indicates an OK
- (dash) means connection with corresponding LIMPA is in error.
Example:
GET ASD
Reply:
0001
meaning that the saturation in downlink chain 4 is in error. In this example, it might be that chain 4 is
oscillating, and hence the gain should be decreased and / or antenna isolation verified.
Note! To read out actual level of saturation on a chain by chain basis, refer to attribute ASL.
3.22
ASL - Amplifier Chain Saturation Level

The Amplifier Chain Saturation Level displays the amplifier saturation level on a chain by chain basis.
KLXY
K is the Amplifier Saturation Level in the uplink path 1

L is the Amplifier Saturation Level in the uplink path 2
X is the Amplifier Saturation Level in the downlink path 1
Y is the Amplifier Saturation Level in the downlink path 2
K, L, X, Y can have the following values
0 means amplifier is below optimum settings (can be due to lack of input signal ).
1 means amplifier is working in the optimum range.
2 means amplifier is going into saturation and that gain should be decreased.
3 means amplifier is well into saturation, and that gain must be decreased to avoid degradation of signal
quality.
Example:
GET ASL
Reply:
3310
Avitec AB
February 2005
17 (102)
meaning that the uplink amplifier chains are going very hard into saturation, while downlink one works in
optimum range. This probably indicates that the repeater is oscillating in the uplink, and that the gain in the
uplink should be decreased.
KLMNXYZW
K is the Amplifier Saturation Level in the uplink path 1

L is the Amplifier Saturation Level in the uplink path 2
M is the Amplifier Saturation Level in the uplink path 3
N is the Amplifier Saturation Level in the uplink path 4
X is the Amplifier Saturation Level in the downlink path 1
Y is the Amplifier Saturation Level in the downlink path 2
Z is the Amplifier Saturation Level in the downlink path 3
W is the Amplifier Saturation Level in the downlink path 4
K-M, X-W can have the following values
0 means amplifier is below optimum settings (can be due to lack of input signal).
quality.
Example:
GET ASL
Reply:
00011003
meaning that uplink channel 4 works in optimum range (probably traffic going through the chain),
downlink chain one is working in optimum range (BCCH properly configured) and that downlink chain
four is well into saturation. Downlink chain four should hence be decreased to avoid signal degradation.
This can also be an indication that the downlink chain four is oscillating.
3.23
ASU - Amplifier Chain Saturation Uplink Status

The Amplifier Chain Saturation detects if the repeater works in the optimum way. If the input signal to the
repeater is too high, the amplifiers will go into saturation, and hence the repeater will not work within the
optimum range.
Note 1! Having a chain going well into saturation might indicate that the repeater is oscillating. In this case,
the gain must be decreased in order to avoid severe signal pollution. Also, the antenna isolation should be
verified. Please refer to command ACT AIM for details on how to measure the antenna isolation.
Note 2! A mobile phone being used very close to the server antenna might cause the amplifier saturation
alarm to be activated.
XY
X is the Amplifier Saturation status in the Uplink path 1

Y is the Amplifier Saturation status in the Uplink path 2
where
0 indicates an OK
Example:
GET ASU
Reply:
11
Avitec AB
February 2005
18 (102)
meaning that the uplink amplifier chains are in error. This probably indicates that the repeater is oscillating,
and that the gain in the uplink must be decreased.
XYZW
X is the Amplifier Saturation status in the Uplink path 1

Y is the Amplifier Saturation status in the Uplink path 2
Z is the Amplifier Saturation status in the Uplink path 3
W is the Amplifier Saturation status in the Uplink path 4
where
0 indicates an OK
1 indicates an Error
Example:
GET ASU
Reply:
1001
meaning that the amplifier chain in uplink one and uplink chain four is in error. In this example, it might be
that chain one and four is oscillating, and hence the gain should be decreased and / or antenna isolation
verified.
Note! To read out actual level of saturation on a chain by chain basis, refer to attribute ASL.
3.24
ATD - Attenuation Downlink

Format on setting parameter:
SET ATD K X [L Y] [M Z] [N W]
K is the chain selector, and X is the attenuation in downlink chain K. Optionally attenuation in chain L, M,
N can be set in the same command.
The chain selector is 1 or 2 in 2-channel repeaters, and 1 to 4 in 4-channel repeaters.
The attenuation is settable in 1 dB steps from 0 to 30 dB.
Example:
SET ATD 2 21
Sets attenuation in downlink chain 2 to 21 dB.

Example:
SET ATD 3 20 4 22
Sets attenuation in downlink chain 3 to 20 dB and in chain 4 to 22 dB.

Format on getting:
GET ATD
Reply in 2 channel repeaters:

1 XX 2 YY
XX is attenuation in chain one downlink, YY attenuation in downlink 2.

1 XX 2 YY 3 ZZ 4 WW
XX is attenuation in chain 1 downlink, YY attenuation in downlink 2, ZZ attenuation in downlink 3 and

WW in downlink 4.
Example:
GET ATD
Reply:
1 22 2 22 3 22 4 23
means that attenuation in downlink 1 to 3 is 22 dB, while channel 4 is set to 23 dB attenuation.
Avitec AB
February 2005
19 (102)
3.25
ATU - Attenuation Uplink

SET ATU K X [L Y] [M Z] [N WW]
K is the chain selector, and X is the attenuation in uplink chain K. Optionally attenuation in chain L, M, N
can be set in the same command.
The chain selector is 1 or 2 in 2-channel repeaters, and 1 to 4 in 4-channel repeaters.
The attenuation is settable in 1 dB steps from 0 to 30 dB.
Example:
SET ATU 2 7
Sets attenuation in uplink chain 2 to 7 dB.

Example:
SET ATU 2 11 3 11
Sets attenuation in uplink chains 2 and 3 to 11 dB.

Format on getting parameters:
GET ATU

1 XX 2 YY
XX is attenuation in chain 1 uplink, YY attenuation in uplink 2.

1 XX 2 YY 3 ZZ 4 WW
XX is attenuation in chain one uplink, YY attenuation in uplink 2, ZZ attenuation in uplink 3 and WW in

uplink 4.
Example:
GET ATU
Reply:
1 24 2 24 3 24 4 24
means that attenuation in downlink 1 to 4 is 24 dB.

3.26
BAT - Battery for Mobile Equipment

Reports the status of the battery charge for the remote communications equipment.
Format:
X
X = 0 means charge is OK
X = 1 means charge is ERROR.
X = - means there is a communications error between the controller and the Master Power Supply.
Example:
GET BAT
Replies:
1
meaning that there is an error in the charging of the battery for the remote communications equipment
3.27
CFG - Compact message to receive repeater configuration

This attribute is used to receive some of the most common repeater configuration parameters. The reply is a
list of parameters, separated by space. The attributes return the values of the GET attributes (in order):
Avitec AB
February 2005
20 (102)
MSG
LMT
ILA
MAR
MGA
CHL
PRF
TPD
Example:
GET CFG
Returns:
1 00070 2 00062 3 00000 4 00000 20 50 003 85 736 811 1 020000
3.28
CHA - Channel Configuration

This attribute is used to configure and determine the repeated channels.
Format on setting channel:
SET CHA K X [L Y] [M Z] [N W]
Where K is the chain selector, and X is the repeated channel in chain K (both uplink and downlink).
Depending on repeater the chain selector is 1 or 2 (2-channel repeaters) or 1 to 4 (4-channel repeaters ).
Optionally channels in chain L, M, N can be set in the same command.
Channel must be within the interval that the repeater can handle. Channel limits can be determined by using
attribute CHL.
Example:
SET CHA 2 64
Sets channel in uplink and downlink chain 2 to 64.

Example:
SET CHA 1 562 3 570
Sets channel one to 562 and 2 to 570.

Format on getting parameters in 2 channel repeaters:
GET CHA
Replies:
1 X 2 Y
X is channel 1, Y is channel 2
Example:
GET CHA
Reply:
1 47 2 11
means that channel in chain 1 is 47 and chain 2 is set to 11.

Format on getting parameters in 4-channel repeaters:
GET CHA
Replies:
1 X 2 Y 3 Z 4 W
X is channel 1, Y is channel 2, Z is channel 3 and W is channel 4.

Example:
GET CHA
Reply:
1 610 2 615 3 630 4 637
means that channel in chain 1 is 610, chain 2 is set to 615, 3 is set to 630 and channel four is set to 637.
Avitec AB
February 2005
21 (102)
3.29
CHL - Channel Limits

Format on Non-Band Shifting repeaters:
X Y
X is lowest, and Y highest available channel that the repeater can repeat
Example:
GET CHL
Reply:
1 124
Indicates that the repeater can handle channel numbers 1 through 124
Note! Repeaters handling the GSM-R or E-GSM band might have first value higher than second value. For
example, an E-GSM repeater might have the channel range 975-124. This means that the valid channel
numbers are 975-1023 and 0-124.
Format on Band Shifting repeaters:
X Y Z W
X is lowest, and Y highest available channel that the repeater can repeat, and Z, W is the range for the link
channels.
Example:
GET CHL
Reply:
1 124 740 810
indicates that the repeater can handle channel numbers 1 through 124, and that allowed link channels are
740 to 810.
Note! Repeaters handling the GSM-R or E-GSM band might have first value higher than second value. For
example, an E-GSM repeater might have the channel range 975-124. This means that the valid channel
numbers are 975-1023 and 0-124.
3.30
COM - Status of Communication Between Controller and Hardware

Devices

The control module communicates with a number of hardware devices in the repeater over a serial bus.
This attribute is used to determine the status of the communication between the control module and the
different modules.
Note! If Reference Generator is broken, this will lead to communications alarm with the Reference
Generator itself, and also with the LIMPAs, since their microcontrollers run from the Reference Generator
clock.
Depending on repeater type, the format varies:
Format for 2 channel conventional and Frequency Translating IR, -SD and - DD repeaters:
XYZWK
X
Y
Z
W
K
=
=
=
=
=
Status of communication with Power Supply

Status of communication with LIMPA UL
Status of communication with LIMPA DL
Status of communication with Reference Generator
Status of communication with Filtering and Distribution module on server side.
0 means OK
1 means Error
Example:
GET COM
Reply:
00100
Avitec AB
February 2005
22 (102)
means that communication between all modules are working properly , except for communication between
controller and LIMPA DL.
Format for 2-channel Fiber Optic fed repeaters:
XYZWKL
X
Y
Z
W
K
L
=
=
=
=
=
=

Status of communication with Fiber Optic Interface.
0 means OK
1 means Error
Example:
GET COM
Reply:
001000
controller and LIMPA DL.
Format for 2-channel Frequency Translating ER repeaters:
XYZWKL
X
Y
Z
W
K
L
=
=
=
=
=
=

Status of communication with Filtering and Distribution module on server antenna port 1
0 means OK
1 means Error
Example:
GET COM
Reply:
0000010
controller and Filtering And Distribution module on server antenna 1.
Format for 4-channel and Frequency Translating IR, -SD and - DD repeaters
XYZWJKLM
X =
Y =
Z =
W =
J =
K =
L =
M =
Status of communication with Master Power Supply

Status of communication with Slave Power Supply
Status of communication with LIMPA UL 1
Status of communication with LIMPA DL 1
0 means OK
1 means Error
Example:
GET COM
Reply:
00010000
controller and LIMPA UL 2.
Format for 4-channel Frequency Translating ER repeaters:
Avitec AB
February 2005
23 (102)
XYZWJKLM
X =
Y =
Z =
W =
J =
K =
L =
M =
N =

0 means OK
1 means Error
Example:
GET COM
Reply:
000100000
XYZWJKLMN
X =
Y =
Z =
W =
J =
K =
L =
M =
N =

Status of communication with Fiber Optic Interface.
0 means OK
1 means Error
Example:
GET COM
Reply:
000100000
3.31
DAT - Date

Format:
DDMMYY
DD=Date, MM=Month, YY=Year

Example:
GET DAT
Replies:
181099
means the repeater date is set to 18th of October, 1999

Example:
SET DAT 241200
sets the repeater date to 24th of December year 2000.
Avitec AB
February 2005
24 (102)
Note! When changing the date, a heartbeat will be sent as soon as user logs out, the traffic / uplink activity
log will be cleared, and all alarms in the log will have the number of retransmissions of non-acknowledged
alarms set to the value MNR.
3.32
DDI - Detailed Device Information

Format:
GET DDI <Devce No>
<Device No> is a number from 1 to max number of attributes (as read out by ADC attribute).
Format on Reply:
<SerialNumber> <ArtNo> <SWV> <SWBuildTime> <SWBuildDate> <ManufacturingInfo>
<ModuleInitTime> <ModuleInitDate> <Uptime> <HWResetCounter> <WDResetCounter>
<Device Description>
<SerialNumber> is the Serial Number of the device

<ArtNo> is Article Number / Hardware Revision
<SWV> is a string delimited by (double quote) signs, containing software version of the device
<SWBuildTime> is a string delimited by (double quote) signs, containing software build time
<SWBuildDate> is a string delimited by (double quote) signs, software build date
<ManufacturingInfo> is a string delimited by (double quote) signs, containing manufacturing specific
information. If no information is available, a -is reported.
<ModuleInitTime> contains the repeater initialization time on the format HHMMSS, with 24 hours
notation. If no information is available, a -(dash) is reported.
<ModuleInitDate> contains the repeater initialization date on the format DDMMYY. If no information is
available, a -(dash) is reported.
<Uptime> shows how many seconds the device has been up and running since last reset
<HWResetCounter> shows how many times the device has been started since device was initialized
<WDResetCounter> shows how many times the watchdog has forced the device to reset since device
initialization
<Device Description> is a string delimited by (double quote) signs, containing a textual description of the
hardware device.
3.33
DEV - Sets the Different Communications Methods

Options:
SMS = Short Message Services
DTC = Data Call
NUL = No remote access enabled
In order to use SMS, modem type must be set to Wavecom (external modem, SET MTP WAVECOM),
Integra (on board modem, SET MTP INTEGRA) or TrioRail (external modem, SET MTP TRIOEXT ).
Example:
SET DEV SMS
Enables the repeater for remote access via SMS.

Note 1! This requires that the address of the SMS center be configured (SET ASC X, where X is SMSC
address).
Also, at least one of the addresses must be configured (SET ADD X Y) and the main address must point at
one of the configured addresses (SET MAD X), otherwise, the controller will not be accessible SMS.
Note 2! An SMS configured repeater will, if modem is initialized correctly, still be remotely accessible via
modem connection ( Data Call ).
Avitec AB
February 2005
25 (102)
Note 3! TrioRail external modem is only supported in GSM-R (railway) repeaters.

3.34
DOO - Door Status

Format:
X
X = 0 means door is closed

X = 1 means door is open
Example:
GET DOO
Replies:
1
meaning that door is open

3.35
EAC - External Alarm Configuration

The External Alarm Configuration is used in conjunction with the EAD attribute to configure what
additional text is transmitted together with alarms EX1-EX4.
Format on getting parameter:
GET EAC
Replies:
XYZW
where
X is configuration for EX1
Y is configuration for EX2
Z is configuration for EX3
W is configuration for EX4
X, Y, Z, W = 0 means that default text will be attached to alarms EX1-EX4, and
X, Y, Z, W = 1 means that text entered in corresponding External Alarm Description will be attached to the
alarm message transmitted to the repeater OMC.
Example:
GET EAC
Replies:
0010
means that default alarm message is used in external alarm 1,2 and 4, while external alarm three will have
text as configured with SET EAD 3 attached to the alarm message.
SET EAC XYZW
where X, Y, Z, W configures the usage for alarm description for external pin 1,2, 3 or 4.
Example:
SET EAC 1100
configures EX1 and EX2 to attach alarm description as configured with SET EAD to the alarms transmitted
to the repeater OMC.
3.36
EAD - External Alarm Description

The External Alarm Description allows for giving each external alarm input a unique tag. This allows for
easier information about what is connected to each alarm input. Optionally (as configured using attribute
EAC), this tag can be included in the additional text field for the alarms transmitted to the repeater OMC.
Format on getting parameter:
Avitec AB
February 2005
26 (102)
GET EAD X
where X indicates the alarm description for external pin 1,2, 3 or 4.

Example:
GET EAD 3
Replies:
UPS POWER FAILURE
meaning that external alarm 3 description is UPS POWER FAILURE.

SET EAD X [Alarm Pin Description]
where X indicates the alarm description for external pin 1,2, 3 or 4.

[Alarm Pin Description] is the actual description for this alarm source. Maximum length of string is 19
characters including any spaces.
Example:
SET EAD 4 RADIO HUT DOOR
sets the alarm description for external alarm pin 4 to RADIO HUT DOOR.
Note! All characters will be converted to upper case. Furthermore, the controller will remove any extra
spaces between words, ensuring that only one space separates each word in the alarm pin description.
3.37
EX1 - External Alarm 1

Format:
X
X=0 means status is OK

X=1 means status is ERROR
Example:
GET EX1
Replies:
0
meaning status is OK.

3.38

Format:
X

Example:
GET EX2
Replies:
1
meaning status is ERROR.

3.39

Format:
X

Avitec AB
February 2005
27 (102)
Example:
GET EX3
Replies:
0
meaning status is OK.

3.40

Format:
X

X=1 means status is ERROR.
Example:
GET EX4
Replies:
1
meaning status is ERROR.

3.41
EXT - Configuration of External Alarms

Format:
X Y Z W
X is configuration for alarm pin 1

Y is configuration for alarm pin 2
Z is configuration for alarm pin 3
W is configuration for alarm pin 4
0 means that no voltage is the OK state, i.e. a voltage applied to the pin generates an alarm
1 means that applied voltage is the OK state, i.e. absence of voltage generates an alarm
Note! If the pin is not used for alarm input, the configuration should be 0.
Example:
GET EXT
Replies:
0 0 1 0
means that pin 3 normally should have a voltage applied, and that the other pins either normally should
NOT have a voltage applied, or are not in use.
Example:
SET EXT 0 0 1 1
Configures alarm pins 1 and 2 to report OK if no voltage is available, and pin 3 and 4 to require a voltage
applied in order to be in OK state.
3.42
FRX - Fiber Optic Receiver Status

Returns the status of the fiber optic receiver. An error might indicate that the fiber from the HUB unit is
failing or that the HUB unit is experiencing a power failure.
Format:
X
X = 0 means receiver status is OK

X = 1 means receiver has an ERROR detected.
If there is a communications error with fiber optic module, a - (dash) is reported.
Avitec AB
February 2005
28 (102)
Example:
GET FRX
Replies:
1
meaning that something is wrong in the fiber optic receiver.

Note! This attribute only applies to Fiber Optic fed repeaters.
3.43
FTX - Fiber Optic Transmitter Status

Returns the status of the fiber optic transmitter. A fiber optic transmitter most likely indicates that there is
something wrong with the fiber optic unit.
Format:
X
X = 0 means transmitter status is OK

X = 1 means transmitter has an ERROR detected.
If there is a communications error with fiber optic module, a - (dash) is reported.
Example:
GET FTX
Replies:
1
meaning that something is wrong in the fiber optic transmitter.

Note! This attribute only applies to Fiber Optic fed repeaters.
3.44
HDC - Hardware Device Count

Returns number of configured hardware devices in the repeater.
Format:
X
Example:
GET HDC
Replies:
12
meaning that there are 12 hardware devices configured in the system. Please refer to attribute HDI on how
to retrieve information about the different devices.
3.45
HDI - Hardware Device Information

This command returns device information about a specific device.
GET HDI X
X is from 1 to HDC.
Reply:
<Serial> <ArticleNo> <Device Information String>
<Serial> is 4 characters containing the device serial number.

<ArticleNo> is the Avitec Article Number, up to 12 characters.
<Device Information String> contains a quoted textual description of the hardware device. String can be up
to 40 characters wide.
Example:
GET HDI 1
Avitec AB
February 2005
29 (102)
Reply:
4711 H311001A "Control Module"
If Device Number X doesn't exist, a dash '-' is replied.

Example:
GET HDI 4000
Reply:
-
3.46
HWV - Hardware Version

Returns a string with the hardware version of the control module.
Example:
GET HWV
Replies:
H121001C
meaning that the controller version is H121001C.

3.47
ILA - Invalid Login Attempts

Format:
X
X is the number of invalid login attempts that can be made before the login is locked for login. Every time
an erroneous login attempt is made to the repeater, a counter is increased. This counter is decreased with
one every hour. If the counter exceeds the ILA value, the login will be blocked for one hour. After that one
more login attempt is allowed.
Example:
GET ILA
Replies:
8
meaning that 8 erroneous login attempts can be made before login is blocked.
Example:
SET ILA 5
Modifies this value to 5.

3.48
IOD - Input Overload Downlink Status

The input circuitry in the downlink chain contains circuitry to detect if there is an input overload on the
downlink chain.
The measurement is always measured in downlink chain 1, but the detector is a broadband detector,
covering the entire repeater band where the repeater is operational.
This attribute can be used to see if there is other equipment in the frequency band causing the input of the
repeater to be blocked, and hence decreasing the repeater performance. This can for example be a base
station from another operator being mounted too close to the repeater donor antenna.
Format:
X
X = 0 means that the input in the downlink is OK

X = 1 means that there is a strong input signal in the downlink, causing the input to be blocked.
Example:
GET IOD
Avitec AB
February 2005
30 (102)
Replies:
1
meaning that a radio source is injecting a strong signal in the downlink path, causing the repeater
performance to be decreased. Most likely, the antenna is facing a base station from another operator, the
repeater is mounted too close to the base station or the antenna has too much gain, causing the repeater
input to be blocked.
Note! It is very unlikely that an IOD alarm is triggered in a Fiber Optic fed repeater, since the RF-levels out
from the FiberOptic interface is much lower than the triggered value for the IOD alarm. An IOD alarm
triggered in a Fiber Optic fed repeater probably indicates an internal failure in the input stage of the
LIMPA.
3.49
IOU - Input Overload Uplink Status

The input circuitry in the uplink chain contains circuitry to detect if there is an input overload on the uplink
chain.
The measurement is always measured in uplink chain 1, but the detector is a broadband detector, covering
the entire repeater band where the repeater is operational.
This attribute can be used to see if there is other equipment in the frequency band causing the input of the
repeater to be blocked, and hence decreasing the repeater performance.
Format:
X
X = 0 means that the input in the uplink is OK and X = 1 means that there is a strong input signal in the
uplink, causing the input to be blocked.
Example:
GET IOU
Replies:
1
meaning that a radio source is injecting a strong signal in the uplink path, causing the repeater performance
to be decreased. If the repeater stays in this stage for a long time, a visit to the site is necessary, in order to
find the cause for the alarm.
3.50
IPL - Input Level

Displays the maximum input power of the last sampled frame. The input power is continuously sampled,
and the highest value each second is saved in the controller on a chain by chain basis.
Reply format in 2-channel repeaters:
X Y Z W
where value is input level in dBm

X is input level in chain 1 UL
Y is input level in chain 2 UL
Z is input level in chain 1 DL
W is input level in chain 2 DL
If a value is below lowest detectable value, '-110' is reported
Example:
GET IPL
Reply:
110 -77 -59 -110
This means chain 1 UL is lower than lowest detectable, Uplink 2 has 77 dBm, chain 1 DL has 59 dBm
and chain 2 DL is lower than lowest detectable level.
Avitec AB
February 2005
31 (102)
X Y Z W K L M N

X is input level in chain 1 UL
Y is input level in chain 2 UL
Z is input level in chain 3 UL
W is input level in chain 4 UL
K is input level in chain 1 DL
L is input level in chain 2 DL
M is input level in chain 3 DL
N is input level in chain 4 DL.
If a value is below lowest detectable level, '-110' is reported
Example:
GET IPL
Reply:
82 -56 -110 -110 -66 -110 -110 -110
This means chain 1 UL has -82 dBm, chain 2 UL has -56 dBm, 1 DL has -66 dBm, and all other chain has
input level lower than lowest detectable level.
3.51
LAI - Last Antenna Isolation Measurement Level

This attribute is used to read out the last antenna isolation measurement. The antenna isolation
measurements can be configured to be scheduled on a certain time of the day (using the attribute AIT).
Format:
<Last Status> <Isolation> <BCCH Channel> <Listener Channel> <HHMMSS>
<DDMMYYMM>
If measure has never been done, a - (dash) is replied, otherwise

<Last Status> determines the status of the last antenna isolation measurement, 0 is OK 1 is ERROR or - if
last measurement for some reason failed (failure cause is read out with attribute LAR).
<Isolation> displays the measured isolation in dB. If last measurement failed, a - is reported.
<BCCH Channel> displays the BCCH channel used during the measurements.
<Listener Channel> displays the listener channel used during the measurements.
<HHMMSS> displays timepoint when last measurement was performed. If no measurements have been
performed, a - is reported.
<DDMMYY> is the date when last measurement was performed. If no measurements have been
performed, a - is reported.
Example 1:
GET LAI
Returns:
- - 17 42 - -
means that no antenna measurement has been completed since system startup.
Example 2:
GET LAI
Returns:
- - 17 42 020306 023000
means that last measurement was attempted at 02.30 AM the 2nd March 2003, but that measurement
failed. Failure cause should be read out with attribute LAR.
Example 3:
GET LAI
Returns:
1 73 17 42 020306 023000
Avitec AB
February 2005
32 (102)
means that last measurement was

completed at 02.30 AM the 2nd March 2003, and measurement showed that antenna is 73 dBm, which in
this case is too low, and considered an ERROR.
etc).
3.52
LAR - Last Antenna Isolation Measurement Reply

This attribute is used to read out a reply string with additional information about last antenna isolation,
including failure cause when failing to perform a measurement.
Format:
<Text>
<Text> is a quoted string, in clear. If no information is available, a - (dash) is replied.

Example:
GET LAR
Returns:
BCCH input on channel 42 too low.
In this example, another BCCH channel might be required in order to perform the antenna isolation
measurement successfully.
etc).
3.53
LLN - Log Length

Format:
X
Where is the number of log entries in the alarm log.

Example:
GET LLN
Returns:
17
means that there are 17 alarms that can be read out from the alarm log, starting with log item 1.
3.54
LIT - Log Item

Format:
GET LIT M
Reads alarm log entry number M.

Reply format:
X Y N A S C K R B Text
X = Time on the format HHMMSS

Y = Data on the format DDMMYY
N = Message Number of Alarm Message 0 to 99999
A = Attribute Name SZU, SZD, AMU . Please refer to section Alarm Attribute Configuration for an
overview of available alarm.
S = Severity WA, CR, MI.
C = Class EN, EQ, CO
K = Acknowledged 0 = No, 1 = Yes
Avitec AB
February 2005
33 (102)
R = Number of Retransmissions
B = Attribute i.e. 00, 1, 1100
Text = Additional information about the alarm entry within double quotes up to 45 characters long, for
example Current out level is +26 dBm. This textual information applies to when the alarm occurred.
Note! If no log entry exists in log, an empty string is replied.
3.55
LMT - Timeout in Minutes

Format:
X
If a logged in user does not perform any activity within LMT minutes, the control module will initiate an
automatic logout.
Example:
GET LMT
Reply:
20
meaning that the user will be logged out after 20 minutes of inactivity.
Example:
SET LMT 15
Changes this time to 15 minutes.

3.56
LNK - Link Channel

This parameter is used to configure the link channels used between Donor and Remote units.
Format on setting link:
SET LNK K X [L Y] [M Z] [N W]
Where K is the chain selector, and X is the link channel in chain K (both uplink and downlink). Depending
on repeater the chain selector is 1 or 2 (2-channel repeaters) or 1 to 4 (4-channel repeaters ). Optionally link
channels in chain L, M, N can be set in the same command.
Link channel must be within the interval that the repeater can handle. Link channel limits can be
determined by using attribute CHL.
Example:
SET LNK 2 64
Sets link channel in uplink and downlink chain 2 to 64.

Example:
SET LNK 1 562 3 570
Sets link channel one to 562 and 2 to 570.

Format on getting parameters in 2 channel repeaters:
GET LNK
Replies:
1 X 2 Y
X is link channel 1, Y is link channel 2

Example:
GET LNK
Reply:
1 47 2 11
means that link channel in chain 1 is 47 and chain 2 is set to 11.

GET LNK
Avitec AB
February 2005
34 (102)
Replies:
1 X 2 Y 3 Z 4 W
X is link channel 1, Y is link channel 2, Z is link channel 3 and W is link channel 4.

Example:
GET LNK
Reply:
1 610 2 615 3 630 4 637
means that link channel in chain 1 is 610, chain 2 is set to 615, 3 is set to 630 and link channel four is set to
637.
Note! If changes are made to a Remote Unit via remote login over wireless modem, changing this
parameter might cause the call to be dropped, since the Remote and Donor units get different link channels.
If a frequency re-tuning of a repeater pair should be performed, first change the Remote link channels, then
the Donor link channels. After that, change the Remote channels and finally the Donor channels.
3.57
LPC - Last Power Cycling of Modem

The controller can be configured to automatically turn off and turn on the modem once per day. This
feature can be used to ensure that the modem parameters when using for example GSM modems contain
the latest network parameters such as HLR update interval etc.
This attribute displays when last power cycling of the modem was performed.
Format:
HHMMSS DDMMYY
HHMMSS is the timepoint, with 24 hours notation, and DDMMYY is the date when last modem power
cycling (more precisely last modem power ON) was performed.
Example:
GET LPC
Reply:
201300 110503
indicating that the modem was last power cycled on 11th of May 2003 at 20:13.
Attribute MPE is used to configure if automatic modem power cycling should be enabled.
Timepoint for when to power cycling the modem can be set with attribute MPT. In order to read out Last
modem Power Cycling timepoint, use attribute LPC.
In order to perform an instant modem power cycling, please refer to attribute ACT RCD in section
Miscellaneous Command Attributes
3.58
LVD - Peak Power Out level Downlink

This attribute is used to control the peak power limiting in the downlink path.
Format on setting peak power:
SET LVD K X [L Y] [M Z] [N W]
K is the chain selector, and X is the maximum peak power (outlevel) in the downlink chain before the ALC
is activated. Optionally peak power in chain L, M, N can be set in the same command.
The chain selector is 1 or 2 in 2-repeaters, and 1 to 4 in 4-channel repeaters.
Depending on repeater model, the different valid peak powers in dBm are:
2-channel conventional repeaters:
37, 34, 31, -100
4-channel conventional repeaters:
34, 31, 28, -100
2-channel Frequency Translating ER units: 43, 40, 37, -100
2-channel Frequency Translating IR units: 40, 37, 34, -100
2-channel Frequency Translating SD units: 37, 34, 31, -100
Avitec AB
February 2005
35 (102)
2-channel Frequency Translating DD units: 37, 34, 31, -100

4-channel Frequency Translating ER units: 40, 37, 34, -100
4-channel Frequency Translating IR units: 37, 34, 31, -100
4-channel Frequency Translating SD units: 34, 31, 28, -100
4-channel Frequency Translating DD units: 34, 31, 28, -100
2-channel Fiber Fed repeaters:
37, 34, 31, -100
34, 31, 28, -100
Output power -100 means output power is turned off.
Example:
SET LVD 1 43 2 43
sets chain 1 and chain 2 peak limiting to 43 dBm.

GET LVD
Replies:
1 X 2 Y
X is out level in downlink chain 1 and Y is out level in downlink chain 2.

Example:
GET LVD
Reply:
1 37 2 -100
meaning that Peak Limiting is set to 37 dBm in chain one, while chain 2 has output power turned off.
GET LVD
Replies:
1 X 2 Y 3 Z 4 W
X is out level in downlink chain 1, Y is out level in downlink chain 2, Z is out level in downlink chain 3
and W is outlevel in chain 4.
Example:
GET LVD
Reply:
1 34 2 34 3 34 4 -100
meaning that Peak Limiting is set to 34 dBm in chain 1, chain 2 and chain 3, while chain 4 has output
power turned off.
3.59
LVU - Peak Power Out level Uplink

This attribute is used to control the peak power limiting in the uplink path.
Format on setting peak power:
SET LVU K X [L Y] [M Z] [N W]
K is the chain selector, and X is the maximum peak power (outlevel) in the uplink chain before the ALC is
activated. Optionally peak power in chain L, M, N can be set in the same command.
The chain selector is 1 or 2 in 2-channel and frequency translating repeaters, and 1 to 4 in 4-channel
repeaters.
Depending on repeater model, the different valid peak powers in dBm are:
2-channel Frequency Translating ER, -IR units:
2-channel Frequency Translating SD units:
2-channel Frequency Translating DD units:
4-channel Frequency Translating ER, -IR units:
4-channel Frequency Translating SD units:
Avitec AB
37, 34, 31, -100

34, 31, 28, -100
37, 34, 31, -100
-10, -13, -16, -100
-7, -10, -13, -100
34, 31, 28, -100
-13, -10, -7, -100
February 2005
36 (102)
4-channel Frequency Translating DD units:

-10, -13, -16, -100

-1, -4, -7, -100 (-1 is not a recommended setting)
-4, -7, -10, -100
Output power -100 means output power is turned off.

Example:
SET LVU 1 34 2 34
sets chain 1 and chain 2 peak limiting to 34 dBm.

GET LVU
Replies:
1 X 2 Y
X is out level in uplink chain 1 and Y is out level in uplink chain 2.

Example:
GET LVU
Reply:
1 37 2 -100
meaning that Peak Limiting is set to 37 dBm in chain one, while chain 2 has output power turned off.
GET LVU
Replies:
1 X 2 Y 3 Z 4 W
X is out level in uplink chain 1, Y is out level in uplink chain 2, Z is out level in uplink chain 3 and W is
outlevel in uplink chain 4.
Example:
GET LVU
Reply:
1 34 2 34 3 34 4 -100
meaning that Peak Limiting is set to 34 dBm in chain 1, chain 2 and chain 3, while chain 4 has output
power turned off.
3.60
MAD - Main Address

When SMS is used for communication, the controller contains a list of four addresses that are allowed to
read and write attributes from the controller (refer to attribute ADD for a description of how to modify the
list). All addresses have read access to the controller, but only address one and two can set parameters and
perform ACT commands. However, alarms and reports are always sent to the main address. Main Address
select which one of the four addresses in the list is the main address.
Format:
X
X is 1 to 4.
Example:
GET MAD
Reply:
3
means that address number three is the main address.

Example:
SET MAD 2
Changes main address to two.

Note! When communication is done via Data Call (refer to attribute DEV), attribute MAD is obsolete.
Avitec AB
February 2005
37 (102)
3.61
MAR - Minimum Alarm Repetition Cycle

If there is an alarm toggling between OK and ERROR, the controller will continuously send alarms to the
OMC, with the new alarm detected, and then directly end of alarm, causing the communications interface
between the controller and the OMC to be blocked for a long time. If lots of alarms are received at the
OMC, the operator must be able to send a message to disable the particular alarm at the controller until
service of the unit has been performed. The Minimum Alarm Repetition Cycle takes care of this problem
by defining a minimum time between two consecutive alarms from the same alarm source. Typically the
MAR should be set to a minimum of two or three times the time it takes for the controller to report the
alarm to the OMC.
Format:
X
X is the Minimum Alarm Repetition Cycle in minutes.

Example:
GET MAR
Reply:
3
meaning that the minimum time between two consecutive alarms is three minutes.
Example:
SET MAR 4
changes this interval to four minutes.

Note! The first error will always be detected with the normal Threshold time, only the repeated alarms will
be blocked/delayed.
3.62
MCT - Modem Connection Time

When a repeater is answering an incoming modem call, or calling up the OMC to deliver an alarm or a
report, the controller will wait up to MCT seconds for the call to be established. If no communication is
established within this time, the call will be hung up.
Format:
X
X is the connection time in seconds.

Example:
GET MCT
Reply:
45
meaning that the repeater will wait up to 45 seconds for a call to be established.
Example:
SET MCT 50
changes the timeout to 50 seconds.

3.63
MDL - Repeater Model

This attribute returns a string containing the repeater model.
The repeater model is built up of a number of fields, uniquely identifying the repeater model:
Format:
[Model][GSM System][Repeater Series][Number of channels][Optional Frequency
Band Configuration][Optional Repeater Configuration]
Avitec AB
February 2005
38 (102)
[Model] is CSR for conventional repeaters, CSF for Fiber Fed repeaters and CSFT for Frequency
Translating repeaters (in band and band shifting).
[GSM System] is 9 for GSM900 and GSM-R, 18 for DCS1800 and 19 for PCS1900.
For Band Translating repeaters, combination repeated band and link band denotes the [GSM System]
parameter. 918 is a GSM900 repeater with DCS1800 link, 189 is a DCS1800 repeater with GSM900
link, 98 is a GSM900 repeater with link on GSM850.
[Repeater Series] is always set to 2
[Number of channels] is number of channels the repeater is capable of amplifying, 2 or 4.
[Optional Frequency Band Configuration] If repeater is used in the GSM-R band, this is set to R, and if
repeater is used in the E-GSM band, this is set to E.
[Optional Repeater Configuration] If this is a Frequency translating repeater (CSFT), the following
identifiers apply:
-SD, meaning this repeater has a Single BTS port, and is a Donor unit.
-DD, meaning this repeater has Dual BTS ports, channels Duplexed, and is a Donor unit.
-IR, meaning this repeater has Internal combiner for sever antenna, and is a Remote unit.
-ER, meaning this repeater has External (air) combiner for sever antenna, and is a Remote unit.
Example 1:
GET MDL
Replies:
CSFT922R-DD
meaning that this is a frequency translating (CSFT) 2-channel repeater in the GSM-R band with Dual BTS
ports, channels Duplexed, and is a Donor unit.
Example 2:
GET MDL
Replies:
CSF1824
meaning that this is a Fiber Optic fed repeater in the DCS1800 band, capable of repeating up to 4 channels.
Note! As an exception to the above, Band Shifting repeater CSFT18922 always have link capabilities on
the GSM-E band, without having the [Optional Frequency Band] set to E.
3.64
MGA - Maximum Gain

Returns maximum gain in repeater.
Format:
X
X is maximum gain in dB.

Example:
GET MGA
Reply:
108
meaning that maximum gain in the repeater is 108 dB.

Note 1! This attribute only replies with maximum gain that the repeater is able to give, not what it is
currently configured for.
Note 2! Please refer to attribute RFP for detailed description about the gain distribution in the repeater.
3.65
MIS - Modem Initialization String
Avitec AB
February 2005
39 (102)
In order for some modems to work correctly in a network, they might require different configurations. The
configuration is modified with this attribute.
Format:
<String>
<string> is the actual modem initialization string.

Example:
GET MIS
Reply:
AT+CBST=7,0,1
which is the modem specific modem initialization string.

Example:
SET MIS AT+CBST=71,0,1
modifies the modem initialization string.

Note 1! Modem string must NOT contain any white space (blanks).
Note 2! The changes will not take effect until the user logs out from the controller. As soon as the user logs
out, the initialization of the modem will be initiated.
3.66
MPE - Automatic Modem Power Cycling Enabled

the latest network parameters such as HLR update interval etc. This attribute configures whether automatic
power cycling should be enabled or not.
Format:
X
X = 1 means modem power cycling is enabled

X = 0 means modem power cycling is disabled
Example:
GET MPE
Reply:
1
means that the modem power cycling is enabled.

Example:
SET MPE 0
disables the automatic modem power cycling.

Timepoint for when to power cycling the modem can be set with attribute MPT. In order to read out Last
modem Power Cycling timepoint, use attribute LPC. In order to perform an instant modem power cycling,
please refer to attribute ACT RCD in section Miscellaneous Command Attributes.
3.67
MPT - Automatic Modem Power Cycling Timepoint

the latest network parameters such as HLR update interval etc. This attribute configures at what timepoint
the modem power cycling should be performed.
Format:
HHMMSS
HH is the hours (in 24 hour notation), MM is minutes and SS is seconds specifying the modem power
cycling timepoint.
Avitec AB
February 2005
40 (102)
Example:
GET MPC
Reply:
010000
means that the modem power cycling is performed att one in the morning.
Example:
SET MPC 160000
configures modem power cycling to be performed at 4 in the afternoon.

Enabling / Disabling of the automatic power cycling can be configured with attribute MPE. Timepoint for
when to power cycling the modem can be set with attribute MPT. In order to read out Last modem Power
Cycling timepoint, use attribute LPC. In order to perform an instant modem power cycling, please refer to
attribute ACT RCD in section Miscellaneous Command Attributes.
3.68
MNR - Maximum Number of Alarm Retransmissions

Every alarm is sent to the OMC up to MNR number of times, or until it is acknowledged. The alarms are
retransmitted with RCA minutes intervals. When using data call, an alarm is considered acknowledged
when the controller has successfully logged in to the OMC, and delivered the alarm. In case of SMS, an
alarm is considered acknowledged when an acknowledge message is received from the main address.
The alarms can also be acknowledged with the command ACT ACK when logged in locally or remotely.
Example:
SET MNR 4
Sets the number of retransmissions to 4.

3.69
MRR - Maximum Report Retransmission

Every heartbeat and traffic / activity report is sent to the OMC up to MRR number of times, or until it is
successfully delivered. The reports are retransmitted with RCR minutes intervals. When using data call,
report is considered successfully delivered when the controller has successfully logged in to the OMC, and
delivered the report. In case of SMS, report is considered successfully delivered when it has been
successfully transmitted to the SMSC.
Format:
X
X is interval in minutes.
Example:
GET MRR
Reply:
3
meaning that the repeater will try to retransmit a failed report 3 times.
Example:
SET MRR 2
Sets the number of retransmissions to 2.

3.70
MSG - Message Counter

When a message (alarm, SMS-reply or report) is sent to the Avitec Element Manager, the message contains
a message number. This message number is increased for every message sent (except for alarm and report
retransmission). If the controller is communicating via SMS, all four addresses (as read by attribute ADD)
have their own counter.
Avitec AB
February 2005
41 (102)
The MSG attribute is used to receive the list of these four counters.
Format on getting parameters:
1 X 2 Y 3 Z 4 W
X, Y, Z and W are the individual counters 1 4.

Example:
GET MSG
Reply:
1 00167 2 03421 3 00032 4 00000
indicating the different counters for addresses 1 to 4.

Format on setting value:
X M
X is the counter to modify, and M is the new value.

X is from 1 to 4, and M is from 0 to 99999
Example:
SET MSG 4 234
Sets the value of counter 4 to 234.

Note 1! Counters are wrap around, i.e. when reaching 99999, next value is 0.
Note 2! When an address is changed (SET ADD), corresponding counter is cleared.
Note 3! When using data call, only counter 1 is used for the alarm and report message numbers.
3.71
MTP - Modem Type

Attribute is used to determine/configure what modem type installed in the repeater.
Format:
<Modem Description>
<Modem Description> is one of

WAVECOM
INTEGRA
STANDARD
TRIOEXT
WAVECOM is the external Wavecom GSM module
INTEGRA is the on-board Wavecom GSM module
STANDARD is a normal Standard Hayes compatible modem
TRIOEXT is the TrioRail external GSM-R modem. (only available in GSM-R repeaters).
If remote communication is disabled (using command SET DEV NUL), the string Modem disabled is
returned.
When setting the modem type, the same names are used. For the standard modem, the short form STD can
be used.
Example:
SET MTP STD
sets the modem type to Standard Hayes compatible modem.

3.72
NCH - Number of Channels

Returns the number of channels the repeater is capable of repeating.
Example:
GET NCH
Replies:
Avitec AB
February 2005
42 (102)
meaning that the repeater is capable of repeating 2 channels.

3.73
NCT - Network Connect Time

This attribute is used to configure how long to wait before trying to initialize a modem after power up or a
modem power cycle.
Format:
X
X is in seconds.
Example:
GET NCT
Reply:
15
meaning modem connect time is set to 15 seconds.

Example:
SET NCT 30
Sets this time to 30 seconds.

3.74
NOL - Number of Successful Logins

Format:
X Y
X is number of successful logins locally, and Y is number of successful logins remotely

Example:
GET NOL
Reply:
55 123
means that 55 successful and 123 successful remote logins have been made.
3.75
NUA - Next Un-acknowledged Alarm

This attribute gives the next non-acknowledged alarm in the alarm log. If no alarm exists, a - is replied.
Format:
<Alarm No> <DDMMYY> <HHMMSS> <Parameters> <Severity> <Class> <Attribute>
<Textual description>
Example:
GET NUA
Reply:
00042 101202 145523 PW2 CR EQ 1 Current power level is 0.0 V
Please refer to ACT ACK in section Miscellaneous Command Attributes for details on how to
acknowledge alarms.
3.76
OLV - Optical Levels

By using this attribute, transmitted and received optical level for the Fiber Optic Interface can be obtained.
Format:
<Tx> <Rx>
Avitec AB
February 2005
43 (102)
<Tx> represents the dBm value of transmitted optical level

<Rx> represents the dBm value of the received optical level
If there is a communications error with the Fiber Optic Interface, - - (two dashes separated by a blank) is
replied.
If input signal is lover than lowest detectable value, <X is replied, where X is lowest detectable level for the
Fiber Optic Interface.
Example:
GET OLV
Reply:
-5 11
meaning that transmitted optical level is -5 dBm and received optical level is -11 dBm.
Note! This attribute is only used in Fiber Optic repeaters.
3.77
OPL - Output Levels

Displays the maximum output power of the last sampled frame. The output power is continuously sampled,
and the highest value each second is saved in the controller on a chain by chain basis.
X Y Z W
where value is output level in dBm

X is output level in chain 1 UL
Y is output level in chain 2 UL.
Z is output level in chain 1 DL.
W is output level in chain 2 DL.
If a value is below lowest detectable level, '<X' is reported, where X is the lowest detectable level ( this and
other radio performance related parameters can be read using attribute RFP ).
Example:
GET OPL
Reply:
<12 <12 39 32
This means chain 1 UL and 2 UL is lower than lowest detectable level (12 dBm), chain 1 DL has 39 dBm
output power level and chain 2 DL has 32 dBm output power.
X Y Z W K L M N

X is output level in chain 1 UL
Y is output level in chain 2 UL
Z is output level in chain 3 UL.
W is output level in chain 4 UL
K is output level in chain 1 DL
L is output level in chain 2 DL
M is output level in chain 3 DL
N is output level in chain 4 DL
If a value is below lowest detectable level, '<X' is reported, where X is the lowest detectable level ( this and
other radio performance related parameters can be read using attribute RFP ).
Example:
GET OPL
Reply:
<12 27 <12 <12 37 32 35 <12
Avitec AB
February 2005
44 (102)
This means that chain 1 UL, 3 UL, 4 UL and 4 DL has output level lower than lowest detectable level
(12dBm), 2 UL has an output power of 27 dBm. Output power in 1 DL is 37 dBm, 2 DL is 32 dBm and
outlevel in 3 DL is 35 dBm.
3.78
ORP - OMC to Controller Password
Attribute type: Write only

When the controller is configured to use data call for configuration and alarm transmission, the OMC have
a unique password to log in to the controller, together with a unique username, OMCUNAME.
Format:
SET ORP MMMMMMMM
MMMMMMM is a password, up to 8 characters long.

Note 1!. If data call is used, this password should be changed from the Avitec Element Manager.
If SMS is used, this password should be changed to avoid unauthorized access to the controller.
Note 2!. This login will NOT cause any VLI, LGO or CLR alarms to be sent.
Note 3!. When logging in with this user ID, Terminal Mode is automatically set to 1.
3.79
PDC - Power Downlink measurement Configuration

This attribute is used to configure the way the BCCH is measured.
By default, all repeaters measure the BCCH only on chain one. By changing this attribute, the BCCH can
be measured on other channels as well.
When BCCH is measured on more than one chain, the repeater will always make sure that at least one of
the chains have an output power above threshold configured with ALA PDL attribute.
This attribute can be used to maintain BCCH monitoring in network where BTS uses the second TRX as a
backup for TRX one. Furthermore, this attribute can be used in systems where more than one cell feeds the
repeater, for Example two BTSs with two TRXs feeds one four channel repeater. Measurements can be
used to ensure that the signal from both BTSs / cells are sufficiently high.
Note1! By changing this attribute, all PDL alarm sources will be reset. If a PDL alarm was detected, an end
of alarm will be generated, and, if BCCH still is too low, a new PDL alarm after the configured time.
Note 2! Setting Required on a non installed/available channel will have no effect.
Format in 2-channel repeaters:
XY
X represents chain one and Y chain two.

X, Y can be either
R as Required
E as Either
S as Skip measurements on this chain
Required means that this chain MUST have BCCH high enough.
Either means that this chain OR one of the other needs to have BCCH all the time.
Skip means that this chain is ignored in the BCCH measurements.
Example 1:
GET PDC
Reply:
RS
means that chain one must have BCCH output power, while two is ignored.
Example 2:
GET PDC
Reply:
Avitec AB
February 2005
45 (102)
EE
means that any of the two channels should have BCCH above the threshold all the time, or an alarm will be
triggered
Example:
SET PDC RS
configures the repeater to require BCCH output power on chain one, while chain two is ignored.
XYZW
X represents chain one, Y chain two, Z chain three and W chain 4.

X, Y can be either
R as Required
E as Either
S as Skip measurements on this chain
Required means that this chain MUST have BCCH high enough.
Either means that this chain OR one of the other needs to have BCCH all the time.
Skip means that this chain is ignored in the BCCH measurements.
Example 1:
GET PDC
Reply:
RSRS
means that chain one and three must have BCCH output power, while two and four are ignored.
Example 2:
GET PDC
Reply:
EEEE
means that any of the four channels should have BCCH above the threshold all the time, or an alarm will be
triggered
Example:
SET PDC RSSS
configures the repeater to require BCCH output power on chain one, while chains two through four are
ignored.
3.80
PDL - Power Downlink Level

Status of BCCH output power measurement in the downlink chains.
XY
X represents the BCCH status for chain 1 and Y for chain 2.

1 means that output power in BCCH is lower than the configured threshold (configured with attribute ALA
PDL)
0 means that output power level is OK.
If measurement (configurable with attribute PDC) shouldnt be performed on chain, a - is reported.
If PDC for the chains are set to Either, and none of the chains reports output power, all configured chains
will report 1 (Error).
Example 1:
GET PDL
Reply:
00
meaning that output power of BCCH is OK on chains one and two.
Avitec AB
February 2005
46 (102)
Example 2, PDC is configured as RS:

GET PDL
Reply:
1-
meaning that BCCH in chain one requires BCCH above a certain threshold, but chain reports a BCCH
alarm.
XYZW
X represents the BCCH status for chain 1, Y for chain 2, Z for chain 3 and W for chain 4.
1 means that output power in BCCH is lower than the configured threshold (configured with attribute ALA
PDL)
0 means that output power level is OK.
If measurement (configurable with attribute PDC) shouldnt be performed on chain, a - is reported.
If PDC for the chains are set to Either, and none of the chains reports output power, all configured chains
will report 1 (Error).
Example 1:
GET PDL
Reply:
00--
meaning that output power of BCCH is OK on chains one and two, and that chains three and four are
configured as Skip in the PDC attribute.
Example 2, PDC is configured as RSRS:
GET PDL
Reply:
0-1-
meaning that BCCH in chain one and three requires BCCH above a certain threshold, but chain three
reports a BCCH alarm.
3.81
PIN - Sets the PIN Code Used to Lock Up GSM Module

Sets the PIN code associated with the SIM card in the GSM module.
Format:
SET PIN XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX is a number, up to 8 characters long, representing the PIN code of the SIM card.
Note! If wrong PIN code is entered, the controller will only try to open it up once. After that it will not try
to lock it up again until the PIN code is changed. This is to avoid that the SIM card is blocked if wrong PIN
code is enabled.
3.82
PLB - Level of BCCH output power in Downlink

This attribute displays BCCH output power in the downlink channels.
By default, the BCCH is monitored in downlink chain one. However, for special purposes, the BCCH can
be configured to be monitored in other chains (see attribute PDC).
X Y
X, Y is the BCCH output power in dBm for downlink chains 1 DL and 2 DL.
If BCCH is not measured in chain, a - (dash) is reported. If value is lower than lowest detectable value, a
<X will be replied, where X is lowest detectable output power of the repeater.
Example:
Avitec AB
February 2005
47 (102)
GET PLB
Reply:
33
meaning that output power in chain one downlink is 33 dBm, while chain two not is configured for BCCH
downlink measurement.
X Y Z W
X, Y is the BCCH output power in dBm for downlink chains 1 DL, 2 DL, 3 DL and 4 DL.
If BCCH is not measured in chain, a - (dash) is reported. If value is lower than lowest detectable value, a
<X will be replied, where X is lowest detectable output power of the repeater.
Example:
GET PLB
Reply:
33 <12 -
meaning that output power in chain one downlink is 33 dBm, while chain two is not configured for BCCH
downlink measurement, chain 3 has less than 12 dBm and downlink chain 4 is not configured for BCCH
measurements.
3.83
PSD - Power Supply Distribution Levels

This attribute is used to read out the snapshot power supply levels in all the modules in the repeater.
Format in 2-channel conventional and frequency shifting repeaters:
<P1PSUP> <P1LIMPAUL> <P1LIMPADL> <P2PSUP> <P2LIMPAUL> <P2LIMPADL> <P3PSUP>
<P3LIMPAUL> <P3LIMPADL> <P3REFGEN> <P4>
<P1PSUP> is the +28 V measured in the Power Supply

<P1LIMPAUL> is the +28 V measured in LIMPA UL
<P1LIMPADL> is the +28 V measured in LIMPA DL
<P2LIMPAUL> is the +15 V measured in the LIMPA UL
<P2LIMPADL> is the +15 V measured in the LIMPA DL
<P3PSUP> is the +6.45 V measured in the Power Supply
<P3LIMPAUL> is the +6.45 V measured in the LIMPA UL
<P3LIMPADL> is the +6.45 V measured in the LIMPA DL
<P3REFGEN> is the +6.45 V measured in the Reference Generator
<P4> is the +6.45 V to the controller, measured in the Power Supply
If communication between the controller and the module where voltage is measured is in error, a - is
reported.
Example:
+28.0 +28.1 - +15.1 +15.1 - +6.5 +6.5 - +6.4
This shows the different power supply levels in the modules, except for power supply levels in LIMPA DL,
which has a communications failure.
Format in conventional and frequency shifting 4-channel repeaters:
<P1MasterPSUP> <P1SlavePSUP ><P1LIMPAUL 1> <P1LIMPAUL 2> <P1LIMPADL 1>
<P1LIMPADL 2> <P2MasterPSUP> <P2SlavePSUP > <P2LIMPAUL 1> <P2LIMPAUL 2>
<P2LIMPADL 1> <P2IMPADL 2> <P3MasterPSUP> <P3SlavePSUP> <P3LIMPAUL 1>
<P3LIMPAUL 2> <P3LIMPADL 1> <P3LIMPADL 1> <P3RefGen> <P4>
<P1MasterPSUP> is the +28 V measured in the Master Power Supply

<P1SlavePSUP> is the +28 V measured in the Slave Power Supply
<P1LIMPAUL 1> is the +28 V measured in LIMPA UL 1
<P1LIMPADL 1> is the +28 V measured in LIMPA DL 1
Avitec AB
February 2005
48 (102)

<P2LIMPAUL 1> is the +15 V measured in the LIMPA UL 1
<P2LIMPADL 1> is the +15 V measured in the LIMPA DL 1
<P3MasterPSUP> is the +6.45 V measured in the Master Power Supply
<P3SlavePSUP> is the +6.45 V measured in the Slave Power Supply
<P3LIMPAUL 1> is the +6.45 V measured in the LIMPA UL 1
<P3LIMPADL 1> is the +6.45 V measured in the LIMPA DL 1
reported.
Example:
+28.0 +0.0 +28.0 +0.0 +28.1 +0.0 +15.1 +14.9 +15.1 +14.9 +15.1 +14.9 +6.5
+6.5 +6.5 +6.5 +6.4 +6.5 +6.4 +6.5
This shows the different power supply levels in the modules. In the Example, 0.0 Volts is measured at the
+28 V in the Slave Power Supply, LIMPA UL 2 and LIMPA DL 2. This indicates that the level out from
the Slave Power Supply is broken.
Format in fiber optic 2-channel repeaters:
<P1PSUP> <P1LIMPAUL> <P1LIMPADL> <P2PSUP> <P2LIMPAUL> <P2LIMPADL>
<P2FIBEROPTIC> <P3PSUP> <P3LIMPAUL> <P3LIMPADL> <P3REFGEN> <P3FIBEROPTIC>
<P4>

<P1LIMPAUL> is the +28 V measured in LIMPA UL
<P1LIMPADL> is the +28 V measured in LIMPA DL
<P2LIMPAUL> is the +15 V measured in the LIMPA UL
<P2LIMPADL> is the +15 V measured in the LIMPA DL
<P2FIBEROPTIC> is the +15 V measured in the Fiber Optic Interface
<P3PSUP> is the +6.45 V measured in the Power Supply
<P3LIMPAUL> is the +6.45 V measured in the LIMPA UL
<P3LIMPADL> is the +6.45 V measured in the LIMPA DL
<P3FIBEROPTIC> is the +6.45 V measured in the Fiber Optic Interface
reported.
Example:
+28.0 +28.1 - +15.1 +15.1 - +15.0 +6.5 +6.5 - +6.4 +6.4
This shows the different power supply levels in the modules, except for power supply levels in LIMPA DL,
which has a communications failure.
Format in fiber optic 4-channel repeaters:
<P1MasterPSUP> <P1SlavePSUP ><P1LIMPAUL 1> <P1LIMPAUL 2> <P1LIMPADL 1>
<P1LIMPADL 2> <P2MasterPSUP> <P2SlavePSUP > <P2LIMPAUL 1> <P2LIMPAUL 2>
<P2LIMPADL 1> <P2IMPADL 2> <P3MasterPSUP> <P3SlavePSUP> <P3LIMPAUL 1>
<P3LIMPAUL 2> <P3LIMPADL 1> <P3LIMPADL 1> <P3RefGen> <P3FiberOptic> <P4>

Avitec AB
February 2005
49 (102)

<P2FIBEROPTIC> is the +15 V measured in the Fiber Optic Interface
<P3MasterPSUP> is the +6.45 V measured in the Master Power Supply
<P3SlavePSUP> is the +6.45 V measured in the Slave Power Supply
<P3FIBEROPTIC> is the +6.45 V measured in the Fiber Optic Interface
reported.
Example:
+28.0 +0.0 +28.0 +0.0 +28.1 +0.0 +15.1 +14.9 +15.1 +14.9 +15.1 +14.9 +15.0
+6.5 +6.5 +6.5 +6.5 +6.4 +6.5 +6.4 +6.4 +6.5
This shows the different power supply levels in the modules. In the Example, 0.0 Volts is measured at the
+28 V in the Slave Power Supply, LIMPA UL 2 and LIMPA DL 2. This indicates that the level out from
the Slave Power Supply is broken.
3.84
PSL - Status of Power Supply Level

The Power Supply constantly monitors the mains input power level. This can be used to generate an alarm
if repeater is experiencing a power brownout or a blackout.
Note! In order to read out current power supply level, please refer to attribute ALV.
Format:
X
X=0 means mains power level is within configured thresholds

X=1 means power level is outside allowed interval (too low or too high)
If there is a communications error with master power supply, a - (dash) is reported.
Example:
GET PSL
Replies:
1
meaning input power supply level is outside allowed interval.

3.85
PTM - Power Supply Temperature Status

The Power Supply temperature is constantly monitored, and if temperature is outside configured interval,
an alarm is generated. This attribute shows the status of the power supply temperature.
Note! In order to read out current power supply temperature, please refer to attribute ALV.
X
X = 0 means temperature OK and X = 1 means temperature is outside allowed interval.

If communication with Power Supply is in error, a - (dash) is reported.
Example:
GET PTM
Avitec AB
February 2005
50 (102)
Reply:
1
indicating that the Power Supply Temperatyre is outside allowed interval.

XY
X is temperature status for Master Power Supply.

Y is temperature status for Slave Power Supply.
0 means status is OK, and 1 means power supply temperature is outside allowed interval.
If communication with power supply is in error, a - (dash) is reported.
Example:
GET PTM
Reply:
01
indicating that the Master Power Supply temperature is OK, and that Slave Power Supply temperature is in
error.
3.86
PW1 - Status of Power 1

This is the status for the +28V Power Distribution in the repeater.
XYZ
X is status for +28 V in Power Supply

Y is status for +28 V in LIMPA UL.
Z is status for +28 V in LIMPA DL.
0 means OK
1 means Power Supply is outside allowed thresholds
- (dash) means communication with module is in error.
Note! To read out the actual level, use attribute ALV (Analog Levels) or attribute PSD (Power Supply
Distribution levels).
Example:
GET PW1
Replies:
0-1
meaning status is OK in Power Supply, there is a communications failure with LIMPA UL, and there is an
error in +28 V level to LIMPA DL.
XYZWKL
X is status for +28 V in Master Power Supply

Y is status for +28 V in Slave Power Supply
Z is status for +28 V in LIMPA UL 1.
W is status for +28 V in LIMPA UL 2.
K is status for +28 V in LIMPA DL 1.
L is status for +28 V in LIMPA DL 2.
0 means OK
Example:
GET PW1
Replies:
Avitec AB
February 2005
51 (102)
010101
meaning status is OK in Master Power Supply, LIMPA UL 1 and LIMPA DL 1 an an, there is a power
failure in Slave Power Supply, LIMPA UL 2 and LIMPA DL 2. In this Example, it seems the Slave Power
Supply is failing; leading to a power failure in the two LIMPAs fed by the slave power supply.
3.87

This is the status for the +15 V Power Distributions in the repeater.
XYZ

0 means OK
Example:
GET PW2
Replies:
0100
meaning status is OK in Power Supply and LIMPA DL and there is an error in +15 V level to LIMPA UL.
Format for 2 channel Fiber Optic fed repeaters:
XYZ

W is status for +15 V in Fiber Optic Interface.
0 means OK
Example:
GET PW2
Replies:
010
meaning status is OK in Power Supply and LIMPA DL and there is an error in +15 V level to LIMPA UL.
Format for conventional and frequency shifting 4-channel repeaters:
XYZWKL

L is status for +15 V in LIMPA DL 2
0 means OK
Avitec AB
February 2005
52 (102)
Example:
GET PW2
Replies:
010000
meaning there is an error in +15 V power supply in LIMPA UL1, and all other statuses are OK.
XYZWKLM

L is status for +15 V in LIMPA DL 2
M is status for +15 V in Fiber Optic Interface.
0 means OK
Example:
GET PW2
Replies:
0100000
meaning there is an error in +15 V power supply in LIMPA UL1, and all other statuses are OK.
3.88

This is the status for the +6.45 V Power Distribution in the repeater.
XYZW
X is status for +6.45 V in Power Supply

Y is status for +6.45 V in LIMPA UL.
Z is status for +6.45 V in LIMPA DL.
W is status for +6.45 V in Reference Generator.
0 means OK
Example:
GET PW3
Replies:
0010
meaning status is OK in Power Supply, LIMPA UL and Reference Generator and there is an error in +6.45
V supply to LIMPA DL.
Format for 2-channel Fiber Optic repeaters:
XYZWK
X is status for +6.45 V in Power Supply

Y is status for +6.45 V in LIMPA UL.
Avitec AB
February 2005
53 (102)
Z is status for +6.45 V in LIMPA DL.

W is status for +6.45 V in Reference Generator.
K is status for +6.45 V in Fiber Optic Interface.
0 means OK
Example:
GET PW3
Replies:
00100
meaning status is OK in Power Supply, LIMPA UL and Reference Generator and there is an error in +6.45
V supply to LIMPA DL.
XYZWKLM
X is status for +6.45 V in Master Power Supply

Y is status for +6.45 V in Slave Power Supply
Z is status for +6.45 V in LIMPA UL 1.
W is status for +6.45 V in LIMPA UL 2.
K is status for +6.45 V in LIMPA DL 1.
L is status for +6.45 V in LIMPA DL 2.
M is status for +6.45 V in Reference Generator.
0 means OK
Example:
GET PW3
Replies:
0010000
meaning there is an error in +6.45 V power supply in LIMPA UL2, and all other statuses are OK.
Format for 4-channel Fiber Optic repeaters:
XYZWKLM
X is status for +6.45 V in Master Power Supply

Y is status for +6.45 V in Slave Power Supply
Z is status for +6.45 V in LIMPA UL 1.
W is status for +6.45 V in LIMPA UL 2.
K is status for +6.45 V in LIMPA DL 1.
L is status for +6.45 V in LIMPA DL 2.
M is status for +6.45 V in Reference Generator.
N is status for +6.45 V in Fiber Optic Interface.
0 means OK
Example:
GET PW3
Replies:
0010000
Avitec AB
February 2005
54 (102)
meaning there is an error in +6.45 V power supply in LIMPA UL2, and all other statuses are OK.
3.89

This is the status for the +6.45 V Power Supply to the Control Module, as measured in the power supply.
Format:
X
X is status for +6.45 V Power Supply to the controller

0 means OK
- (dash) means rack is not installed / configured.
Note! To read out the actual level, use attribute ALV (Analog Levels).
Example:
GET PW4
Replies:
1
meaning that power supply to control module is outside allowed interval.

Note! Since this power supply is feeding the controller itself, if power supply is completely lost the
controller will not be up and running, and hence can not be detected / alarmed.
3.90
PWD - Set Password to Access Repeater

The repeater is accessed via four different User IDs. User ID 1 and 2 have full access to the repeaters
parameters, while users 3 and 4 only have read access to the repeater.
Attribute PWD is used to change the password associated with the different user IDs.
Format:
SET PWD X NNNNNNNN
X is the selector of what password to modify, 1 X 4

N is a password, up to 8 characters long, and NOT including white space.
Example:
SET PWD 1 AVITECAB
Modifies password number 1 to AVITECAB.

Note! To modify the corresponding user ID, please refer to attribute UID.
3.91
RCA - Repetition Cycle for non Acknowledged Alarms

Every alarm is sent to the OMC up to MNR number of times, or until it is acknowledged. The alarms are
retransmitted with RCA minutes intervals. When using data call, an alarm is considered acknowledged
when the controller has successfully logged in to the OMC, and delivered the alarm. In case of SMS, an
alarm is considered acknowledged when an acknowledge message is received from the main address.
The alarms can also be acknowledged with the command ACT ACK when logged in locally or remotely.
Format:
X
X is the interval in minutes.

Example:
GET RCA
Reply:
10
Avitec AB
February 2005
55 (102)
meaning that the interval between retransmissions is 10 minutes.

Example:
SET RCA 12
sets the interval to 12 minutes

3.92
RCH - Repetition Cycle for Heartbeat

Sets the interval for how often the heartbeat reports are sent to the repeater OMC. The heartbeat report is a
report containing all relevant status parameters of the repeater. If a report fails to be sent, it will try to
retransmit the reports with a settable interval. Refer to attributes RCR and MRR for information on how to
change the number of retransmissions and retransmit interval.
Format:
X
X is the heartbeat interval in minutes. Valid values are from 1 to 1440 minutes. Setting the interval to 0
(zero) means no heartbeat reports will be transmitted.
Example:
GET RCH
Reply:
1335
meaning that a heartbeat will be sent to the repeater OMC every 1335 minutes.
Example:
SET RCH 1400
changes this interval to 1400 minutes.

Note! As soon as the heartbeat interval is changed, and the user is logged out, a new heartbeat will be sent
to the repeater OMC, in order to cause resynchronization of the heartbeat intervals between the repeater and
the OMC.
3.93
RCR - Repetition Cycle for Reports

Every heartbeat and traffic / uplink activity report is sent to the OMC up to MRR number of times, or until
it is successfully delivered. The reports are retransmitted with RCR minutes intervals. When using data call,
report is considered successfully delivered when the controller has successfully logged in to the OMC, and
delivered the report. In case of SMS, report is considered successfully delivered when it has been
successfully transmitted to the SMSC.
Format:
X
X is the retransmit interval in minutes. Valid values for X is from 1 to 20 minutes

Example:
GET RCR
Reply:
3
meaning that the report will be retransmitted after 3 minutes.

Example:
SET RCR 2
Sets the time between retransmissions to 2 minutes.

3.94
RFP - RF Parameters

This attribute gives information about gain and gain distribution in the repeater
Avitec AB
February 2005
56 (102)
Format:
<Max Gain UL> <Max Gain DL> <PreAmp UL> <PreAmp DL> <Loss after PA UL> <Loss
after PA DL> <Lowest Detectable Output UL> <Lowest Detectable Output DL>
<Max Gain UL> <Max Gain DL> is the maximum gain in dB in Uplink and Downlink
<PreAmp UL> <PreAmp DL> is the gain in dB from the inport to the input to the LIMPAs in Uplink and
Downlink
<Loss after PA UL> <Loss after PA DL> is the loss in dB after the Power Amplifiers to the outport of the
repeater in Uplink and Downlink
<Lowest Detectable Output UL> <Lowest Detectable Output UL> is the lowest output level that the
detector in the Power Amplifiers in Uplink and Downlink.
Example:
GET RFP
Reply:
45.0 45.0 17.1 25.1 2.1 4.9 15.1 17.2
means maximum gain in repeater in Uplink and Downlink is 45.0 dBm. In uplink, the gain before the RSSI
is 17.1 dB, while the gain in downlink is 25.1 dB (an attenuation of 25.1 dB). Loss after the PA in uplink
is 2.1 dB and in downlink 4.9 dB. The lowest detectable output in the uplink is 15.1 dBm, while lowest
detectable in Downlink is 17.2 dBm.
3.95
RID - Repeater ID

The repeater ID gives the OMC (Avitec Element Manager) a way to give the each network element
(boosters, repeaters, Hubs) a unique number in the network.
Format:
XX-YY-ZZZZ
XX,YY,ZZZZ are unique numbers to identify the element.

The length of this attribute is exactly 10 characters.
Example:
GET RID
Reply:
01-01-0334
which is the unique ID for this element.

Example:
SET RID 02-01-0077
Modifies the repeater ID.

Note! If the element is installed into and controlled by the Avitec Element Manager, this attribute should
NEVER be modified. This ID is unique in the Element Manager database. Changing this ID will cause the
OMC database to be corrupt.
3.96
RLY - Relay Status

By using the attribute status of the relay can be read out.
Format:
N
N is 0 or 1
0 means that relay circuit is currently open, no alarms configured to activate relay is detected.
1 means relay circuit is closed. One or more of the alarms configured to activate the relay is detected.
Avitec AB
February 2005
57 (102)
3.97
ROP - Controller to OMC password.

When the controller is configured for data call, and the equipment is controlled from the Avitec Element
Manager, every time the controller connects to the OMC, a login is required. The username is the
equipment ID (attribute RID), and the password is set with this attribute, ROP.
Format:
NNNNNNNN
NNNNNNN is the password, up to 8 characters, no space allowed.

Example:
SET ROP REPEATER
sets the password to REPEATER.

Note! This password should normally be changed from the Element Manager, since a wrong configured
password will cause the login to the Element Manager to fail.
3.98
RSP - Repeater Status Parameters

This attribute replies with the status of all alarm sources in the repeater. The attribute can be used to quickly
get an overview of all the statuses in the repeater.
Non Fiber Optic Fed Repeaters:
Attribute replies with the status of the alarm sources:
<PDL> <ASU> <ASD> <AMU> <AMD> <SZU> <SZD> <COM>
<BAT/DOO/EX1/EX2/EX3/EX4/TEM> <IOU/IOD/AIM> <PSL> <PTM> <PW1> <PW2> <PW3>
<PW4> <WRD>
Example:
GET RSP
Reply:
0- 00 11 00 00 00 00 0000 0000 00000 0100010 000 0 0 000 000 0000 0 0
which means all parameters are OK, except door status and status of external alarm input 4.
Note! Reply on this parameter will be different depending on if this is a 2-channel or 4-channel capable
repeater.
Fiber Optic Fed Repeaters:
Attribute replies with the status of the alarm sources:
<PDL> <ASU> <ASD> <AMU> <AMD> <SZU> <SZD> <COM>
<BAT/DOO/EX1/EX2/EX3/EX4/TEM> <IOU/IOD/AIM=0> <PSL> <PTM> <PW1> <PW2> <PW3>
<PW4> <WRD> <FRX/FTX>
Example:
GET RSP
Reply:
0- 00 11 00 00 00 00 0000 0000 00000 0100010 000 0 0 000 000 0000 0 0 00
which means all parameters are OK, except door status and status of external alarm input 4.
Note! Reply on this parameter will be different depending on if this is a 2-channel or 4-channel capable
repeater.
3.99
SAC - SMS Acknowledge Configuration

This command affects controllers using SMS for alarm transmission.
SAC configures how the controller determines whether an alarm is acknowledged or not.
Format:
X
Avitec AB
February 2005
58 (102)
X can be of two values:

0 means that the alarm is considered acknowledged when an acknowledge message is received from the
OMC
1 means that an alarm is considered acknowledged when the alarm is successfully transmitted to the Short
Message Service Center (SMSC), i.e. when the message is successfully delivered to the network.
Example:
GET SAC
Reply:
0
meaning that the controller requires an acknowledge message back from the OMC (if the individual alarm
source is configured for that).
Example:
SET SAC 1
changes the behavior to consider the alarm acknowledged when the message is sent successfully to the
SMSC.
Note! This configuration will work in conjunction with the other alarm attributes (ALA XXX, RCA and
MNR).
If for example SAC is set to 1, and RCA is set to 3 and MNR 3, the controller will try to send the
message to the SMSC center up to 3 times with 3 minute intervals.
If the individual alarm source is configured to not require an acknowledge, it will only try to send it once to
the SMSC.
3.100
SFT - Secondary OMC address Fallback Timer

This configures how many minutes the controller will wait before going back to the primary address again
after calling the secondary OMC address. If this parameter is set to zero, no fallback will be done, i.e., the
controller will toggle between the addresses for every failure to deliver messages.
See also attributes SSC, ASC and command ACT UPA.
Format:
X
X is number of minutes to wait before fallback to primary OMC address.

Example:
GET SFT
Reply:
15
meaning that the controller will use the secondary address for 15 minutes before going back to normal
OMC address.
Example:
SET SFT 10
changes this value to 10 minutes.

3.101
SIS - System Information String

Compact string containing system versions and system dates. The string contains the following data,
separated by spaces
Format:
<BIOS Ver>
<PLD Ver>
<HW Version>
<SW Version>
Avitec AB
February 2005
59 (102)
<Controller Serial Number>

<Repeater Serial Number>
<System Initialization Time>
<System Initialization Date>
<Controller Initialization Time>
<Controller Initialization Date>
<Manufacturing specific information>
<Software Build Date>
<BIOS Ver> is a string delimited by (double quote) signs, containing the controller BIOS version. If no
information is available, an empty string () is replied.
<PLD Ver> is a string delimited by (double quote) signs, containing on chip specific version information.
<HW Version> is a string delimited by (double quote) signs, containing the controller hardware version.
This can also be obtained with the attribute HWV.
<SW Version> is a string delimited by (double quote) signs, containing the controller software version.
This can also be obtained with the attribute SWV.
<Controller Serial Number> reports the serial number of the controller (4 characters). If no information is
available, a - (dash) is reported.
<Repeater Serial Number> reports the serial number of the controller (4 characters). If no information is
available, a - (dash) is reported.
<System Initialization Time> contains the repeater initialization time on the format HHMMSS, with 24
hours notation. If no information is available, a - (dash) is reported.
<System Initialization Date> contains the repeater initialization date on the format DDMMYY. If no
information is available, a - (dash) is reported.
<Controller Initialization Time> contains the controller initialization time on the format HHMMSS, with
24 hours notation. If no information is available, a - (dash) is reported.
<Controller Initialization Date> contains the controller initialization date on the format DDMMYY. If no
information is available, a - (dash) is reported.
<Manufacturing specific information> is a string delimited by (double quote) signs, containing
information entered during manufacturing.
<Software Build Date> is a string delimited by (double quote) signs, containg the timepoint when the
software was built.
Example:
GET SIS
Reply:
1.11 12 H041001C 2.32 2JG5 2JF3 174200 991220 120333 991101 JK
Jan 18 2002 10:09:30
indicating that BIOS version is 1.11, PLD version is 12, hardware version is H041001C and software
version is 2.32. The control module has the serial number 2JG5, the repeater serial is 2JF3, the system
(repeater) was initialized at 17:42.00 on Dec 20, 1999, and controller was initialized at 12:03.33 on Nov 1,
1999. Factory information is JK. Finally, software was built at 18th of January 2002 at 10:09:30 AM.
3.102
SIT - System Initialization Time

Returns a string containing the system initialization time, i.e. when the controller was initialized for the first
time.
Format:
HHMMSS DDMMYY
Where HHMMSS is the time point, with 24 hours notation, and DDMMYY is the date of the initialization.
Example:
GET SIT
Reply:
164500 070498
Avitec AB
February 2005
60 (102)
indicating that the controller was initialized on 7th of April 1998 at 16:45.
3.103
SSC - Secondary Service Center Address

When controller is configured for data call, if the controller fails to dial the first service center (configured
with the attribute ASC), the controller will automatically switch over to the secondary service center
address.
If secondary address is not set, it will be neglected. Furthermore, if controller experiences problems
connecting to secondary address, it will switch back to primary address.
A fallback timer can be configured so that the controller goes back to primary address after a specified
interval. Please refer to attribute SFT for details
Note! The controller will always check if first address is set. If not, the secondary address will be ignored.
Example:
GET SSC
Reply:
118118
meaning that the secondary address is set to 118118.

Example:
SET SSC
Disables the use of a secondary address.

3.104
SUT - System Up Time

Format:
N
Returns the number of seconds that has elapsed since last system reset, or since last power up.
Example:
GET SUT
Reply:
34423
meaning that the system booted up 34 423 seconds ago.

3.105
SWV - Software Version

Format:
<String>
returns a string with the software version in the control module.

Example:
GET SWV
Reply:
2.36
meaning that the software version is 2.36.

3.106
SZD - Status of Synthesizers in Downlink Chain

This parameter returns the status of the synthesizer in the downlink path. Each LIMPA contains two chains,
and each chain contains two synthesizers. One synthesizer is for down conversion of the radio signals to the
IF frequency, and one for up conversion. The reply depends on number of installed channels / LIMPAs.
Avitec AB
February 2005
61 (102)

XYZW
X is status of In Synthesizer in Chain 1 DL (in downlink LIMPA 1)

Y is status of Out Synthesizer in Chain 1 DL (in downlink LIMPA 1)
0 indicates an OK
Example:
0100
means all synthesizers in downlink are OK, except Out Synthesizer in chain 1 DL.
XYZWKLMN

K is status of In Synthesizer in Chain 3 DL (in downlink LIMPA 2)
L is status of Out Synthesizer in Chain 3 DL (in downlink LIMPA 2)
M is status of In Synthesizer in Chain 4 DL (in downlink LIMPA 2)
N is status of Out Synthesizer in Chain 4 DL (in downlink LIMPA 2)
0 indicates an OK
Example:
00000010
means all synthesizers in downlink are OK, except In Synthesizer in chain 4 DL.
3.107
SZU - Status of Synthesizers in Uplink Chain

This parameter returns the status of the synthesizer in the uplink path. Each LIMPA contains two chains,
and each chain contains two synthesizers. One synthesizer is for down conversion of the radio signals to the
IF frequency, and one for up conversion. The reply depends on number of installed channels / LIMPAs.
Format 2 channel repeaters:
XYZW
X is status of In Synthesizer in Chain 1 UL (in uplink LIMPA 1)

Y is status of Out Synthesizer in Chain 1 UL (in uplink LIMPA 1)
0 indicates an OK
indicates an Error.
Example:
0100
means all synthesizers in uplink are OK, except Out Synthesizer in chain 1 UL.
Format 4 channel repeaters:
XYZWKLMN

Avitec AB
February 2005
62 (102)

K is status of In Synthesizer in Chain 3 UL (in uplink LIMPA 2)
L is status of Out Synthesizer in Chain 3 UL (in uplink LIMPA 2)
M is status of In Synthesizer in Chain 4 UL (in uplink LIMPA 2)
N is status of Out Synthesizer in Chain 4 UL (in uplink LIMPA 2)
0 indicates an OK
Example:
00000010
means all synthesizers in uplink are OK, except In Synthesizer in chain 4 UL.
3.108
TAG - Equipment Tag

The tag can be used to give the equipment a unique name, for example the site name.
Format:
<String>
<String> can be up to 20 characters long, NOT containing any space. All characters will be converted to
uppercase.
Example:
GET TAG
Reply:
X3431_HIGHWAY_15
Indicating the tag associated with this equipment.

Example:
SET TAG ERNEST_HEMINGWAY
modifies the tag.

3.109
TEM - Status of Temperature

Format:
X

Example:
GET TEM
Reply:
1
meaning temperature is outside configured threshold (see attribute ALA TEM).

3.110
TIM - Time

Time of the real time clock in the repeater
Format:
HHMMSS
HH is 24-hour representation of the hours, MM is minutes, and SS is seconds.

Example:
GET TIM
Avitec AB
February 2005
63 (102)
Reply:
145000
meaning the repeater time is 10 minutes to three in the afternoon.

Example:
SET TIM 150542
modifies the time settings.

Note! If the time in the repeater is changed, as soon as the user logs out, a new heartbeat will be sent, in
order to cause resynchronization of the heartbeat intervals between the repeater and the OMC.
3.111
TMD - Terminal Mode

When logged in to the controller, either locally or remote, the output to the user can appear in two different
ways: Terminal Mode or VT100 mode. Terminal mode gives the replies back to the user on the next row,
while VT100 mode replies in the old-fashioned way, with the clock, ID and Tag etc displayed on the top of
the screen.
Terminal Mode is normally used by Avitec Maintenance Console and Avitec Element Manager.
Format:
SET TMD X
X = 0 means VT100 mode

X = 1 means Terminal mode
Example:
SET TMD 1
Switches to Terminal mode.

Note! When logging in, Terminal Mode is always defaulted to VT100 mode.
3.112
UID - User ID

The repeater is accessed via four different User IDs. User ID 1 and 2 have full access to the repeaters
parameters, while users 3 and 4 only have read access to the repeater.
Attribute UID is used to change the different user IDs.
Format:
SET UID X NNNNNNNN
X is the selector of what user ID to modify, 1 X 4.

N is a name, up to 8 characters long, and NOT including white space.
Example:
SET UID 1 KAFKA
Modifies user ID number 1 to KAFKA.

Note! To modify the corresponding password, please refer to attribute PWD.
3.113
VLD - Valid Peak Limiting Levels Downlink

This attribute replies with the valid peak limiting values settable in the downlink path of the repeater, as set
with the attribute LVD.
Format:
[Value 1] [Value 2] .. [Value N]
where the different values are in dBm. A value of -100 means that this is used to turn the output power off.
Example:
Avitec AB
February 2005
64 (102)
GET VLD
Reply:
-100 31 34 37
meaning that the different peak limiting levels possible to set are -100 (turning off output power), 31, 34
and 37 (dBm).
3.114
VLU - Valid Peak Limiting Levels Uplink

This attribute replies with the valid peak limiting values settable in the uplink path of the repeater, as set
with the attribute LVU.
Format:
[Value 1] [Value 2] .. [Value N]
where the different values are in dBm. A value of -100 means that this is used to turn the output power off.
Example:
GET VLU
Reply:
-100 28 31 34
meaning that the different peak limiting levels possible to set are -100 (turning off output power), 28, 31
and 34 (dBm).
3.115
WRD - Status of Voltage Standing Wave Ratio Downlink

The repeaters measure the VSWR on the antenna ports, and, if reflected power is too high, an alarm is
triggered. This can indicate a bad connector or a broken antenna.
Format in all repeaters except Frequency Translating ER repeaters:
X
X=0 means reflected power level in downlink is OK

X=1 means reflected power level in downlink chain is in error
X=- (dash) means there is a failure in communication between the controller and the FDM where VSWR
is measured.
Example:
GET WRD
Reply:
1
meaning that reflected power in the downlink path is outside of the allowed range (please refer to ALA
WRD for configuration).
Format in Frequency translating ER repeaters:
XY
X is status for reflected power at antenna port 1 downlink

Y is status for reflected power at antenna port 2 downlink
0 means reflected power level is OK
1 means reflected power level is in error.
- (dash) means there is a failure in communication between the controller and the FDM where VSWR is
measured.
Example:
GET WRD
Reply:
01
meaning that reflected power at antenna port 2 downlink 2 is outside of the allowed range (please refer to
ALA WRD for configuration), and port 1 is OK.
Avitec AB
February 2005
65 (102)
3.116
WRL - Voltage Standing Wave Ratio Level

Shows the return loss in the downlink at the antenna ports of the repeater.
Depending on repeater type, there are different number of antennas connected, and hence different number
of levels to display.
Format in all repeaters except Frequency Translating ER repeaters:
X
X is the return loss in dB at the server antenna (downlink path). If return loss is higher than repeater is able
to detect, a - (dash) is reported instead
Example:
GET WRL
Reply:
13
meaning that the return loss in the downlink is 13 dB.

Format for Frequency translating ER repeaters:
X Y
X is the return loss in dB at the server antenna 1 (downlink path)

Y is the return loss in dB at the server antenna 2 (downlink path).
If return loss is higher than repeater is able to detect, a - (dash) is reported instead.
Example:
GET WRL
Reply:
19 -
meaning that the return loss in downlink 1 is 19 dB and downlink 2 is not detectable.
Avitec AB
February 2005
66 (102)
4 Traffic Related GET and SET Attributes

Every 15 minutes, an average of the utilization is calculated and stored in a log. At a configurable time of
the day, the report can optionally be sent to the repeater OMC. The report consists of 96 intervals, each
interval 15 minutes long. As soon as the report is sent away, OR after measurements of the first interval of
the next day is completed, the log is cleared.
The utilization is measured in percentage:
Utilization = (Number occupied timeslots) / (Number of available timeslots) * 100
Example:
A two-channel repeater is sampled for one frame. 9 timeslots are utilized, which means Number of
occupied timeslots is increased by 9, and Number of available timeslots is increased by 16.
4.1
AIS - Active Intervals String

Reply format:
X Y MM
X is the date of the first measurement in the format DDMMYYY

Y is the time point of the start of the first interval in the measurement in the format HHMMSS
M..M shows information about the 96 intervals of 15 minutes each
M = '0' means no active timeslots were detected during the 15 minutes interval
M = '1' means the activity was detected during the interval.
M =- (dash) means interval has not been measured.
This can be used for troubleshooting if there are suspicions that a Server antenna is broken.
During startup of the repeater this string is filled with -. It is also cleared when the traffic report is
successfully delivered to the OMC.
The starting time point of the first measurement is set with the attribute TPD.
Refer to attribute TAT on how configure the thresholds for what is an active interval.
4.2
ATS - Active Timeslots

This is a snapshot of how many timeslots where detected during last sampled frame.
GET ATS
Replies:
X Y
X is the number of occupied timeslots in Uplink chain 1

Y is number of timeslots in chain 2 Uplink.
Value of X, Y is 0-8 timeslots.
If communication with LIMPA is in error, value is replaced by a dash ('-').
Example:
3 0
means that 3 timeslots were detected in chain 1, and that no timeslots where detected in chain 2 uplink.
GET ATS
Replies:
X Y Z W
Avitec AB
February 2005
67 (102)
X is the number of occupied timeslots in Uplink chain 1

Y is timeslots in chain 2 Uplink, Z is timeslots in chain 3 Uplink and W is timeslots in chain 4 Uplink.
Value of X, Y, Z , W is 0-8 timeslots.
If communication with LIMPA is in error, value is replaced by a dash ('-').
Example:
0 3 -
means that no timeslots where detected in uplink chain a, 3 timeslots were detected in chain 2, and that
there was a communications alarm with LIMPA 2 in uplink (containing chains 3 and 4).
4.3
CTI - Current Traffic Interval

Format:
GET CTI
Replies:
X
X is the Current Traffic Measurement Interval

Each Interval is 15 minutes, and the traffic is reported in 24-hour intervals.
Therefore X is between 1 and 96
The first interval starts at the time point set by attribute TPD.
4.4
LAT - Last Active Timeslot

Format:
GET LAT
Replies:
DDMMYY HHMMSS
HHMMSS is the time point, with 24 hours notation, and DDMMYY is the date of the last measured
timeslot / activity. This can be used for troubleshooting if there are suspicions that a Server antenna is
broken.
During startup of the repeater this time point is set to current time.
Example:
GET LAT
Reply:
164500 070498
indicating that last active timeslot was detected on 7th of April 1998 at 16:45.
4.5
PRF - Sending of Report

This parameter determines whether sending of traffic report is enabled or not.
Format:
X
X = 0 means sending of traffic report enabled

X = 1 means sending of traffic report disabled
Example:
GET PRF
Reply:
1
means no traffic report will be sent to the repeater OMC.
Avitec AB
February 2005
68 (102)
Example:
SET PRF 0
enables the sending of the report.

4.6
TAT - Traffic Activity Threshold

The Traffic Activity Threshold defines how many timeslots should be sampled during one traffic interval
(15 minutes) in order for the repeater to consider traffic to have passed through the repeater.
This threshold is used in conjunction with the Active Intervals String (attribute AIS.
Interval is settable from 1 to 32000, but value is defaulted to 10.
Format:
X
X determines the number of detected timeslots needed in one interval to define that traffic has been sent
through the repeater.
Note! This value is the total number of timeslots, independent of the number of channels installed in the
repeater.
Example:
GET TAT
Reply:
100
meaning that 100 timeslots are needed to define an interval as active.

Example:
SET TAT 10
changes this value to 10 timeslots.

4.7
TTL - Traffic Threshold

Threshold for traffic. This defines above what level the in signal has to be in the uplink path to be
considered traffic.
Format:
GET TTL
Replies:
X
X is the lowest signal that should be sampled on the input to be considered traffic.
Example:
GET TTL
Replies:
-85
meaning that in signal has to be 85 dBm or higher to be considered traffic.

Example:
SET TTL 80
changes this value to 80 dBm.

4.8
TPD - Timepoint of Traffic Report Transmission

This parameter sets the time of the day when the traffic report is to be sent to the repeater OMC.
Avitec AB
February 2005
69 (102)
If a report fails to be sent, the repeater will try to retransmit the reports with a settable interval. Refer to
attributes RCR and MRR for information on how to change the number of retransmissions and retransmit
interval.
Format:
HHMMSS
HH is the hour in 24-hour representation, MM is minutes and SS is seconds.

Example:
GET TPD
Reply:
031500
means that the report is sent to the repeater OMC at a quarter past three in the morning.
Example:
SET TPD 230000
Changes this time to 11 in the evening.

4.9
TRF - Traffic String

Reply format:
X Y MM
X is the date of the first measurement in the Format DDMMYYY

Y is the time point of the start of the first interval in the measurement in the format HHMMSS
M..M shows information about the 96 intervals of 15 minutes each
...
M = 'A' means a utilization of 20% to 22%
M = 'B' means a utilization of 22% to 24%
...
...
M = 'T' means a utilization of 58% to 60%
M = 'a' means a utilization of 60% to 62%
M = 'b' means a utilization of 62% to 64%
M = 't' means a utilization of 98% to 100%
If no data is available, a dash ('-') is reported.
The starting time point of the first measurement is set with the attribute TPD.
4.10
UCI - Utilization Current Interval

Gives a reply of the utilization so far in current interval.
Format:
X
X is a one decimal value of the repeater utilization.

Example:
GET UCI
Reply:
16.8
meaning 16.8% of the timeslots are used so far in the current interval.
Avitec AB
February 2005
70 (102)
4.11
ULI - Utilization Last Interval

Gives a reply of the utilization in last measured interval.
Format:
X
X is a one decimal value of the repeater utilization of the last measured interval.
Example:
GET ULI
Reply:
12.7
meaning 12.7% of the timeslots where used in the last measured 15 minutes interval.
Avitec AB
February 2005
71 (102)
5 Alarm Attribute Configuration

Format:
AAA X Y Z LLL UUU TTT
AAA is the alarm attribute to configure (see table below).

X has double functionality. It determines whether an alarm should be send if error is detected, and it also
configures whether the alarm relay should be affected by the alarm source.
X = 0 means alarm transmission enabled, but alarm doesnt affect the relay output
X = 1 means alarm transmission disabled, and does not affect the relay.
X = 2 means alarm transmission is enabled, and alarm affects the relay output.
X = 3 means alarm transmission is disabled, but alarm affects relay output
Y determines whether an alarm requires to be acknowledged or not.
(When using data call, an alarm is considered acknowledged when the controller has successfully logged in
to the OMC, and delivered the alarm. In case of SMS, an alarm is considered acknowledged when an
acknowledge message is received from the main address. The alarms can also be acknowledged with the
command ACT ACK when logged in locally or remotely. If an alarm is not acknowledged, it will be
retransmitted up to MNR (maximum number of retransmissions) times, with RCA (repetition cycle for
alarms) minutes interval. Refer to attributes MNR and RCA.)
Y = 0 means Acknowledge required
Y = 1 means No acknowledge required
Z is a threshold indicator, indicating how thresholds are used for this particular alarm source.
Z = 1 means that both thresholds are used for alarm calculation.
Z = 2 means that lower threshold is used
Z = 3 means that upper threshold is used
Z = 4 means that thresholds are ignored, i.e. digital measurement.
Note! Changing parameter Z does NOT affect the measurement of the alarm source. Z is just an indicator
of how the measurement is done, and should NEVER be changed.
LLL is the value of the lower threshold used for alarm calculation
UUU is the value of the upper threshold used for alarm calculation.
TTT is the time an alarm has to be in erroneous state before an alarm is triggered.
Example:
GET ALA TEM
Returns:
0 0 3 000 060 5
This means that alarm is enabled and acknowledge required. Upper threshold is used in measuring the
alarm, , lower threshold not set (000), 60 (degrees) is the upper threshold and that the temperature has to be
higher than 60 for 5 seconds before an alarm is triggered.
Example:
SET ALA TEM 0 0 3 0 60 20
modifies the above alarm source to generate an alarm when the temperature has been above 60 degrees for
more than 20 seconds.
The following table describes the usage of the thresholds of the different alarm sources.
5.1
AIM - Antenna Isolation Measurements
Antenna isolation measurement is performed using a special feature in the LIMPAs, allowing for output
channel to be shifted from the input channel.
Two channels are used, one BCCH channel, and one so called Listener channel. By default, these channels
are the ones configured in chain one and two, but can with attribute AIC (Antenna Isolation Measurement
Avitec AB
February 2005
72 (102)
Channels) be changed.
The measurement is automatically performed by the following steps:
1.
Output is turned of in the repeater downlink paths, except in chain 1.
2.
Channel in chain 1 is optionally changed to the alternative BCCH channel.
3.
Channel in chain 2 is optionally changed to the alternative Listener channel.
4.
Output channel in chain 1 downlink is changed to the Listener channel.
5.
Since the BCCH in chain one is transmitted as the Listener channel, we measure the input signal on
the Listener channel. Antenna isolation can now be calculated as transmitted output power in chain
one received input signal in chain two.
6.
Compare the measured signal with the alarm threshold ( ALA AIM ), and, depending on measurement
result, generate alarm or end of alarm.
7.
All radio parameters are restored to the default.
The repeater can be configured to measure the antenna isolation on a certain timepoint of the day,
configurable using attributes AIE and AIT)
All measurements in the repeater will affect the alarm transmission, meaning that a user initiated
measurement (using command ACT AIM) will also generate an alarm if isolation is outside allowed
interval.
Lower Threshold:
This is treated differently in Frequency Translating repeaters and conventional repeaters;
2- and 4-channel Conventional Repeaters:
The lower threshold determines how many dB above the gain settings in downlink chain one the isolation
must be.
Frequency Translating Repeaters:
The lower threshold shows the lowest absolute isolation in dB before an alarm is triggered.
Upper Threshold:
Not used.
Time Threshold:
This indicates how many times the antenna isolation should have been measured as outside allowed interval
before an alarm is triggered.
Note! Since the antenna isolation is scheduled for measurement once per day, it is recommended that the
value is set to one.
Example in Frequency Translating repeaters:
GET ALA AIM
Returns:
0 0 2 75 0 1
This means that alarm is enabled and acknowledge required. Lower threshold is used in calculating the
alarms. Lowest allowed antenna isolation is 75 dB, and the isolation needs to be outside allowed interval in
one measurement before the alarm is triggered.
Example in Frequency 2- and 4-channel Conventional Repeaters:
SET ALA AIM 0 0 2 20 0 1
This sets the alarm as enabled and that acknowledge is required. Lower threshold is used in calculating the
alarms. Lowest allowed antenna isolation is 20 dB above gain settings in chain 1 DL, and the isolation
needs to be outside allowed interval in one measurement before the alarm is triggered. If the gain in the
repeater is set to 84 dB, the isolation in this example must be at least 104 dB.
Note! Antenna isolation is not measured in Fiber Optic repeaters and repeaters CSFT18922 and
CSFT91822.
Avitec AB
February 2005
73 (102)
5.2
AMD - Amplifier Chain Downlink
When measuring the amplifier chains, the input signal to and output power in the chain is measured.
Depending on input signal level, the expected output power is calculated with regards to attenuation and
gain in repeater. If the expected output level is not correct, an alarm is generated..
Lower Threshold:
This indicates how many dBs the output power is allowed to drop from the expected output power before
an alarm is generated.
Upper Threshold:
This indicates how many dBs the output power is allowed to increase from the calculated output power
before an alarm is generated.
This defines how many seconds an alarm source must be in error state before an alarm is triggered.
Example:
GET ALA AMD
Reply:
0 0 1 003 003 003
meaning that output power level can be 3 dB higher or 3 dB lower than expected before an alarm is
triggered.
The amplifier chain must be measured as error for 3 seconds before alarm is triggered.
5.3
AMU - Amplifier Chain Uplink
When measuring the amplifier chains, the input signal to and output power in the chain is measured.
Depending on input signal level, the expected output power is calculated with regards to attenuation and
gain in repeater. If the expected output level is not correct, an alarm is generated..
Lower Threshold:
This indicates how many dBs the output power is allowed to drop from the expected output power before
an alarm is generated.
Upper Threshold:
This indicates how many dBs the output power is allowed to increase from the calculated output power
Time Threshold:
This defines how many seconds an alarm source must be in error state before an alarm is triggered.
Example:
GET ALA AMU
Reply:
0 0 1 003 003 003
meaning that output power level can be 3 dB higher or 3 dB lower than expected before an alarm is
triggered.
The amplifier chain must be measured as error for 3 seconds before alarm is triggered.
5.4
ASD - Amplifier Chain Saturation Downlink
The LIMPAs contain circuitry to see how far into saturation the amplifier chain has gone. As described for
the ASL attribute, the saturation can be detected in four different levels:
0 means amplifier is below optimum settings (can be due to lack of input signal)
quality.
This alarm attribute configures when a saturation alarm should be generated.
Lower Threshold:
Avitec AB
February 2005
74 (102)
Not used
Upper Threshold:
This defines what from what saturation level (0-3) an alarm situation is entered. Setting this value to 0 will
always generate an alarm.
Time Threshold:
Defines how many seconds the amplifier chain has to be in an error state before an alarm is triggered.
Example:
GET ALA ASD
Reply:
0 0 3 000 002 3
indicates that if saturation level two or higher is entered an alarm situation has occurred, and that an alarm
will be triggered after three seconds in this situation.
5.5
ASU - Amplifier Chain Saturation Uplink
The LIMPAs contain circuitry to see how far into saturation the amplifier chain has gone. As described for
the ASL attribute, the saturation can be detected in four different levels:
0 means amplifier is below optimum settings (can be due to lack of input signal)
quality.
This alarm attribute configures when a saturation alarm should be generated.
Lower Threshold:
Not used
Upper Threshold:
This defines what from what saturation level (0-3) an alarm situation is entered. Setting this value to 0 will
always generate an alarm.
Time Threshold:
Defines how many seconds the amplifier chain has to be in an error state before an alarm is triggered.
Example:
GET ALA ASU
Reply:
0 0 3 000 002 3
indicates that if saturation level two or higher is entered an alarm situation has occurred, and that an alarm
will be triggered after three seconds in this situation.
5.6
BAT - Battery for Mobile Equipment
The mobile equipment is backed up by an external battery, which contains enough power to generate an
alarm to the repeater OMC in case of a power failure.
The Battery alarm generates an alarm if the battery charge under normal conditions (no power failure)
drops below a configurable threshold, or if a too high charge is detected.
Lower Threshold:
Indicates the lower voltage level that is allowed before an alarm is generated.
The level is displayed without decimal point. Configuring lower level as 89 means that the lowest allowed
level is 8.9 Volts.
Upper Threshold:
Indicates the upper voltage level that is allowed before an alarm is generated.
The level is displayed without decimal point. Configuring upper level as 110 means that the highest
allowed level is 11.0 Volts.
Avitec AB
February 2005
75 (102)
Time Threshold:
Defines how many seconds the battery charge has to be in an error state before an alarm is triggered.
Example:
GET ALA BAT
Reply:
0 0 1 083 120 3
indicates that if the power drops below 8.3 Volts, or exceeds 12.0 Volts, an erroneous state is reached.
After 3 seconds in error state, an alarm is triggered.
5.7
CLR - Changes made by logged in user
If a user logs in to the repeater, and changes one or more of the repeater settings, an alarm can be sent to the
repeater OMC. The alarm configuration for the CLR attribute is only used to configure whether the alarm
should be sent (Enabled), and if the alarm requires an acknowledgement.
Lower Threshold:
Not Used
Upper Threshold:
Not Used
Time Threshold:
Not Used
Example
GET ALA CLR
Reply:
0 0 4 0 0 0
indicates that the alarm will be generated, and also requires an acknowledgement.
5.8
COM - Communication Between Controller and Active Devices
The COM alarm indicates if there is an error in the communication between the controller and active
devices.
This is a purely digital measurement, i.e. either the communication is OK, or in Error.
Lower Threshold:
Not Used.
Upper Threshold:
Not Used
Time Threshold:
Defines how many seconds a communications error should be detected before an alarm is generated.
Example:
GET ALA COM
Reply:
0 0 4 0 0 3
Meaning that lower and upper thresholds are ignored, and the communication must fail for 3 seconds
5.9
DOO - Door
The Door alarm is generated if the door is opened.

This is a purely digital measurement, i.e. either the door is closed (OK), or opened (Error).
Lower Threshold:
Not Used.
Avitec AB
February 2005
76 (102)
Upper Threshold:
Not Used
Time Threshold:
Defines how many seconds the door should be opened before an alarm is generated.
Example:
GET ALA DOO
Reply:
0 0 4 000 000 010
meaning that lower and upper thresholds are ignored, and the door needs to be opened for 10 seconds
before an alarm is triggered.
5.10
The external alarm allows the user to connect external alarm sources, for example fire alarms or external
door sensors to the controller.
This is a purely digital measurement, i.e. either the external alarm is OK, or in Error.
Lower Threshold:
Not Used.
Upper Threshold:
Not Used
Time Threshold:
Defines how many seconds an external alarm should be in error state before an alarm is generated.
Example:
GET ALA EX1
Reply:
0 0 4 000 000 020
Meaning that lower and upper thresholds are ignored, and the external alarm needs to be in Error state for
20 seconds before an alarm is generated.
Note! In order to configure the external alarm polarity (active high or active low), please refer to attribute
EXT.
5.11
Lower Threshold:
Not Used.
Upper Threshold:
Not Used
Time Threshold:
Example:
GET ALA EX2
Reply:
0 0 4 000 000 005
Meaning that lower and upper thresholds are ignored, and the external alarm needs to be in Error state for 5
seconds before an alarm is generated.
EXT.
Avitec AB
February 2005
77 (102)
5.12
Lower Threshold:
Not Used.
Upper Threshold:
Not Used
Time Threshold:
Example:
GET ALA EX3
Reply:
0 0 4 000 000 002
Meaning that lower and upper thresholds are ignored, and the external alarm needs to be in Error state for 2
EXT.
5.13
Lower Threshold:
Not Used.
Upper Threshold:
Not Used
Time Threshold:
Example:
GET ALA EX4
Reply:
0 0 4 000 000 010
Meaning that lower and upper thresholds are ignored, and the external alarm needs to be in Error state for
10 seconds before an alarm is generated.
EXT.
5.14
FRX - Fiber Optic Receiver
The Fiber Optic Receiver alarm is triggered when there is a failure in the Fiber Optic Interface receiver
equipment.
This is a purely digital measurement, i.e. either the receiver is OK, or broken (Error).
Lower Threshold:
Not Used.
Upper Threshold:
Not Used
Time Threshold:
Avitec AB
February 2005
78 (102)
Defines how many seconds the receiver should be in error condition opened before an alarm is generated.
Example:
GET ALA FRX
Reply:
0 0 4 000 000 003
Meaning that lower and upper thresholds are ignored, and the receiver needs needs to be in error for 3
seconds before an alarm is triggered.
Note! This alarm attribute is only used in Fiber Optic fed repeaters.
5.15
FTX - Fiber Optic Transmitter
The Fiber Optic Transmitter alarm is triggered when there is a failure in the Fiber Optic transmitter
equipment.
This is a purely digital measurement, i.e. either the transmitter is OK, or broken (Error).
Lower Threshold:
Not Used.
Upper Threshold:
Not Used
Time Threshold:
Defines how many seconds the transmitter should be in error condition opened before an alarm is
generated.
Example:
GET ALA FTX
Reply:
0 0 4 000 000 003
Meaning that lower and upper thresholds are ignored, and the transmitter needs needs to be in error for 3
seconds before an alarm is triggered.
Note! This alarm attribute is only used in Fiber Optic fed repeaters.
5.16
ILI - Illegal Logins exceeded limit
When a user makes an invalid login attempt, the repeater increases a counter of invalid logins. This counter
is decreased by one every hour. If the counter reaches a configurable threshold (please refer to the ILA
attribute), an alarm can be generated to the repeater OMC. The alarm configuration for the ILI attribute is
only used to configure whether the alarm should be sent (Enabled), and if the alarm requires an
acknowledgement.
Lower Threshold:
Not Used
Upper Threshold:
Not Used
Time Threshold:
Not Used
Example
GET ALA ILI
Reply:
0 1 4 0 0 0
indicates that the alarm will be generated, but doesnt require an acknowledgement.
Avitec AB
February 2005
79 (102)
5.17
IOD - Input Overload Downlink
The input circuitry in the downlink chain contains circuitry to detect if there is an input overload on the
downlink chain.
The measurement is always measured in downlink chain 1, but the detector is a broadband detector,
covering the entire downlink band where the repeater is operational.
This alarm is used to detect if there is other equipment in the frequency band causing the input of the
repeater to be blocked, and hence decreasing the repeater performance. This can for example be a base
station from another operator being mounted too close to the repeater donor antenna.
This is a purely digital measurement, meaning that either the measurement is OK, or input overload is high.
Lower Threshold:
Not Used
Upper Threshold:
Not Used
Time Threshold:
Number of consecutive measurements on the input overload detector before an alarm is triggered.
Exampl:
GET ALA IOD
Repyl:
0 0 4 0 0 3
indicates that the alarm transmission is enabled, and also requires an acknowledgement. The input overload
has to be measured as too high three consecutive times before an alarm is triggered.
5.18
IOU - Input Overload Uplink
The input circuitry in the uplink chain contains circuitry to detect if there is an input overload on the uplink
chain.
The measurement is always measured in uplink chain 1, but the detector is a broadband detector, covering
the entire uplink band where the repeater is operational.
This alarm is used to detect if there is other equipment in the frequency band causing the input of the
repeater to be blocked, and hence decreasing the repeater performance. This can for example be harmonics
from TV-transmitters or other strong radio signals.
This is a purely digital measurement, meaning that either the measurement is OK, or input overload is high.
Lower Threshold:
Not Used
Upper Threshold:
Not Used
Time Threshold:
Number of consecutive measurements on the input overload detector before an alarm is triggered.
Exampl:
GET ALA IOU
Repyl:
0 0 4 0 0 3
indicates that the alarm is enabled, and also requires an acknowledgement. The input overload has to be
measured as too high three consecutive times before an alarm is triggered.
5.19
LGO - User logged out from repeater
If a user logs in to the repeater, an alarm is triggered.
Avitec AB
February 2005
80 (102)
Also, an alarm can be configured to be sent away indicating the user logged out. The alarm configuration
for the LGO attribute is only used to configure whether the alarm should be sent (Enabled), and if the alarm
requires an acknowledgement.
Lower Threshold:
Not Used
Upper Threshold:
Not Used
Time Threshold:
Not Used
Example
GET ALA LGO
Reply:
0 0 4 0 0 0
indicates that the alarm will be generated, and also requires an acknowledgement.
5.20
PDL - Power Level BCCH Downlink
If the output power of the BCCH in the downlink drops below a certain threshold, for example if an
obstacle is raised between the feeding base station and the repeater, an alarm is generated.
Lower Threshold:
This indicates the lower value in dBm for when the BCCH is considered too low.
Upper Threshold:
Not Used.
Time Threshold:
Defines how many seconds a too low output power should be measured before an alarm is generated.
Example:
GET ALA PDL
Reply:
0 0 3 024 000 003
indicating that if BCCH drops below 24 dBm an erroneous level is detected, upper threshold is ignored and
the output level must be too low for 3 seconds before an alarm is generated.
Note! If the lower threshold is set lower than the lowest detectable output power in the repeater, the alarm
will be ignored.
5.21
PSL - Power Supply Level
The Power Supply Level is configured to generate an alarm if the mains power supply level drops below or
increases above a configured threshold.
Depending on if power supply is AC or DC configured, the alarm thresholds are set correspondingly.
Lower Threshold:
Indicates the level in Volts that is the lowest allowed input voltage.
Upper Threshold:
Indicates the level in Volts that is the highest allowed input voltage.
Time Threshold:
Defines how many seconds the input voltage has to be outside allowed interval in order to be considered an
alarm.
Example:
GET ALA PSL
Reply:
0 0 1 207 263 3
Avitec AB
February 2005
81 (102)
indicates that if the allowed input Voltage range is 207 Volts to 263 Volts, and that an alarm will be
triggered if Voltage is outside allowed interval for 3 seconds.
5.22
PTM - Power Supply Temperature
If the temperature in the power supply exceeds or decrease below a certain threshold, an alarm is triggered.
Lower Threshold:
Defines the temperature in degrees Celsius for when the temperature is considered too low.
Upper Threshold:
Defines the temperature in degrees Celsius for when the temperature is considered too high.
Time Threshold:
Defines how many seconds a too high temperature should be measured before an alarm is generated.
Example:
GET ALA PTM
Reply:
0 0 1 -20 080 005
Meaning that lower threshold is 20 C , upper temperature threshold is 80 C and the power supply
temperature must be out of range for 5 seconds before an alarm is generated.
5.23
PW1 - Power Supply 1
The Power Supply 1 alarm is configured to generate an alarm if the +28 V drops below, or raise above a
certain threshold.
This threshold is used for all alarm sources where the PW1 is monitored.
Lower Threshold:
Configures in Volts*10 how much the voltage can drop before an alarm status is entered.
For example, configuring lower threshold to 265 means that the lower threshold is 26.5 Volts.
Upper Threshold:
Configures in Volts*10 how much the voltage can increase before an alarm status is entered.
For example, configuring upper threshold to 290 means that the upper threshold is 29.0 Volts.
Time Threshold:
Defines how many seconds the Power Supply has to be in an error state before an alarm is triggered.
Example:
GET ALA PW1
Reply:
0 0 1 275 285 3
indicates that if the power drops 0.5 Volts, or increases 0.5 Volts, an erroneous state is reached. It also
shows that after 3 seconds of error, an alarm is triggered.
5.24
The Power Supply 2 alarm is configured to generate an alarm if the +15 V drops below, or raise above a
certain threshold.
Lower Threshold:
Upper Threshold:
Avitec AB
February 2005
82 (102)
Time Threshold:
Example:
GET ALA PW2
Reply:
0 0 1 143 157 3
indicates that if the power drops 0.7 Volts, or increases 0.5 Volts, an erroneous state is reached. It also
5.25
The Power Supply 3 alarm is configured to generate an alarm if the +6.45 V drops below, or raise above a
certain threshold.
Lower Threshold:
Upper Threshold:
Time Threshold:
Example:
GET ALA PW3
Reply:
0 0 1 630 680 3
indicates that if the power drops below 6.3 Volts, or exceeds 6.8 Volts, an erroneous state is reached. It also
5.26
The Power Supply 4 alarm is configured to generate an alarm if the +6.45 V feeding the controller drops
below, or raise above a certain threshold.
Lower Threshold:
Upper Threshold:
Time Threshold:
Example:
GET ALA PW4
Reply:
0 0 1 630 680 3
indicates that if the power drops below 6.3 Volts, or exceeds 6.8 Volts, an erroneous state is reached. It also
Avitec AB
February 2005
83 (102)
5.27
SZD - Synthesizer Downlink
The synthesizer alarm indicates if a synthesizer in the repeater is unlocked.

This is a purely digital measurement, i.e. either the synthesizer is OK, or in Error.
Lower Threshold:
Not Used.
Upper Threshold:
Not Used
Time Threshold:
Defines how many seconds a synthesizer should be unlocked before an alarm is generated.
Example:
GET ALA SZD
Reply:
0 0 4 000 000 003
Meaning that lower and upper thresholds are ignored, and the synthesizer needs to be unlocked for 3
5.28
SZU - Synthesizer Uplink
The synthesizer alarm indicates if a synthesizer in the repeater is unlocked.

This is a purely digital measurement, i.e. either the synthesizer is OK, or in Error.
Lower Threshold:
Not Used.
Upper Threshold:
Not Used
Time Threshold:
Defines how many seconds a synthesizer should be unlocked before an alarm is generated.
Example:
GET ALA SZU
Reply:
0 0 4 000 000 003
Meaning that lower and upper thresholds are ignored, and the synthesizer needs to be unlocked for 3
5.29
TEM - Temperature
If the temperature in the unit exceeds or decrease below a certain threshold, an alarm is triggered.
Lower Threshold:
Defines the temperature in degrees Celsius for when the temperature is considered too low.
Upper Threshold:
Defines the temperature in degrees Celsius for when the temperature is considered too high.
Time Threshold:
Defines how many seconds a too high temperature should be measured before an alarm is generated.
Example:
GET ALA TEM
Reply:
0 0 1 -20 065 005
Meaning that lower threshold is 20 C , upper temperature threshold is 65 C and the temperature must be
out of range for 5 seconds before an alarm is generated.
Avitec AB
February 2005
84 (102)
5.30
VLI - Valid Login to repeater
If a user logs in to the repeater, an alarm is triggered. The alarm configuration for the VLI attribute is only
used to configure whether the alarm should be sent (Enabled), and if the alarm requires an
acknowledgement.
Lower Threshold:
Not Used
Upper Threshold:
Not Used
Time Threshold:
Not Used
Example
GET ALA VLI
Reply:
0 1 4 0 0 0
indicates that the alarm will be generated, but does not require an acknowledgement.
Note! The VLI alarm will not be sent to the repeater OMC until the user logged out from the repeater, and
thus releases the communications interface.
5.31
WRD - Voltage Standing Wave Ratio Downlink
The VSWR unit monitors the reflected power level at the server anenna port(s). If the the difference
between the transmitted and reflected power is too low, an alarm is generated.
Lower Threshold:
This configures how many dB that can differ between transmitted and reflected power in the downlink
Upper Threshold:
Not used.
Time Threshold:
This defines after how many seconds in alarm condition that an alarm will be generated.
Example:
GET ALA WRD
Reply:
0 0 2 013 000 003
This shows that if the difference between transmitted and reflected power is less than 13 dB, and this is
measured for three seconds in a row, an alarm will be generated.
Avitec AB
February 2005
85 (102)
6 Miscellaneous Command Attributes

The following commands are available both from login and, when supported, via Short Message Service
(SMS). The commands can also be sent from the Avitec Element Manager and the Avitec Maintenance
Console
6.1
ACT ACK
Acknowledges alarm
Format:
ACT ACK X
X is alarm with message number X.

Example:
ACT ACK 42
Acknowledges alarm with message number 42

Requires Read and Write access when logged in.
Via SMS, this can only be performed by the Main Address
6.2
ACT AIM
This command is used to perform antenna isolation measurements.

Antenna isolation measurement is performed using a special feature in the LIMPAs, allowing for output
channel to be shifted from the input channel.
Two channels are used, one BCCH channel, and one so called Listener channel. By default, these channels
are the ones configured in chain one and two, but can with attribute AIC (Antenna Isolation Measurement
Channels) be changed.
The measurement is performed by the following steps:
1.
Output is turned of in chain 2 of the repeater in the downlink path.
2.
Channel in chain 1 is optionally changed to the alternative BCCH channel.
3.
Channel in chain 2 is optionally changed to the alternative Listener channel.
4.
Output channel in chain 1 downlink is changed to the Listener channel.
5.
Since the BCCH in chain one is transmitted as the Listener channel, we measure the input signal on
the Listener channel. Antenna isolation can now be calculated as transmitted output power in chain
one received input signal in chain two.
6.
Compare the measured signal with the alarm threshold ( ALA AIM ), and, depending on measurement
result, generate alarm or end of alarm.
7.
All radio parameters are restored to the default.
(configured using attributes AIE and AIT).
By default, downlink chain 1 and 2 settings are used for the antenna measurements. If only one chain is
enabled in the repeater, or if measurement should be done on other channels, this attribute can be used to
configure the alternate channels.
Typically this measurement takes around 3-4 seconds. Under normal circumstances, the GSM network
should be able to keep the call during this absence of radio signal, but in some cases the call might be
dropped.
If this measurement is requested remotely, the call might be dropped. In order to read out the last
measurement, use the command GET LAI (Last Antenna Isolation Measurement).
Avitec AB
February 2005
86 (102)
Note 1! This command will return the command prompt directly, and the actual measurement will be
performed in the background. In order to get the last measurement, poll the GET LAI until time stamp in
the reply shows that the measurement is completed.
Note 2! Since Fiber Optic repeaters and band shifting repeaters cannot oscillate, measuring antenna
isolation will not give a meaningful result. For that reason, automatic antenna isolation is not by default
enabled in these repeaters.
6.3
ACT CLO
Clears all entries in the alarm log.

6.4
ACT HBT
Heartbeat Request
Causes the controller to send a heartbeat immediately after logout. Can be used to synchronize the heartbeat
transmissions in the Element Manager.
6.5
ACT RCD
This command is used to perform a power cycle of the modem directly after the next logout from the
repeater is performed.
Note! The controller can also be configured to automatically turn off and turn on the modem once per day.
This feature can be used to ensure that the modem parameters when using for example GSM modems
contain the latest network parameters such as HLR update interval etc.
Attribute MPE is used to configure if automatic modem power cycling should be enabled.
Time point for when to power cycling the modem can be set with attribute MPT. In order to read out Last
modem Power Cycling time point, use attribute LPC.
6.6
ACT RHW
Performs a hardware reset of the active devices ( not including the controller)
6.7
ACT RSR
Resets the controller software, as if the power has been switched off and back on.
Note 1! If logged in, an automatic logout will immediately occur.
Note 2! The controller always sends End of Power Supply Alarm after power up, so initiating ACT RSR
will send this alarm to the repeater OMC.
6.8
ACT TRE
Test Relay Connection. For installation testing purposes, it is possible to test the open / close function of
the relay. This test procedure makes sure the relay is closed for 2.5 seconds, then opens for 10 seconds, and
finally closes for 2.5 seconds before going back to original state.
Note! During this test interval, the relay connection will be unaffected by all alarms.
6.9
ACT UPA
Use Primary Address.
Avitec AB
February 2005
87 (102)
Causes the controller to force the controller back to primary OMC address, in case secondary address is
used.
Avitec AB
February 2005
88 (102)
7 Commands
The following commands are only available when logged in to the repeater, either via Local Maintenance
Terminal (LMT), or via a remote login over a modem.
7.1
ACCESS MODEM
If user is logged in locally, the user can directly send characters from the keyboard to the modem attached
to the controller.
When typing ACCESS MODEM, the controller will send all the characters typed directly out the modem port.
All characters replied back from the modem will go directly out the LMT port.
This command can, together with the modem manual, be used to troubleshoot specific modem
communication problems.
To abort an ACCESS MODEM session, press <Ctrl>-C, or use the escape sequence <Wait 1 s> --- <Wait
1 s>. Note that the three - must be pressed within one second.
Note! When accessing the modem port the modem might be configured with echo off, meaning that the
characters entered will not be echoed back to the screen. In order to enable the characters to be echoed back
from the modem, please hit <CR>.
After that, type
ATE1
followed by <CR>.The modem should then reply with

OK
indicating that the echo is enabled.

7.2
CLEAR LOG
By entering this command, the alarm log in the controller will be cleared.
This is the same as using the command ACT CLO, as described in section Miscellaneous Command
Attributes.
7.3
CLEAR SCREEN
By entering this command, the screen will be cleared from old information.
7.4
HARDWARE
Displays a list of all the configured hardware devices in the equipment, including serial number, software
and hardware versions.
This command is also used to reconfigure the system after replacing a broken module.
Format:
HARDWARE REPLACE <OldSNO> <NewSNO> [Article Number]
<OldSNO> is the serial number of the module that has been removed
<NewSNO> is the serial number of the new module
[Article Number] is used if a passive module, such as a distribution board or external interface board is
changed.
Example 1:
HARDWARE REPLACE 2J3A 3ASA
replaces the broken module 2J3A with the new module 3ASA.
Example 2:
HARDWARE REPLACE 3AZC 3EEF J691001A
Avitec AB
February 2005
89 (102)
replaces the old module 3AZC with the new module 3EEF, with article number J691001A.
7.5
HELP
Displays a simple help screen.

Note! This screen can also, if terminal emulation for the communications package is set to VT100, be
brought up by pressing the key F1.
7.6
LOG
The LOG command displays all the entries in the alarm log. Information is given about when the alarm was
detected, what kind of alarm, severity, attribute etc.
7.7
LOGOUT
Ends the controller login session. If logged in remotely, the modem connection will, as a part of the logout
procedure, be disconnected.
7.8
MODEM
This command gives a quick overview of some of the modem configurations, such as modem type and
initialization string etc.
7.9
MP
The controller is responsible for applying power to the communications equipment (CE).
This command turns on and off the power to the modem (MP = Modem Power).
MP ON
Turn the power to the modem on.
MP OFF
Turn the power to the modem off. If this is done remotely, the connection will hang up immediately.
7.10
PERF
Displays the traffic report screen.

7.11
REINIT
This command reinitializes ALL controller factory settings.

The controller will prompt for Date, Time, serial number of active devices etc.
Note! All the hardware configuration, address information, modem configuration, etc will be set to default
values. This means that the unit will not be operational with the old settings anymore.
This command should normally ONLY be used if a control module have been replaced.
7.12
SILENT ON SILENT OFF
When the user is logged out from the controller, the controller sends information out on the LMT port
about current activities, such as modem check, alarm transmission and report transmissions etc.
SILENT ON
configures the controller to not send any information out, while

SILENT OFF
Avitec AB
February 2005
90 (102)
will enable the controller to send information out on the LMT port.
7.13
STATUS
Displays the status screen, containing all relevant RF-parameters, and all status parameters.
7.14
SYSTEM
Displays a screen with different system parameters, such as serial numbers, failure statistics and
hardware/software versions.
7.15
TRACE AMP
This command displays a trace of the sampled input and output power levels. This trace is useful for
verifying if BCCH signals exists, and see the approximate input and output signal levels in dBm. Also, gain
calculation status is displayed for each chain, indicating whether the gain is within expected interval or not.
If an output power is below lowest detectable output power, a <X is displayed, where X is the lowest
detectable output power.
Trace Example:
4UL
1DL
2DL
1UL
2UL
3DL
4DL
3UL
4UL
1DL
2DL
1UL
2UL
3UL
4UL
Ipl:-106.9 Opl:<15.0 - OK
Ipl:-53.7 Opl:36.5 - OK
Ipl:-98.5 Opl:<15.0 - OK
Ipl:-105.2 Opl:<15.0 - OK
Ipl:-105.8 Opl:<15.0 - OK
Ipl:-103.2 Opl:<15.0 - OK
Ipl:-102.8 Opl:<15.0 - OK
Ipl:-63.2 Opl:33.0 - OK
Ipl:-106.6 Opl:<15.0 - OK
Ipl:-53.7 Opl:36.5 - OK
Ipl:-98.6 Opl:<15.0 - OK
Ipl:-105.2 Opl:<15.0 - OK
Ipl:-105.8 Opl:<15.0 - OK
Ipl:-63.1 Opl:33.1 - OK
Ipl:-106.8 Opl:<15.0 OK
As seen in the example, chain 1 downlink (BCCH) has -53.7 dBm input signal, and the output signal is 36.5
dBm. Also, uplink channel 3 (a traffic channel) has an input signal of around -63 dBm and an output power
of 33.1 dBm. Since input level + repeater gain corresponds to measured output power level, an OK is
displayed after each measurement, indicating the amplifier chain works as expected.
Note! Please refer to attributes IPL and OPL for further description of input and output power
measurements.
7.16
TRACE TRAFFIC
The controller constantly measures all timeslots in the uplink paths of all the chains. Every 15 minutes an
average of the utilization in the uplink path is calculated and stored in a log.
By using the TRACE TRAFFIC command it is possible to see the actual utilization on a chain by chain
basis.
Depending on if this is a two or four channel repeater a number of columns are presented.
The first two (or four) columns represent the number of time slots detected in last sampled frame. The
following columns, starting with S: denotes number of timeslots detected in this interval. The columns
starting with Tot: shows how many timeslots have elapsed so far in this interval. The % column shows
percent of the timeslots have been active/occupied in this interval.
Example:
1 0 S:1680 8220 Tot:259950 259950
Avitec AB
%:1.46
February 2005
91 (102)
0
1
0
1
2
2
0
2
S:1708
S:1723
S:1730
S:1755
8244
8267
8301
8330
Tot:261683
Tot:263416
Tot:265149
Tot:266882
261683
263416
265149
266882
%:1.45
%:1.44
%:1.43
%:1.41
This trace shows an average utilization of around 1.4 % so far in this interval.
Avitec AB
February 2005
92 (102)
8 Heartbeat Format
For Status parameters 0 means OK and 1 means ERROR. The information in the Heartbeat message can
also be achieved by using the command GET ALL, which will reply with all information except fields
RepeaterID..Time.
8.1
Heartbeat Format in conventional 2-channel Repeaters
Field
Format
Repeater ID
XX-YY-ZZZZ
Message no
NNNNN
State
STATE
Date
DDMMYY
Time
HHMMSS
RCH
NNNN
Repetition cycle for heartbeat reports
CHA 1
NNN
Repeated channel in chain 1
CHA 2
NNN
ATU 1
NN
Attenuation in uplink chain 1
ATU 2
NN
ATD 1
NN
Attenuation in downlink chain 1
ATD 2
NN
LVU 1
NNN
Peak Limiting in uplink chain 1. If output power is turned off, - is

replied.
LVU 2
NNN

replied.
LVD 1
NN
Peak Limiting in downlink chain 1. If output power is turned off, - is

replied.
LVD 2
NN

replied.
PDL
BB
BCCH Status Downlink
ASU
BB
Status of amplifier saturation alarm uplink
ASD
BB
Status of amplifier saturation alarm downlink
AMU
BB
Status of amplifier chains uplink
AMD
BB
Status of amplifier chains downlink
SZU
BBBB
Synthesizer Alarm Uplink
SZD
BBBB
Synthesizer Alarm Downlink
COM
BBBBBB
Status communication with active devices
BAT / DOO /
EXT / TEM
BBBBBB
State of battery charge for mobile phone equipment/ State of door /

State of external pins 1-4 / Status of temperature
IOU / IOD /
AIM
BBB
Status of Input Overload Uplink / Downlink / Antenna Isolation

Measurement
PSL
Status of Power Supply input Level
PTM
Status of Power Supply Temperature
Avitec AB
Description
February 2005
93 (102)
PW1
BBB
Status of +28 V Power Distribution
PW2
BBB
Status of +15 Power Distribution
PW3
BBBB
Status of +6.45 V Power Distribution
PW4
Status of +6.45 V to Controller
WRD
Status of VSWR downlink
8.2
Heartbeat Format in 2-channel Fiber Optic Repeaters
Field
Format
Repeater ID
XX-YY-ZZZZ
Message no
NNNNN
State
STATE
Date
DDMMYY
Time
HHMMSS
RCH
NNNN
CHA 1
NNN
CHA 2
NNN
ATU 1
NN
ATU 2
NN
ATD 1
NN
ATD 2
NN
LVU 1
NNN

replied.
LVU 2
NNN

replied.
LVD 1
NN

replied.
LVD 2
NN

replied.
PDL
BB
ASU
BB
ASD
BB
AMU
BB
AMD
BB
SZU
BBBB
SZD
BBBB
COM
BBBBBBB
Status communication with active devices
BAT / DOO /
EXT / TEM
BBBBBB

IOU / IOD /
Always 0
BBB
Status of Input Overload Uplink / Downlink / Always 0
PSL
PTM
Avitec AB
Description
February 2005
94 (102)
PW1
BBB
PW2
BBB
PW3
BBBB
PW4
WRD
FRX/FTX
BB
Status Fiber Optic Receiver/Transmitter
8.3
Heartbeat Format in 2-Channel Frequency Translating Repeaters
Field
Format
Repeater ID
XX-YY-ZZZZ
Message no
NNNNN
State
STATE
Date
DDMMYY
Time
HHMMSS
RCH
NNNN
CHA 1
NNN
CHA 2
NNN
LNK 1
NNN
Link Channel in chain 1
LNK 2
NNN
Link Channel in chain 2
ATU 1
NN
ATU 2
NN
ATD 1
NN
ATD 2
NN
LVU 1
NNN

replied.
LVU 2
NNN

replied.
LVD 1
NN

replied.
LVD 2
NN

replied.
PDL
BB
ASU
BB
ASD
BB
AMU
BB
AMD
BB
SZU
BBBB
SZD
BBBB
COM
BBBBBB(B)
Status communication with active devices (optionally an extra status

byte in ER repeaters)
BAT / DOO /
EXT / TEM
BBBBBB

Avitec AB
Description
February 2005
95 (102)
IOU / IOD /
AIM
BBB

Measurement
PSL
PTM
PW1
BBB
PW2
BBB
PW3
BBBB
PW4
WRD
B(B)
Status of VSWR downlink (optionally an extra status byte in ER

repeaters)
8.4
Heartbeat Format in conventional 4-channel Repeaters
Field
Format
Repeater ID
XX-YY-ZZZZ
Message no
NNNNN
State
STATE
Date
DDMMYY
Time
HHMMSS
RCH
NNNN
CHA 1
NNN
CHA 2
NNN
CHA 3
NNN
CHA 4
NNN
ATU 1
NN
ATU 2
NN
ATU 3
NN
ATU 4
NN
ATD 1
NN
ATD 2
NN
ATD 3
NN
ATD 4
NN
LVU 1
NN

replied.
LVU 2
NN

replied.
LVU 3
NN

replied.
LVU 4
NN

replied.
LVD 1
NN

replied.
LVD 2
NN

replied.
Avitec AB
Description
February 2005
96 (102)
LVD 3
NN

replied.
LVD 4
NN

replied.
PDL / ASU /
ASD
BBBB
BBBBBBBB
BCCH Status Downlink/ Amplifier Saturation Status

Uplink/Downlink
AMU / AMD /
SZU / SZD /
COM
BBBBBBBB
Status of amplifier chains uplink / Downlink, Amplifier Saturation

Alarm / Uplink / Downlink, Synthesizer Alarm Uplink / Downlink
and Status of Communication with active devices in a compressed
format.
These values are Hex Coded, and should be used in conjunction with
COM alarm.
For example, the AMU is sent as Hex 4, which is extracted to 0100.
However, COM alarm reports an alarm for LIMPA 2 uplink, why
AMU should be extracted to 01--.
Byte 1
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
AMU:1
AMU:2
AMU:3
AMU:4
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
AMD:1
AMD:2
AMD:3
AMD:4
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
SZU:1
SZU:2
SZU:3
SZU:4
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
SZU:5
SZU:6
SZU:7
SZU:8
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
SZD:1
SZD:2
SZD:3
SZD:4
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
SZD:5
SZD:6
SZD:7
SZD:8
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
COM:1
COM:2
COM:3
COM:4
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
COM:5
COM:6
COM:7
COM:8
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
Byte 6
Byte 7
Byte 8
BAT / DOO /
EXT / TEM
BBBBBBB

IOU / IOD /
AIM / PSL /
PTM
BBBBBB

Measurement/ Status of Power Supply input Level / Status of Power
Supply Temperature
PW1 / PW2 /
PW3 / PW4
BBBBB
Status of Power Distribution. These values are Hex Coded, and

should be used in conjunction with COM alarm.
Avitec AB
February 2005
97 (102)
Byte 1
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
PW1:1
PW1:2
PW1:3
PW1:4
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
PW1:5
PW1:6
PW2:1
PW2:2
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
PW2:3
PW2:4
PW2:5
PW2:6
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
PW3:1
PW3:2
PW3:3
PW3:4
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
PW3:5
PW3:6
PW3:7
PW4
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
WRD
8.5
Heartbeat Format in 4-Channel Frequency Translating Repeaters
Field
Format
Repeater ID
XX-YY-ZZZZ
Message no
NNNNN
State
STATE
Date
DDMMYY
Time
HHMMSS
RCH
NNNN
CHA 1-4
XXXYYYZZZWWW
Repeated channel in chain 1-4. Channel numbers are zero

padded, meaning that if channel for example is set to 7 field will
be 007.
LNK 1-4
XXXYYYZZZWWW
Link channel in chain 1-4. Link channel numbers are zero

padded, meaning that if channel for example is set to 16 field will
be 016.
ATU 1-4
XXYYZZWW
Attenuation in uplink chain 1-4. Attenuation is zero padded,

meaning that if attenuation is set to 1 field will be 01.
ATD 1-4
XXYYZZWW
Attenuation in downlink chain 1-4. Attenuation is zero padded,

meaning that if attenuation is set to 0 field will be 00.
LVU 1-4
XXXYYYZZZWWW
Peak Limiting in uplink chain 1-4. Peak Limiting is zero padded,

meaning that if peak limiting is set to 33, field will be 033.
If output power is turned off, --- (three dashes) is replied.
LVD 1-4
XXYYZZWW
Peak Limiting in downlink chain 1. If output power is turned off,

-- (two dashes) is replied.
PDL / ASU /
ASD
BBBBBBBBBBBB

Uplink/Downlink
AMU / AMD /
SZU / SZD /
BBBBBBBBB
Status of amplifier chains uplink / Downlink, Amplifier

Saturation Alarm / Uplink / Downlink, Synthesizer Alarm Uplink
Avitec AB
Description
February 2005
98 (102)
COM
/ Downlink and Status of Communication with active devices in

a compressed format.
These values are Hex Coded, and should be used in conjunction
with COM alarm.
For example, the AMU is sent as Hex 4, which is extracted to
0100. However, COM alarm reports an alarm for LIMPA 2
uplink, why AMU should be extracted to 01--.
Byte 1
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
AMU:1
AMU:2
AMU:3
AMU:4
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
AMD:1
AMD:2
AMD:3
AMD:4
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
SZU:1
SZU:2
SZU:3
SZU:4
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
SZU:5
SZU:6
SZU:7
SZU:8
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
SZD:1
SZD:2
SZD:3
SZD:4
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
SZD:5
SZD:6
SZD:7
SZD:8
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
COM:1
COM:2
COM:3
COM:4
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
COM:5
COM:6
COM:7
COM:8
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
COM:9
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
Byte 6
Byte 7
Byte 8
Byte 9
BAT / DOO /
EXT / TEM
BBBBBBB
State of battery charge for mobile phone equipment/ State of

door / State of external pins 1-4 / Status of temperature
IOU / IOD /
AIM / PSL /
PTM
BBBBBB

Measurement/ Status of Power Supply input Level / Status of
Power Supply Temperature
PW1 / PW2 /
PW3 / PW4
BBBBB

Byte 1
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
PW1:1
PW1:2
PW1:3
PW1:4
Byte 2
Avitec AB
February 2005
99 (102)
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
PW1:5
PW1:6
PW2:1
PW2:2
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
PW2:3
PW2:4
PW2:5
PW2:6
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
PW3:1
PW3:2
PW3:3
PW3:4
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
PW3:5
PW3:6
PW3:7
PW4
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
WRD
8.6
B(B)
Status of VSWR downlink (optionally an extra status byte in

ER repeaters)
Heartbeat Format in 4-channel Fiber Optic Repeaters
Field
Format
Repeater ID
XX-YY-ZZZZ
Message no
NNNNN
State
STATE
Date
DDMMYY
Time
HHMMSS
RCH
NNNN
CHA 1
NNN
CHA 2
NNN
CHA 3
NNN
CHA 4
NNN
ATU 1
NN
ATU 2
NN
ATU 3
NN
ATU 4
NN
ATD 1
NN
ATD 2
NN
ATD 3
NN
ATD 4
NN
LVU 1
NN

replied.
LVU 2
NN

replied.
LVU 3
NN

replied.
LVU 4
NN

replied.
Avitec AB
Description
February 2005
100 (102)
LVD 1
NN

replied.
LVD 2
NN

replied.
LVD 3
NN

replied.
LVD 4
NN

replied.
PDL / ASU /
ASD
BBBB
BBBBBBBB

Uplink/Downlink
AMU / AMD /
SZU / SZD /
COM
BBBBBBBBB
Status of amplifier chains uplink / Downlink, Synthesizer Alarm

Uplink / Downlink and Status of Communication with active devices
in a compressed format.
These values are Hex Coded, and should be used in conjunction with
COM alarm.
For example, the AMU is sent as Hex 4, which is extracted to 0100.
However, COM alarm reports an alarm for LIMPA 2 uplink, why
AMU should be extracted to 01--.
Byte 1
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
AMU:1
AMU:2
AMU:3
AMU:4
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
AMD:1
AMD:2
AMD:3
AMD:4
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
SZU:1
SZU:2
SZU:3
SZU:4
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
SZU:5
SZU:6
SZU:7
SZU:8
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
SZD:1
SZD:2
SZD:3
SZD:4
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
SZD:5
SZD:6
SZD:7
SZD:8
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
COM:1
COM:2
COM:3
COM:4
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
COM:5
COM:6
COM:7
COM:8
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
COM:9
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
Byte 6
Byte 7
Byte 8
Byte 9
Avitec AB
February 2005
101 (102)
BAT / DOO /
EXT / TEM
BBBBBBB

IOU / IOD /
Always 0 / PSL
/ PTM
BBBBBB
Status of Input Overload Uplink / Downlink / Always 0/ Status of

Power Supply input Level / Status of Power Supply Temperature
PW1 / PW2 /
PW3 / PW4
BBBBBB

Byte 1
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
PW1:1
PW1:2
PW1:3
PW1:4
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
PW1:5
PW1:6
PW2:1
PW2:2
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
PW2:3
PW2:4
PW2:5
PW2:6
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
PW2:7
PW3:1
PW3:2
PW3:3
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
PW3:4
PW3:5
PW3:6
PW3:7
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
PW3:8
PW4
Byte 2
Byte 3
Byte 4
Byte 5
Byte 6
WRD
FRX/FTX
BB
Status Fiber Optic Receiver/Transmitter
Avitec AB
February 2005
102 (102)

GSM EDGE Repeater Manual Rev G PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

GSM EDGE Repeater Manual Rev G PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GSM-EDGE Repeaters

Product Description and

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AND USERS MANUAL

This document is valid for Firmware version 1.04

CSR 922 (R), CSR 924 (R)

CSR 1822, CSR 1824

CSR 1922, CSR 1924

CSFT 1822, CSFT 1824, CSFT 18922, CSFT 18924

CSFT 1922, CSFT 1924

Copyright 2006 AVITEC AB

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AND USER'S MANUAL

Repeater Technology ................................................................................................................ 13

Repeater Types .................................................................................................................. 13

Repeater Applications ....................................................................................................... 17

Product Description .................................................................................................................. 21

Power Supply and Back-up Battery................................................................................... 28

Signal Paths ....................................................................................................................... 36

Monitoring and Control ........................................................................................................... 42

Software Features .............................................................................................................. 42

Alarm System .................................................................................................................... 51

Repeater Heartbeat ............................................................................................................ 62

Traffic Measurement ......................................................................................................... 64

Upgrading Repeater Firmware .......................................................................................... 80

Prepare the Site.................................................................................................................. 82

Install the Repeater ............................................................................................................ 98

Start-up the Repeater ....................................................................................................... 107

Configure the Repeater.................................................................................................... 112

Installation Checklists ..................................................................................................... 127

Maintenance ............................................................................................................................ 132

General ............................................................................................................................ 132

Preventive Maintenance .................................................................................................. 132

Product Disposal.............................................................................................................. 132

Specifications ........................................................................................................................... 133

CSR 922 (R) .................................................................................................................... 133

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AND USER'S MANUAL

CSR 924 (R) .................................................................................................................... 135

CSR1822 ......................................................................................................................... 137

CSR1824 ......................................................................................................................... 139

CSR1922 ......................................................................................................................... 141

CSR1924 ......................................................................................................................... 143

CSFT 922 (R) and CSFT 924 (R).................................................................................... 145

CSFT 1822 and CSFT 1824 ............................................................................................ 149

CSFT 1922 and CSFT 1924 ............................................................................................ 153

6.10 CSFT 91822 and CSFT 91824 ........................................................................................ 157

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AND USER'S MANUAL

Safety Instructions and Warnings

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AND USER'S MANUAL

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AND USER'S MANUAL

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AND USER'S MANUAL

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AND USER'S MANUAL

Definitions, Abbreviations and Acronyms

Avitec Element Manager

Automatic Limit Control

The part of a radio transmission system designed to radiate or receive

More properly referred to as the half-power beamwidth, this is the angle of an

Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number. A channel numbering scheme used

In wireless communication, band refers to a frequency or contiguous range of

The central radio transmitter/receiver that maintains communications with a

Broadcast Control Channel. A downlink point to multipoint logical channel in

Band Selective Repeater

Base Transceiver Station, one part of a base station.

The ratio of power in an RF carrier to the interference power in the channel

The ratio of power in an RF carrier to the noise power in the channel